.^ %' 



^^ ,<^^' 



v> \^ 









"■p,. -^ 



THE 



QUESTION BOOK. 



A GENERAL REVIEW OF 



COMMON SCHOOL STUB IE fS. 



TO BE USED IX SCHOOLS IX COXXECTIOX 
WITH TEXT BOOKS. 

Invaluable to Teachers as a Means of Giving a 
Normal Training. 



BY ASA H. CRAIG. 



FORTIETH THOUSAND. 



CHICAGO, ILL.: ^ 

S. R. WIXCHELL & CO., PUBLISHERS. 

1880. 



\t^V 



\ 






Entered According to Act of Congress, in the Year 1872, by 

ASA H. CRAIG, 

In the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington. 



3ENTTNEL Co., PbINTKRS, 
MlLWACKEK. 



PREFACE, 



Reviews should be one of the most importaxit features 
of any school, for by it the pupil is called upon to answer 
from real memory, instead of the momentary memory 
direct from the text books. 

I have sometimes thought that the majority of teachers 
of our district schools, do not realize the importance cf 
daily, weeklv and monthly reviews. Their greatest zeal 
appears to be m the advancement of their pupils in their 
studies. They labor to stimulate them to pass over a cer- 
tain course, or reach a given point, and it is with pride 
that they note the rapid progress of their classes. We all 
know that students are few who can retain the lessons of 
to-day, without the thought of to-morrow on the same sub- 
ject. 

It is more essential for us to direct apart of our thoughts 
upon what we have learned, than it is to be continually 
pressing farther. Far better it is for us to fully understand, 
and be capable of practically using a part of a science, 
than to have studied the whole and forgotten a part. 
If teachers would adopt the plan of asking some questions 
on previous lessons, at the close of each recitation, a more 
thorough knowledge would be obtained; their memories 
would be continually refreshed, until those facts or prin- 
ciples will be so indelibly fixed upon their minds that they 
cannot be forgotten. It is with this idea of refreshing the 
memory, that the author collected and fomied systematic^ 



4 PREFACE. 

ally the general and essential principles of the Common 
School studies. The object is to facilitate the means of 
reviews, and if, through the publication of this work, 
teachers are induced to direct the attention of their scholars 
to questions promiscuously, then much good will be ac- 
complished. The answers which are given are formed of 
few words, but the intention was to make them clear and 
concise, and as it is to be used in connection with text books, 
reference should be made when the teacher or pupil does 
not fully understand the whole meaning. Errors may be 
found, and the author will consider it a great favor to be 
informed of them, that the correction may be made. 

ASA H. CRAIG. 



QUESTIONS 



ON 



United States History 



r. What is History? 

2. What records show that America was discovered pre- 
vious to the discovery of Columbus? 

3. What proofs show that America was inhabited by a 
race of men previous to the Indians? 

4. Into how many chief epochs can the history of the 
United States be divided? 

5. What land did Columbus first discover, and when? 

6. How many vessels composed the fleet? 

7. When and where did Columbus first discover the 
main land? 

8. How many voyages did he make? 

9. Who discovered the continent before Columbus, and 
where ? 

10. Why was this continent named America instead of 
Columbia? 

11. What reward did Columbus receive for his dis- 
coveries? Where was he buried? 

12. What nations explored the future United States? 

13. Where did the Spaniards make their claims? 

14. Where did the French make theirs? 

15. The English? 

16. The Dutch? 



6 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

17. Who was Ponce de Leon? Why did he come to 
the new continent ? 

18. What discoveries were made by Vasco de Balboa? 

19. What was the object of De Narvaez' explorations? 

20. Who was Ferdinand de Soto? 

21. Wlien and where was the first colony founded on 
the continent? 

22. When, where, and by whom, was the first perma- 
nent settlement made in the United States? The second? 

23. Who first attempted to form English settlements in 
America? 

24. When and where was the first permanent English 
settlement made in the United States? 

25. Who sent out the settlers to Jamestown? 

26. What territory was granted the London Company? 

27. How many charters had the London Company? 

28. What territory was granted the Plymouth Company? 

29. Who were the first Spanish, French, English and 
Dutch discoverers? 

30. Where was the first permanent settlement made by 
the Dutch? 

31. Where was the first permanent settlement made by 
the French? 

32. Who was James Carter? 

;^^. Who were the Jesuit Missionaries? 

34. Who were the first partial explorers of the Missis- 
sippi and its branches? 

35. Who were La Salle and Father Hennepin? 

36. AVhat tract of country was called Acadia? 

37. Who discovered the Hudson river? 

38. What was the object of Hudson's explorations? 

39. Wliat is said to have been the fate of Hudson? 

40. Wliat was that country called explored by Hudson? 

41. WTiat nations claimed it? 

42. How was the dispute settled? 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 7 

43. When, and by whom was the first colony founded 

in Massachusetts? 

44. How many Puritans came on the first voyage? 

45. "Who was their first governor? 

46. "V^'as the colony prosperous? 

47. Who was Roger Williams? 

48. What was the treatment by the Puritans of the 
Quakers? 

49. WTien, and by what nation was negro slavery intro- 
duced into the United States? 

50. Who was Captain John Smith? 

51. Who were Pocahontas and Powhatan? 

52. What became of Pocahontas? 

53. "When did the first English women come to America? 

54. What valuable pl-ants were discovered in America? 

55. When was the first Indian plot to massacre the 
English? 

56. When was the first massacre? The second? 

57. Who was Nathaniel Bacon-? WTiat was the cause 
of Bacon's rebellion? 

58. When was the first Colonial Assembly? 

59. What colonies composed the United Colonies of New 
England ? 

60. V/hen was King Phillip's war? Who was King 
Phillip? 

61. V/hat was the Navigation Act? 

62. Was this Act observed in Massachusetts? 

63. Who was Sir Edmond Andros? 

64. From what was derived the appellation of Charier 
Oak? 

65. Who was Sir W^illiam Phipps? 

66. What was the cause and result of the Salem witch- 
craft? 

67. ^Miat was the cause of the Pequot war? How did 
it temiinate? 



8 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

68. WTiat name did the Dutch give their colony on 
Manhattan Island? 

69. How was this island obtained? 

70. Give a short history' of the early government of 
New York. 

71. When, and by whom was Philadelphia founded? 

72. Who was William Penn? 

73. Why did Lord Baltimore obtain a tract of land 
north of the Potomac river? 

74. What was the cause of Clayborne's rebellion? 

75. After this rebellion, what was the condition of 
Maryland ? 

76. What European wars disturbed the American 
colonies ? 

77. What were the causes of King William's war? How 
long did it last? 

78. What was the condition of the colonies during 
Queen Anne's war? 

79. Were the colonies much affected by King George's 
war? 

80. What part did the Indians usually take in these wars? 

8 1 . Which of the colonies suffered most in early warfare ? 

82. Which of the colonies was free from Indian warfare ? 

83. What was the only treaty never sworn to, and the 
only one never broken by the Indians? 

84. Name the thirteen colonies. 

85. When and where were Harvard and Yale Colleges 
founded? 

86. When, and by whom, was the first newspaper started 
in America? 

87. In 1 741, what caused great excitement in New 
York city? 

88. Who was John Eliot? 

89. Who was WilHam Kidd? 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 9 

90. WTiere and when was the first permanent settle- 
ment made in the Mississippi river valley? 

91. What was the cause of the French and Indian war? 
What parties were engaged in it? 

92. Where was the disputed territory? 

93. Who was sent to request the French to withdraw 
from the territory on the Ohio? 

94. What was the result of Washington's endeavor to 
compel the French to abandon the Ohio? 

95. How were Col. Washington and his soldiers re- 
warded by the Legislature of Virginia? 

96. After Washington's retreat, what general was sent 
in his place against the French? 

97. What was the result of Gen. Braddock's expedition? 

98. Who was the only mounted officer saved in this 
expedition? 

99. Was the next exoeaition against Fort de Quesne 
successful ? 

100. At what other points besides the Ohio did the 
colonists attack the French? 

10 1. What success had the EngHsh in their attack on 
Acadia? 

102. What was their success at Crown Point and Ticon- 
deroga ? 

103. Describe the attack on Ticonderoga? 

104. Were they successful at Niagara? 

105. Who were the commanders at the battle of Quebec? 

106. How was Quebec taken? 

107. What generals were killed at the capture of Que- 
bec ? What were their dying words ? 

108. What was the treaty of peace between France and 
England? 

109. What was the cause and result of Pontiac's war? 
no. In the French and Indian war, what was the most 

remarkable battle? 



10 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

111. What were the effects of this war? 

112. At the close of the French and Indian war, what 
was the p>opulation of the colonies? 

113. What were the chief causes which led to the 
American Revolution? 

114. What were writs of Assistance? 

115. What was the Stamp Act? When passed? 

116. Who was Patrick Henry? 

117. After the repeal of the Stamp Act, what attempt 
was made to tax the colonies? 

118. What was the Mutiny Act? 

119. What occurred in Boston in relation to the tea tax? 

120. What was the Boston Port Bill? 

121. When and where did the first general Congress of 
the colonies assemble? What action did it take? 

REVOLUTIONARY WAR. 

122. Who had command of the British army at the 
corruTnencement of the Revolution? 

123. "VVTien and where was fought the first battle of the 
Revolution? 

124. Describe the batde of Lexington? 

125. When and where was fought the battle of Bunker 
Hill? 

126. Who were the commanders in this battle? What 
was the force of each army, and the loss? 

127. What American general was killed in this battle? 

128. What two forts were captured by the Americans 
in May, 1775? 

129. To whom did these forts surrender? 

130. What did Allen say when asked by what authority 
he demanded the surrender of Ticonderoga? 

131. When did the second Continental Congress as- 
semble? What did this Congress do? 



UNn'ED STATES HISTORY. 11 

132. When did Gen. Washington take command of 
the American army, and how large was his force? 

133. What was the result of the American attack on 
Canada? 

134- Hov/ did \Vashington force the British to evacuate 
Boston ? 

135. Describe the attack on Fort Moultrie. 

136. What daring feat was accomplished by sergeant 
Jasper in this attack? 

1776. 

137. Who introduced measures into Congress that ''The 
United Colonies are, and ought to be, free and independent 
Statesr 

138. Who were appointed to draw up a declaration of 
rights? 

139. When was the Declaration of Independence ac- 
cepted by Congress? 

140. What did this declaration declare? 

141. When were these articles signed, and by how 
maj:iy persons? 

142. What became necessary after this declai-ation ? 

143. What were these articles called, and when were 
they to take effect? 

144. Were they ratified by Congress immediately? 

145. Which State was last to give her con^nt? 

146. Why were the articles of confederation not adapted 
to the general wants of the government? 

147. When was fought the battle of Long Island, and 
with what result? 

148. In the retreat of Washington, through what place 
did he pass? 

149. When was fought the battle of White Plains, and 
who was victorious? 

150. What daring exploit was made by Washington 
near the close of the year 1776? 



12 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

1777. 

151. What battle soon fallowed Washington's success at 
Trenton? 

152. When was fought the battle of Brandywine, and 
who was victorious? 

153. When did I^iladelpliia surrender to the British? 

154. Where did Washington attack the British soon 
after his retreat from Piiiladelphia, and with what result? 

155. WTiat was one of the most daring and remarkable 
exploits during the war, and how accomplished? 

156. What was tte chief object of taking Gen. Prescott? 

157. Who invaded the United States from Canada? 

158. Who commanded the northern division of the 
American army? Who the British? 

159. A\Tiat stratagem did Arnold resort to, in order to 
Tout the British, and relieve Fort Stanwix? 

160. At the battle of Bennington, how did Gen. Stark 
inspire his troops, and with what result? 

161. What battles were fought by Gates and Burgoyne? 
who were victorious? 

162. Wlien, where, and to whom did Burgoyne surrender? 

163. What was the agreement in this surrender? 

164. Where did Wa^ington quarter his troops during 
the winter of 1 777-1 778, and what were their condition? 

1778. 

165. WTio were appointed by Congress to solicit aid 
from the French government? 

166. When and where was a treaty of alliance formed? 

167. In the Spring, what assistance was sent by France? 

168. How long did the British hold Philadelphia? 

169. Where did Congress assemble while the British 
held Philadelphia? 

170. When and where was fought the battle of Mon- 
mouth, and who were victorious? What heroic achieve- 
ment was performed by a woman in this battle? 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. IS- 

171. When did the massacre of Wyoming occur? Who 
directed it? 

1779. 

172. Who had charge of the American forces in the 
south, in 1779? who the British? 

173. At this time, where were Washington and Clinton? 

174. What important posts on the Hudson were sur- 
rendered to the Americans in 1779? 

175. How were these posts taken, and by whom? 

176. What was the result of the American attack on 
Savannah ? 

177. In the siege of Savannali, what nobleman was. 
mortally wounded? 

178. Up to this time, what had been the successes 0/ 
the American navy and privateers? 

179. AVho was Paul Jones? 

1780. 

1 80. I75 1 780, where were the military op>erations mostly 
carried on? 

181. What was the result of the siege of Charleston? 

182. Who succeeded Lincoln in the command of the 
southern forces, and who had command of the British? 

183. WTien and where was the battle of Camden, who 
commanded, and who was victorious? 

184. Who received command of the southern army 
after the unsuccessful operations of Gen. Gates? 

185. What massacre was perpetrated by Col. Tarleton 
and a body of British? 

186. What was the condition of the south after these 
reverses? 

187. What fleet came to assist the Americans in July? 

188. Who was Benedict Arnold? 

189. Who was Major Andre? 

190. What were the names of the captors of Andre,, 
and how were they rewarded? 



14 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

191. What became of Arnold and Andre? 

192. How was Arnold rewarded for his treachery? 

1781. 

193. When and where was fought the battle of Cow- 
pens, and who was victorious ? 

194. What successful operations under Gen. Greene in 
September? 

195. Did Gen. Greene ever gain a decided victary? 

196. How was the war conducted at the north? 

197. What event brought the war to a close? 

198. When and to whom did Cornwallis surrender? 

199. When and where was the treaty of peace signed? 
Who were the commissioners who signed it? 

200. When was peace proclaimed to the American army ? 

201. When and where did Washington resign his mili- 
tary commission? 

202. What was the condition of the country at this time? 

203. What noted persons from foreign powers gave their 
assistance to the Americans? 

204. What was the cause of Shay's rebellion? 

205. When was the national flag adopted? Describe it. 

206. When was the constitution ado}>ted? 

207. After the adoption of the constitution, where did 
Congress first meet? 

208. What were the difficulties ^\^th which the new 
government had to contend? 

Washington's administration. 

209. When was Washington inaugurated as President 
of the United States? 

210. Where was the second session of Congress held? 

211. When did the city of Washington become the 
capitol of the United States? 

212. Who were Washington's Cabinet? 

213. How was the credit of the United States put upon 
a firm basis? 



UNITED STATES HI.STORY. 15 

214. What did Daniel Webster say of Hamilton? 

215. What was the whisky rebellion? 

216. What difficulties now arose with the Indians, and 
what expeditions were sent against them? 

217. What was the condition of forviign affairs? 

ADAMS ' ADMINISTRATION. 

218. During Adams' Administration what memorablJ 
occurrences transpired? 

219. What was the nature of the Alien and Sedition 
Laws? 

220. What were the difficulties with France, and wJiaf 
prevented war with that nation? 

Jefferson's administration. 

221. Ho\V was Thomas Jefferson elected President? 

222. What was the most important event of Jefferson's 
Administration? 

223. What was the cause of the war with Tripoli? 

224. What daring exploit was accomplished by Lieut. 
Decatur? 

225. What difficulties arose between England and the 
United States? 

226. Who was Aaron Burr? Alexander Hamilton? 

227. For what is Robert Fulton noted? 

Madison's administration. 

228. What Indian disturbances occurred in the year 
1811? 

229. WTien was war formally declared against Great 
Britain? How long did it last? 

WAR OF 181 2. 

230. What was the opening event of the w^ar of 1812? 

231. Describe the surrender of Detroit. 

232. What other attempt was made to invade Canada, 
and with what result? 



16 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

233. What were some of the most important naval 
victories for the Americans in 181 2? 

234. During this year, how many prizes were captured 
by the Americans? 

1813. 

235. What was the plan of the campaign of 1813? 

236. What successes had these divisions? 

237. Describe Perry's victory on Lake Erie. 

238. What daring exploit was performed by Perry? 

239. In writing to Gen. Harrison of the victory gained, 
what memorable words did Perry use? 

240. What course did Harrison pursue after hearing of 
the Erie engagement? 

241. What were the principal American naval victories 
in 18 13? 

242. What were the important British naval victories 
in 1813? 

243. In what engagement, and by whom was used the 
sentence, "don't give up the ship?" 

244. What Indian disturbances occurred, and who was 
sent to punish them? 

245. What ravages were committed by Admiral Cock- 
burn? 

1814. 

246. In the third invasion of Canada, what battles 
were fought? 

247. Describe the battle of Lundy's Lane. Who com- 
manded? 

248. Describe the battle of Lake Champlain. 

249. What were some of the ravages of the British on 
the Atlantic coast? 

250. When and where were the articles of peace signed? 

1815. 

251. After this treaty, what terrible battle was fought,, 
and with what loss? 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 17 

252. What was the national debt at this time? 

Monroe's administration. 

253. What was the Missouri compromise bill? Who 
proposed this compromise? 

254. What foreigner visited this country as "The 
Nation's Guest?" 

255. What is the nature of the Monroe doctrine? 

256. How was J. Q. Adams elected President? 

J. Q. ADAMS' administration. 

257. WTiat important events occurred during Adams' 
Administration? 

258. \Miere was the first railroad in the United States? 

259. How long is the Erie Canal? 

Jackson's administration. 

260. AVhat was the NulHfication Ordinance? 

261. "What Indian troubles occurred during Jackson*s 
Administration? 

262. What demands were made of the French govern- 
ment? 

VAN buren's administration. 

263. What were some of the memorable events during 
Van Buren's Administration? 

264. AVhat were some of the causes of the Fifiandal 
Crisis? 

265. ^Vhat occurred during the Patriot war? 

HARRISON and TYLER'S ADMINISTRATION. 

266. How long did Harrison remain in office? 

267. What bill was vetoed by Tyler, to the great dis- 
gust of the men who elected him? 

268. What was the cause of the Dorr Rebellion? 

269. What were the Anti-Rent difficulties? 

270. Whdit occurred in relation to the Mormons? 

271. When was Texas admitted into the Union? 



18 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

272. WTiere was the first telegraph, and what was the 
first message sent by it? 

JAMES K. folk's ADMINISTRATION. 

273. WTiat were the causes which led to the war with 
Mexico? 

274. Who had command of the American army? 

275. What was the treaty of peace between the United 
States and Mexico? 

276. WTiat was the Fugitive Slave Law? 

Pierce's administration. 

277. What was the Kansas Nebraska Bill? Who pre- 
sented it? 

278. How did this bill atfect the inhabitants of Kansas? 

279. What was the Gadsden purchase? 

Buchanan's administration. 

280. What was the Dred Scott Decision 1 

281. Wliat did John Brown attenipt to do? 

282. In the fall elections, who were the candidates for 
the Presidency? 

283. What did each of the parties advocate? 

284. W^hat were tlie causes which led to the Civil war? 

285. Which State first passed ordinance of secession? 

286. What other States followed this example? 

287. What government was formed by these States? 

288. Who was elected President, and when inaugurated? 

Lincoln's administration, r86i. 

289. What event sigi-uilized the commencement of the 
war? 

290. What was the result of this bombardment? 

291. What did Lincoln do in regard to troops? 

292. Where was the first blood shed in this war? 

293. What valuable stores were seized by the Confeder- 
ates? 

294. How did Col. Elmer E. Ellsworth meet his death? 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 19 

295. WTien was fought the battle of Bull Run, and with 
what result? 

296. What effect had this defeat on the northern people? 



297 
298 

299 
300 
301, 



Give an account of the battle of Ball's Bluff. 
WTiat colonel was killed in this battle? 
What was the condition of Missouri? 
When and where was Gen. Lyon killed? 
What proclamation was issued by Davis? In re- 
ply, what did Lincoln declare? 

302. At the commencement of the year, how many 
vessels were in the United States Navy? how many at the 
close of the year? 

303. What did England and France do, by way of en- 
couraging the rebellion? 

304. Who were James M. Mason and John Slidell ? 

305. \^Tiat occurred of much interest in relation to the 
commissioners? 

306. Give a general review of the first year of the war. 

1862. 

307. W^hat was the plan for the campaign of 1862? 

308. What was the size of each army? what successes 
had the Union forces early in this year? 

309. When was fought the battle of Shiloh, and who 
commanded ? 

310. Describe the battle of Shiloh. 

311. Where is Island No. 10? when and by whom was 
it captured? 

312. When was fought the battle of Murfreesboro? who 
were victorious? 

313. What effect had this battle? 

314. What was the plan of the first expedition against 
Vicksburg, and how did it terminate? 

315. WTiat fighting occurred in Missouri? 

WAR ON THE SEA AND ON THE COAST. 

316. Describe the capture of New Orleans. 



20 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

317. After the capture of New Orleans, what course 
did Com. Farragut pursue? 

318. What was gained by the capture of Roanoke 
Island? 

319. What vessels were sunk by the Merrimac? 

320. Describe the encounter between the Merrimac 
and Monitor. 

321. What would undoubtedly have been the final result 
if the Merrimac had been succesful? 

322. After this engagement, how was the United States 
Navy looked upon by European powers? 

323. What became of the boats Merrimac and Monitor? 

WAR IN THE EAST. 

324. In the war in the east, what was the objective point? 

325. Who commanded in the Peninsular Campaign? 

326. Describe the siege of Yorktown. 

327. When was fought the battle of Williamsburg? 

328. What were McClellans plans? how foiled? 

329. What were the movements of Stonewall Jackson? 

330. ^^^lat was the effect of this movement? 

331. While these events were transpiring in the Shen- 
andoah valley, what were the movements of McClellan? 

332. After the battle of Fair Oaks, what course did 
McClellan pursue, and what desperate fighting occurred? 

333- ^^'hat is the distance from Fair Oaks to the James 
river? 

334. What was the effect of this campaign? 

335. What orders did McClellan now receive? 
;^;^6. Describe Fee's campaign against Pope. 

337. What was the effect of this campaign? 

338. What did Lee do? 

339. Who assumed command of the army of the Poto- 
mac after Pope's defeat? 

340. What battles were fought soon after he took com^ 
mand? 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 21 

341. After these battles, what course did Lee pursue? 

342. What was the effect of Lee's defeat? 

343. Why was McClellan again superseded? who took 
command? 

344. When was fought the battle of Fredericksburg, and 
with what result? 

345 What were the Confederate victories during this 
year? 

346. What were the Union victories? 

347. What terrible Indian massacre occurred? 

1863. 

348. What was the plan of the war of 1863? What 
was the force? 

349. When was issued the Emancipation Proclamation? 

350. Describe the second expedition against Vicksburg. 

351. WTien did the garrison of Vicksburg surrender? 

352. Whsit effect had this campaign? 

353. When was fought the battle of Murfreesboro? 
Who were victorious? 

354. After this battle, what were the movements in 
Tennessee? 

355. By what means was the army of the Tennessee 
relieved? 

356. Where was Hooker, and how did he so suddenly 
appear before the Confederate army at Chattanooga? 

357. After the battle of Fredericksburg, who took 
command of the army of the Potomac? 

358. When was fought the battle of Chancellorville? 

359. In this battle, what valuable Confederate officer 
was killed? 

360. Who succeeded Hooker after the battle of Chan- 
cellorville? 

361. What were the movements of Lee? 

362. How was his progress arrested? 



22 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

363. At the battle of Gettysburg, what was the loss? 

364. The loss of Vicksburg and the battle of Gettys- 
burg had what effect on the Confederacy? 

365. How did Admiral Dupont attempt to take 
Charleston ? 

366. What were the Confederate successes for the 
year 1863? 

367. The Union successes? 

1864. 

368. When was Gen. Grant appointed Lieutenant Gen- 
eral of all the Union forces? 

369. WTiere was the main strength of the Confederacy? 

370. What plan was now adopted? 

371. Describe Sherman's advance to Atlanta. 

372. When did Atlanta surrender? 

373. What had been the loss during this campaign of 
four months' fighting? 

374. What movement was made by Hood, and why? 

375. What became of Hood's army? 

376. Describe Sherman's "March to the Sea," after 
burning Atlanta. 

377. What effect had this march on Georgia? 

378. At the time of Grant's move towards Richmond, 
what battles were fought? 

379. Describe the battle of the Wilderness. 

380. What did Grant do, and what battle followed? 

38 1. Where was the next engagement? 

382. What was the result of the attack on Petersburg? 
^S;^. What was the loss in this campaign? 

384. During the siege of Richmond, what two important 
events occurred? 

385. WHiat was the result of the mine explosion? 

386. "V^Tiat raids were made by Gen. Early? 

387. What was secured by these expeditions? 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. Zti 

388. What did Gen. Sheridan do? 

389. What was the effect of Sheridan's successes? 

390. Describe the Red River Expedition. 

391. When was the massacre of Fort Pillow, Ky. 

392. AVhat brilliant naval victory did Admiral Farragut 
achieve? 

393. Describe the expedition against Fort Fisher. 

394. What was the Alabama? What damage did she do? 

395. When, where, and with what result was the en- 
counter between the Kearsarge and the Alabama? 

396. What were the Confederate victories during this 
year? 

397. What were the Union victories? 

1S65. 

398. When were Petersburg and Richmond evacuated 
by the Confederates? 

399. When and to whom did Lee and Johnson surrender? 

400. When was Jefferson Davis captured, and how? 
What was done with him? 

401. How long did the war last? 

402. When and by whom was Abraham Lincoln assas- 
sinated? 

403. What became of Booth? 

404. What was the cost of the war? 

405. How was slavery abolished in the United States? 

406. "What caused trouble between Johnson and Con- 
gress? 

407. What were the most important bills passed over 
the President's veto? 

408. What is the nature of these bills? 

409. For what was Johnson impeached? 

410. Whsit is the fourteenth Amendment to the consti- 
tution? WTien adopted? 

411. AVhat demand was made by the United States 
government of France? 



24 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

412. When was the Atlantic cable completed? 

413. When was the U. P. R. R. completed? 

414. When was the fifteenth Amendment formally an- 
nounced? 

415. What is the nature of this amendment? 

416. What proclamation did Grant proclaim? 

417. What was the difficulty with England? How 
settled? 

418. Name the Presidents in their order. How long in 
office? Who died in office? 

419. Which three ex-Presidents died on the 4tli of July? 

420. What father and son were Presidents? 

421. Who said "I would rather be right than be Presi- 
dent?" 

422. Name the rebellions which have occurred in our 
history. 

423. When, where, and by whom were each of the 
States settled, and when admitted as a State? 

424. What are the acquisitions of territory to the United 
States? 



ANSW^ERS TO QUESTIONS 



ON 



United States History 



1. A recital of what has happened respecting nations 
and countries. 

2. The historical records of Iceland show that America 
was discovered by the Northmen in 1002. 

3. In Llexico and Central America there are ruins of 
ancient cities, which must have been erected during a high 
state of civilization, and the Indians have no traditions as 
to their origin. Tnousands of curiously constructed earth 
mounds, which are scattered through the Mississippi river 
valley, and from the gulf to the lakes, are evidences of a 
different race of men which inhabited the continent pre- 
vious to the Indians. 

4. Six: First, from the discovery of the continent to 
the first settlement. Second, from the first settlement to 
the breaking out of the Revolutionary war. Third, from 
the commencement of this war to the adoption of the 
constitution. Fourth, from the adoption of the constitu- 
tion to the commencement of the civil war. Fifth, from 
the beginning of this war to the surrender of Lee's army. 
Sixth, from the close of the rebellion to some future period 
of more than ordinary importance. 

5. The island of Guanahani or San Salvador, on Fri- 
day, Oct. 1 2th, 1492. 



26 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

6. Three small vessels; the Pinta, Santa Maria and 
Nina. 

7. At the mouth of the Oionoco river, in 1498. 

8. Four. 

9. John Cabot and his son Sebastian, who discovered 
the coast of Labrador in 1497. 

10. A German, who pubHshed a description of the new 
world, suggested that it should be called America in honor 
of Americus Vespucius, who made great claims to the first 
discoveries. 

11. Others were jealous of his successes; treachery 
svas planned; false statements were made; and he died 
without reward, almost broken hearted. 

He was buried at Valladolid, Spain, where he remained 
until 1 5 13; he was then transported to Seville; and again 
in 15,36, his remains were removed to the city of Saint 
Domingo, Hayti, and there interred; but in 1796, they 
were taken to their final resting place, in the cathedral at 
Havana, with imposing ceremonies. 

12. The Spaniards, English, French and Dutch. 

13. The West Indies and southern part of the United 
States. 

14. They claimed the northern part of the United 
States and Canada, having explored the great lakes, the 
Mississippi river, from the Falls of St. Anthony to the gulf, 
the Illinois, Wisconsin, Wabash, Maumee, Fox, and many 
other rivers. 

15. Having discovered and explored the Atlantic coast 
at various points, they claimed this vast territory, naming 
it Virginia, in honor of Elizabeth, the Virgin Queen. 

16. In New York, which they called the New Nether- 
lands. These claims were based upon the explorations of 
Hudson. 

17. He was a Spanish explorer, who, being a disgraced 
soldier, sought the glory of conquest to restore his tarnished 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 27 

reputation. He also went in search of a fountain, the ele- 
ments of which were supposed to restore youth to all who 
drank of its waters. He discovered Florida in 15 12. 

18. He crossed the isthmus of Panama, and from the 
summit of the Andes discovered the Pacific Ocean. 

19. Receiving a grant of Florida in 1528, he with 300 
men attempted its conquest, allured by the prospect of 
gold. The exploration proved a failure. Many perished 
while wandering in the swamps. After arriving at the gulf 
of Mexico, they hurriedly constructed boats and put to sea; 
they were shipwrecked and De Narvaez was lost. Six years 
afterward, the only survivors (four) reached the Spanish 
settlements on the Pacific coast. 

20. A Spanish nobleman, who invaded Florida in 1539, 
with the prospect of gold and conquests. He discovered 
the Mississipi river, and was shortly after buried in its waters. 

21. At Darien, by the Spaniards in 15 10. 

22. At St. Augustine, in 1565, by Melendez, a Spaniard. 
The second was also founded by the Spaniards, at Santa 
Fe, in 1582. 

2;^. Sir Walter Raleigh and Sir Humphrey Gilbert. 
Their labors were unsuccessful. 

24. At Jamestown, Virginia, in 1607. 

25. The London Company, composed of noblemen, 
gentlemen, and merchants of London. 

26. All of the country between the southern limit of 
Maryland and Cape Fear. 

2 7. Three : the first charter containe-d no idea of self-gov- 
ernment. The people chose none of their officers; the king 
was to appoint two councils ; one to reside in London, and 
have control of all the colonies, and the other to reside in 
each colony, and have control of its local affairs. The 
second charter vested the authority in a governor instead 
of a local council; this change gave the colonists no ad- 
ditional rights, neither were they consulted with regard to 



28 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

the change. The third charter gave the stockholders power 
to regulate the affairs of the company themselves. 

28. That tract of country lying between the forty-first 
and forty-fifth degrees of latitude. This was called 
North Virginia. 

29. Columbus was the first Spanish, John Verrazani, 
the first French; John Cabot, the first English; and Hud- 
son, the first Dutch discoverer. 

30. At New York, in 16 13. 

31. At Port Royal, Nova Scotia, in 1605. 

32. A French explorer, who made three voyages to the 
St. Lawrence river, which he discovered in 1534. 

^;^. They were French Priests, who sought to convert 
the Indians to the Catholic faith; they were the explorers 
of the Mississippi valley. In 1668, they founded the mis- 
sion of St. Mary, the oldest European settlement in Michi- 
gan. 

34. Joliet and Marquette. 

35. They were Jesuit Missionaries, and early explorers 
of the northern lakes and rivers. 

^6. The tract lying between the present cities of Phila- 
delpliia and Montreal. The name has since been confined 
to New Brunswick and the adjacent islands. 

37. Henry Hudson, in 1609, who sailed up the river 
116 miles, to where the city of Hudson now stands. 

^S. To find a north-east passage to the East Indies. 

39. In 16 10, after discovering the strait and bay which 
bears his name, he was placed in an open boat by his com- 
panions and abandoned. 

40. The New Netherlands. 

41. The English and Dutch. The English based their 
claims upon the discoveries of the Cabots, and the Dutch 
upon the discoveries of Hudson. 

42. By force of arms. The English maintained posses- 
sion. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 20 

43. By the Puritans, or Pilgrim Fathers, who landed at 
Plymouth, December 30th, 1620. 

44. One hundred. They came in a vessel called the May 
Flower. 

45. John Carver. 

46. Nearly one-half of the number died during the first 
four months, and all would have perished but for the aid of 
fishermen off the coast. Their sufferings continued four 
years, after which they were prosperous. 

47. A Puritan, who for liberal reHgious opinions was 
banished from Massachusetts, He afterward formed the 
first settlement in Rhode Island. 

48. The Quakers were banished from the colony, many 
were imprisoned, and four put to. death. 

49. By the Dutch, in 1620. 

50. One of the founders of Jamestown who succeeded 
Ratcliffe, and governed the affairs of the colony with great 
energy and success. 

51. The daughter of the Indian chief Powhatan, who 
saved the life of Capt. John Smith, who had been sentenced 
to death by her father. 

52. She married a young English planter, John Rolf. 
Three years after, she visited London, was taken sick and 
died. She left an infant son, whose posterity are many of 
the leading families of Virgmia. 

53. In 1608, to Jamestown. 

54. Indian corn, potatoes and tobacco. 

55. In 1609, but the massacre was prevented by Poca- 
hontas, who revealed the plot to the people of Jamestown. 

56. In 1622, when in one hour, 347 men, women and 
children were massacred. The second was in 1644, when 
300 were killed; this plot was originated by Qpechancan- 
ough, and was intended to extermmate the English settlers. 

57. A patriotic young lawyer, who rallied a company 
and defended the settlements against the Indians; he was 



30 THE QUESTION BOOK, 

denounced by governor Berkley as a traitor for acting with- 
out orders. During the contest \\'hich followed, Berkley 
was driven out of Jamestown, and the village burned. In 
the midst of tliis struggle Bacon died. 

58. At Jamestown, June 28, 1619. It consisted of the 
governor, council and deputies or "burgesses," chosen from 
the various plantations. 

59. Massachusetts, Plymouth, RJiode Island and Con- 
necticut. 

60. The war commenced in 1675, continuing about one 
year. King Phillip was an Indian chief, the son of Massasoit; 
he became jealous of the intrusion of the whites, and 
planned a confederation of the Indian tribes against their 
intruders. He was shot by an Indian, an ally of tlie English, 
in 1676. 

61. In 1660, the British Parliament ordered that the 
commerce of the colony should be carried on in English 
vessels, and their tobacco shipped to England. 

62. It was not, and an ofticer was sent to enforce the 
act, but without success. Charles II. seized upon the excuse 
thus offered, and made Massachusetts a royal province. 
The King died before his plan was completed, but James 
II, in 1686, declared the charters of all the New England 
colonies forfeited. 

6;^. The first royal governor of New England. He was 
sent by James II. The colonies endured his oppressions 
for three years, when learning that his royal master was 
dethroned, tlieyrose against him, and he was put in jail. 

64. ^^llen James II. declared that the charters of all 
the New England Colonies were forfeited, Connecticut re- 
fused to surrender hers. Governor Andros demanded the 
charter of tiie assembly then in session at Hartford, and 
during the debate which ensued, the lights were suddenly 
extinguislied, the charter was seized by William Wadsworth 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 31 

and hidden in the hollow of an old oak, which, since that 
time has been called the "Charter Oak." 

65. The second royal governor of Massachusetts, or a 
province embracing Massachusetts, Maine and Nova Scotia. 

66. A superstition prevailed that persons were subject 
to the control of invisible evil spirits, and it is the received 
opinion that 200 persons were accused, 150 imprisoned, 
28 condemned, 19 hanged, and one pressed to death. 

67.' The Indians had become troublesome and danger- 
ous to the early settlers of Connecticut, who resolved to 
make war upon the Pequots. The battle took place at 
Mystic River, where the tribe was annihilated, those who 
were not killed were captured and made slaves, or escaped 
and joined other tribes. 

68. New Amsterdam. 

69. It was purchased of the Manhattan Indians for 
about $24. 

70. After the discovery of the Hudson river, the West 
India Company obtained of the Dutch government a grant 
of New Netherlands, and settlements were made at New 
Amsterdam and Fort Orange, (Albany.) For twenty years 
New York was subject to Indian butcheries, varied by 
difficulties with the Swedes on the Delaware, and the Eng- 
lish on the Connecticut. In September, 1664, an English 
fleet came to anchor in the harbor of New Amsterdam, and 
demanded the surrender of the town. Peter Stuyvesant, the 
last and ablest of the four Dutch governors, plead with the 
council to fight, but in vain. They wished for English 
rule. The surrender was signed, and the colony was named 
New York. The English governors did not satisfy tiie 
peoi)le, so that when, after nine years of English rule, a. 
Dutch fleet appeared in the harbor, the people went back 
quietly under their old rulers. The next year peace was de- 
clared between England and Holland, and New Amster- 
dam became New York again. Andros nov,* became gov- 



32 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

ernor, and New York was a royal province until the revolu- 
tion. 

71. It was founded in 16S3, by William Penn, who pur- 
chased the land of the Swedes ; the name signifies brotherly 
love. 

72. A Quaker, who with a band of followers, settled in 
Pennsylvania, in 16S2, buying the lands of the Indians. 

73. To secure for the friends of this church a Catholic 
refuge from the persecutions which they were then suffering 
in England. 

74. The Virginia colonies claimed that Lord Baltimore's 
grant covered territory belonging to them. Clayborne, a 
member of the Jamestown council, having established two 
trading posts in Maryland, prepared to defend by force of 
arms. 

On the eve of battle he fled to Virginia, and his party 
was defeated. Clayborne was tried for treason, but ac- 
quitted. Ten years afterward he came back, raised a re- 
bellion, and drove Calvert (Lord Baltimore,) then governor 
of Maryland, out of the colony; Calvert returned with a 
large force, and Clayborne fled. 

75. The Protestants, having obtained a majority in the 
assembly, excluded Catholics from their rights; assailed 
their religion ; and even declared them outside the pro- 
tection of the law. Civil war ensued. At one time two 
governments were sustained, one Protestant, and the other 
Cathohc. In 1691, Lord Baltimore was entirely deprived 
of his rights as proprietor, and Maryland became a royal 
province. In 1715, the fourth Lord Baltimore recovered 
the government, and religious toleration was again restored. 

76. King William's war in 1689, Queen Anne's in 1702, 
and King George's in 1 744. 

77. In 1689 war broke out in Europe between Erxgland 
and France. The contest extended to the American 
colonies, and lasted seven years. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 33 

78. The war lasted eleven years; the New England 
frontier was again desolated; remote settlements were 
abandoned; the people betook themselves to palisaded 
houses, and worked their farms with their guns always at 
hand. 

79. They were not. The only event of importance 
was the capture of Louisburg, on the island of Cape 
Breton. Peace being established, England gave back 
Louisburg to the French. 

80. They assisted the French against the English. 

Si. Virginia, Massachusetts, Connecticut and New- 
York. 

82. Pennsylvania. 

S;^. William Penn's treaty with the Indians. 

84. Virginia, New York, New Jersey, Massachusetts, 
New Hampshire, Maryland, Connecticut, Rhode Island, 
Delaware, Pennsylvania, North Carolina, South Carohna, 
and Georgia. 

85. Harvard was founded at Cambridge, Mass., in 1638; 
Yale at New Haven, Conn., in 1701. 

86. It was the BostoJi News Letter, and was established 
in 1704, by Bartholomew Green. 

87. The supposed negro plot; the plan being to bum 
New York, and make one of their number governor. Many 
innocent persons suffered death. 

ZZ. A minister who labored among the Indians, and for 
his devotion was called the Indian Apostle; he also trans- 
lated the Bible into the Indian language. 

89. He was a man sent out by England to suppress 
piracy in 1696, but turned pirate himself; he was captured 
in Boston, in 1699, sent to England, condemned and ex- 
ecuted. 

90. At Kaskaskie in Illinois, about 1690. 

91. The cause was disputed territory, and the parties 
were the French and Indians against the English. 



34 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

92. West of the Alleghany mountains, along the Ohio 
river and the northern lakes. 

93. George Washington. 

94. After some successes Washington marched to a 
place called Great Meadows, where he built Ft. Necessity. 
Early in July, 1755, the fort was attacked by the whole 
French and Indian force, but was defended with such re- 
sistance that the French Commander, Count de Villiers, 
sent in a flag of truce. Washington gave up the fort but 
was permitted to march away with all the honors of war. 

95. A vote of thanks was passed, and each soldier was 
to receive a pistole. 

96. Gen. Braddock with a select force of 1200 men. 

97. When within a mile of Fort du Quesne he was sur- 
prised by a body of French and Indians in ambush. Brad- 
dock was mortally wounded, and nearly all of his officers, 
and one-half of his troops were killed. Braddock was 
buried during the retreat, and Washington ordered the 
wagons to pass over his grave that his body might not fall 
into the hands of the Indians. 

98. Washington, although four bullets pierced his coat, 
and two horses were shot under him. 

99.. It was. Gen. Forbes led this expedition. Washing- 
ton commanded the Virginia troops. After the capture of 
the fort it received the name of Pittsburg, in honor of 
William Pitt. 

100. At Louisburg, Quebec, Crown Point and Niagara. 

10 1. The French forts at the head of Fundy Bay were 
quickly taken, and the region east of the Penobscot fell 
into the hands of the English. Gen. Loudoun planned an 
attack on Louisburg, but, learning that the French fleet 
contained one more ship than his own, gave it up. The 
next year Gen. Amherst and Wolf captured the city after 
a severe bombardment, and took possession of the entire 
island. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 35 

1 02. The English under Johnson met the French com- 
manded by Dieskau, near the head of Lake George, where 
a battle was fought, the English being victorious. Johnson 
after building a fort which he called William Henry, feared 
defeat if he attempted to take Crown Point, and returned 
to Albany. 

103. On a calm Sunday morning, about four months 
belore the fall of Ft. du Quesne, Gen. Abercrombie with a 
thousand boats full of soldiers, with waving flags and mar- 
tial music, swept down Lake George to attack Ticonderoga. 
The result was a disastrous repulse. The next year, 1759, 
at the approach of Gen. Amherst with a large army, both 
Ticonderoga and Crown Point were evacuated. 

104. When Gen. Shirley reached Osvrego, and hearing 
of the disastrous defeat of Braddock he was discouraged, 
and after building a fort came home. Four years after 
Niagara surrendered to the English. 

105. General Wolf commanded the English, and Gen. 
Montcalm the French. 

106. Gen. W^olf while reconnoitering obseryecf a nar- 
row path winding among the rocks to the top, at night he 
descended the river; his men landed; climbed the steep 
ckff; seized the guards; and at break of day he stood 
with his entire army drawn up in order of battle on the 
plains of Abraham; a desperate battle ensued; five days 
after the city surrendered. 

107. Generals Vv^olf and Montcalm. Wolf, when in- 
formed that the French were running, exclaimed, "Now 
God be praised, I die happy. " Montcalm when told that 
he could not live more than twelve hours, replied, "So much 
the better; I shall not see the surrender of Quebec." 

108. France gave up all the territory east of the Mis- 
sis ippi, except two small islands south of Newfoundland, 
retained as fishing stations. In this treaty, Spain ceded 
Florida to England, and France ceded to Spain New Or- 



86 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

leans, and all the territory she owned west of the Missis- 
sippi. 

109. When the English took possession of the western 
forts great discontent was roused, for the French had won 
the hearts of the Indians. Pontiac, a chief of the Ottawas, 
formed a confederation of the tribes against the English. 
Eight forts were surprised and captured, thousands of per- 
sons fled from their homes to avoid the scalping knife. By 
a disagreement among the Indians the confederation was 
broken and a treaty signed. 

no. The capture of Quebec, the 13th of September, 

1759- 

111. It cost the colonists $16,000,000, and England re- 
paid only $5,000,000; they lost thirty thousand men; they 
suffered the untold horrors of Indian barbarity ; taxes were 
sometimes equal to two-thirds of the income of the tax 
payers; they learned to think and act independently of the 
mother country. 

112. About 2,000,000 people. Boston and Philadelphia 
contained about 18,000 inhabitants each. 

113. The colonies were unjustly taxed, and not allowed 
the right of sending representatives to Parliament. 

114. Warrants authorizing the King's officers to search 
for smuggled goods. This gave the custom house officers 
power to enter a man's house or store at his pleasure. The 
colonists resisted such power as a violation of their rights. 

115. That all bonds, deeds, newspapers, pamphlets, 
&c., should be stamped. It was passed by Parhament in 

1765. 

116. A Virginian, who with boldness and eloquence 
distinguished himself by his opposition to the Stamp Act. 

117. A duty was laid on all tea, glass, paper, and 
painters' colors, which should be imported. 

118. That the colonies should furnish the soldiers with 
quarters and necessary supplies. This act aroused the indig- 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 37 

nation of the Americans. To be taxed was bad enough, but 
to shelter and feed their oppressors was unendurable. 

119. Vessels containing nearly 350 chests of tea were 
boarded by Americans disguised as Indians, and the tea 
was thrown into the harbor. 

120. An act of Parliament forbidding the landing of 
goods in Boston. 

121. The first Continental Congress \yas held at Phila- 
delphia, Sept. 5th, 1774. They voted not to obey the recent 
acts of Parliament; they protested against standing armies 
being kept in the colonies without consent of the people ; 
they sustained Massachusetts in her resistance, and agreed 
to hold no intercourse with Great Britain. 

122. General Gage. 

123. At Lexington, near Boston. April 19th, 1775. 

124. Gen. Gage, learning that the people were gather- 
ing military stores at Concord, sent eight hundred men to 
destroy them; at Lexington a skirmish ensued, in which 
seven Americans were killed. After destroying the stores, 
they hastily retreated, followed by the militia, who were 
eager to avenge the death of their countrymen. In their re- 
treat to Boston they lost nearly three hundred men. 

125. On Breed's Hill, June 17th, 1775. 

126. Gen. Howe of the British army, and of the Amer- 
icans it is uncertain who commanded, but it is thought by 
some to have been Prescott. The British force was 3,000, 
loss 1,000; the American force, 1,500, loss 450. 

127. General Warren. 

128. Ticonderoga and Crown Point. 

129. Ethan Allen and Benedict Arnold. 

130. "I demand it in the name of the Great Jehovah 
and the Continental Congress. '' 

131. It assembled May loth, 1775, when they voted to 
raise and equip 20,000 men, ajnd give the command to Gen. 



38 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

Washington. It was again convened at Philadelphia, in Mxy^ 
1776. 

132. June 15th, 1775. His force was 14,000 men. 

133. They were unsuccessful, receiving a defeat at 
Quebec, where Gen. Montgomery, the American general, 
was killed. 

134. By sending a force at night to fortify Dorchester 
Heights. This overlooked Boston, and Howe remembering 
the lesson of Bunker Hill, decided to leave. The next day, 
March i8th, Washington entered amid great rejoicing. 

135. June 28th, a British fleet, under Admiral Parker, 
opened Are on Fort Moultrie. The response from Moul- 
trie's guns was so fearful that the fleet was badly shattered, 
and they withdrew and sailed for New York. 

136. Early in the action the flag staff was struck by a 
ball, Jasper leaped over the breastworks, caught up the 
flag, and springing back tied it to a sponge staff, and hoisted 
it in its place. 

137. Richard Henry Lee, of Virginia, June 7, 1776. 

138. Thomas Jefferson, John Adams, Benjamin Frank- 
lin, Roger Sherman, and Robert R. Livingston. 

139. July 4th, 1776. 

140. That the thirteen United States of America were 
free and independent. 

141. August 2d, 1776, by all the members of Congress, 
numbering fifty-cix. 

142. That articles of government should be drawn. 

143. Articles of Confederation, and were to take effect 
when ratified by all the States. 

144. No; delays and objections arose, but they were 
established in March, 1781. 

145. Rhode Island. 

146. Because it gave no real power to Congress, who 
could only recommend what should be done. Congress 
could borrow money, but was not empowered to pay it^ 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 39 

could declare war and determine how many troops should 
be raised, but could not levy taxes to defray expenses, nor 
compel the States to raise the troops. 

147. Aug. 27th, 1776, the Americans being compelled 
to withdraw, closely pursued by the British under Gen. 
Howe. 

148. North by the way of Harlem, White Plains and 
Chester, then southwest through New Jersey to the Penn- 
sylvania side of the Delaware river. 

149. Oct. 28th, 1776, neither side being victorious, al- 
though Washington retreated when the British received re- 
inforcements. 

150. He crossed the Delaware December 26th, pro- 
ceeded to Trenton, captured one thousand Hessians and 
a large quantity of arms. 

151. The battle of Princeton, Jan. 3d, 1777, which was 
one of the hottest fought battles during the whole war. 
The Americans were successful. That night Washington left 
his camp fires burning to deceive the enemy, and by a 
circuitous route passed the British; fell upon the troops 
near Princeton; routed them; took three hundred prisoners; 
and by rapid marches reached Atorristown Heights in 
safety. 

152. September nth, 1777, Washington was defeated, 
retreating to Philadelphia. 

153. September 26th, 1777, without opposition. 

154. At Germantown, October 4th, meeting with a de- 
feat, losing 1,200 men. 

155. The capture of the British General Prescott, by 
Col. Barton, with forty select soldiers, who crossed from 
Warwick in the night to the island of Rhode, where the 
British army was encamped, proceeded to Gen. Prescott's 
lodgings, captured him and returned. 

156. To have an officer equal in rank to Gen. Lee, that 
they might exchange. 



40 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

157. Gen. Burgoyne with 10,000 British and Indian 
troops. 

158. Gen. Gates commanded the Americans, and Gen, 
Burgoyne the British. 

159. He sent a half-witted boy into the camp of the 
British, who spread the report that a large body of 
Americans was close at hand. When asked their number, 
he could only answer by pointing to the leaves of the trees, 
the Indians and the British were so frightened that they fled 
immediately. 

160. As the British lines were forming for the attack, 
he exclaimed: "There are the red coats, we must beat 
them to-day or MoUie Stark is a widow. " They gained a 
victory, and took six hundred prisoners. 

161. The battles of Stillwater, (Saratoga) Sept. 19th, 
and Oct. 7th, 1777; the Americans were successful. 

162. To Gen. Gates at Saratoga, Oct. 17th, 1777. 

163. That the British should give up thei-r arms and 
ammunition, return to England, and engage no more in the 
war. 

164. In Valley Forge. The men were encamped in 
cold, comfortless huts, with little or no clothing, many were 
barefooted, few had blankets, and straw could not be ob- 
tained; sickness followed, and for want of suitable food 
and medicines many died. 

165. Benjamin Franklin, Silas Dean and Arthur Lee. 

166. At Paris, February 6th, 1778, and was ratified by 
Congress May 4th. 

167. A French fleet under Count D'Estaing. 

168. About nine months, withdrawing their forces June 
i8th, 1778. 

169. At Lancaster and York, Pennsylvania. 

170. June 28th, 1778, in the eastern part of New Jersey, 
both parties claimed the victory, but the British withdrew 
their troops. The day was sultry and hot. During this battle 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 4:1 

an arrillery man was shot at his post, his wife, Mary Pitcher, 
saw him fall and heard the commander order the piece to 
be removed from the field; she hastened to the cannon, 
seized the rammer, and with great skill and courage per- 
formed her husband's duty. 

171. July 3d, 1778, under the direction of John Butler, 
at the head of i,6oo Tories and Indians. 

172. Gen. Lincoln. Gen. Prevost of the British. 

173. In the northern States. 

1 74. Stony Point and Paulu? Hook. 

175. Gen. Wayne, in the night of July 15th, with un- 
loaded guns and fixed bayonets attacked Stony Point, carry- 
ing the works. Paulus Hook was surprised and taken by 
Major Lee, July 19th. 

T 76. A great loss to the American and French forces. 

177. The Polish nobleman, Count Pulaski. 

1 78. They had captured over five hundred ships, they 
even cruised among the British Isles, and entering harbors, 
seized and burned ships lying at the English wharves. 

179. A very successful naval commander of the naval 
forces. His most memorable exploit occurred oft' the coast 
of Scotland, where the Richard captured the Serapis. As the 
enemy earned heavier guns, he lashed the two vessels 
together, and for two hours they fought hand to hand with 
musket, pike and cutlass. As the Bon Homme Richard was 
about to sink, the captain of the Serapis struck his colors, 
and Jones transferred his men to the captured frigate and 
sailed off with his prize. 

180. In South Carolina. 

181. Gen. Lincoln was forced to surrender his troops, 
2,000 in number. May 12th, 1780. 

182. Gen. Gates succeeded Lincoln, and Lord Corn- 
wallis had command of the British. 

I S3. Near Camden, South Carolina, Aug. i6th, 1780. 



42 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

The armies were commanded by Gates and Cornwallis, 
the Americans being defeated with a loss of 2,000 men. 

184. General Greene. 

185. The massacre of Maxhaw Creek, where a body 
of 400 Americans were surprised, and after surrendering, 
were massacred. 

186. As the states had been overrun by the British, 
there was no organized resistance to them. 

187. A French fleet, under De Ternay and Count 
De Rochambeau, with 6,000 troops. 

188. An American traitor, who secretly agreed to betray 
West Point into the hands of the British. 

189. A British officer, who was sent by Clinton to 
negotiate with Arnold. 

T90. John Paulding, David Williams, and Isaac Van 
Wart. They received a pension of $200 each for life, and 
a silver medal bearing on one side the motto "Fidelity,'^ 
and on the other, "The love of country conquers." 

191. Arnold escaped to the British and was given a 
command in the army. Andre was hanged as a spy, Oct. 
2d, 1780. 

192. He received about $30,000, a colonelcy in the 
English army, and the contempt of every body. 

193. In South Carolina, Jan. 17th, 1781. The Ameri- 
cans under Gen. Morgan were successful, with a loss of 
only 80 men. The enemy's loss was 800. 

194. He attacked the British at Eutaw Springs, Sept. 
8th, and the forces of the enemy were so crippled that they 
retired towards Charleston. 

195. He did not; but his defeats had all the effects of 
success, and Congress voted the highest honors to him, for 
his prudence, wisdom, and valor. 

196. With great brutality. Arnold, who had command, 
burned much of private as well as public property, and 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 4g 

Cornwallis, after arriving and taking command, destroyed 
$10,000,000 worth of property. 

197. The surrender of Cornwallis at Yorktown. 

198. To Gen. Washington, Oct. 19th, 1781. 

199. At Paris, Sept. 3d, 1783. The American com 
missioners were John Adams, Benjamin Franklin, Henry 
Lawrence, and John Jay. The British commissioners were 
Messrs. Fitzherbert and Oswald. 

200. April 19th, 1783, just eight years after the battle 
of Lexington. 

201. Before Congress, which was assembled at Annap- 
olis, Dec. 23d, 1783. He then returned to his home in 
Virginia. 

202. The Articles of Confederation could not meet the 
wants of the people. Bitter jealousy existed between the 
several states, with regard to each other and the general 
goverment, Continental money was much depreciated, and 
bankruptcy seemed almost inevitable. 

203. The Marquis de La Fayette, Count de Grasse, 
Count de Rochambeau, Count D'Estaing, Count Pulaski^ 
and De Ternay. 

204. In New England they refused to pay their taxes, 
and openly threatened to overturn the government. It was 
put down by militia under Gen. Lincoln. 

205. In 1777, by Congress. It is composed of thirteen 
stripes, alternate red and white, with a field of blue in the 
upper flag staff corner, on which there is a star for every 
state. The breadth is two-thirds its length. 

206. In 1788. 

207. At New York, in April, 1789. 

208. The treasury was empty; and the United States 
had no credit ; the Indians were hostile ; pirates from the 
Barbary States preyed upon our commerce ; Spain refused 
the navigation of the Mississippi ; England had not sent a 



44 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

minister to our government, nor had she made a treaty of 
commerce with us. 

209. At New York, April 30th, 1 789. 

210. At Philadelphia, where the seat of government 
was to remain until 1800. 

211. In the year 1800. 

212. Jefferson, Hamilton, Knox and Randolph. Jef- 
ferson was appointed Secretary, of State; Hamilton, Sec- 
retary, of the Treasury ; Knox, Secretary, of war ; and Ran- 
dolph, Atorney-General. 

213. By the advice of Alexander Hamilton, taxes were 
levied on imported goods, and distillation of spirits; also a 
mint and national bank were established at Philadelphia. 

214. "He smote the rock of the national resources, and 
•abundant streams of revenue burst forth. He touched the 
•dead corpse of public credit, and it sprang upon its feet." 

215. The inhabitants in Western Pennsylvania were de- 
termined that no tax should be paid on whisky, and they 
were so well organized that fifteen thousand troops were 
ordered out to subdue them. 

216. The early settlers of Ohio were much annoyed by 
their depredations and Gens. Warner and St. Clair were 
sent against them, but were defeated with great slaughter. 
Gen. Wayne was now put in command, who, in 1 794, gained 
a complete victory, laying waste their whole country. 

217. Difficulties were arising with England in regard to 
the collection of debts in America, and the impressment of 
our seamen. A treaty was made with Spain, securing to 
the United States the free navigation of the Mississippi, and 
fixing the boundary of Florida, still held by that nation. 

2 1 8. The passage of the Alien and Sedition Laws, and 
difficulties with France. 

219. Under the Alien Law, the President could expel 
from the country any foreigner whom he deemed injurious 
to the United States. Under the Sedition Law, any one 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 45- 

libelling Congress, the President, or the government, could 
be fined or imprisoned. 

220. Our flag was insulted, our vessels were captured, 
and our envoys were refused audience by the French gov- 
erment. HostiKties were commenced on the seas, but 
when Napoleon became First Consul of France the dif- 
ficulty ceased. 

221. He was elected by Congress on the thirty-sixth 
ballot, there being no election by the people, he and Aaron 
Burr, receiving an equal number of votes. 

222. The purchase of Louisiana from Napoleon for 
$15,000,000. This secured over one million square miles 
of land, and the full possession of the Mississippi. This 
tract had just been ceded by Spain to France. 

223. American commerce suffered greatly from the 
inhabitants of the Barbary States, who were known as 
pirates. They also held the crews of captured vessels, until 
ransomed. The war occurred in 1805. 

224. The frigate Philadelphia, had unfortunately 
grounded while in the harbor of TripoH, and fell into the 
hands of the Bashaw. Decatur entered the harbor with a 
small vessel, apparently in distress, he having concealed his. 
men below; boarded the Philadelphia; swept the crew into 
the sea ; set the ship on fire, and amid a tremendous can- 
nonade from the batteries, escaped without the loss of a 
man. 

225. England claimed the right of stopping American 
vessels on the high seas ; searching for seamen of English 
birth, and pressing them into the British navy. According- 
ly the British frigate, Leopold, fired into the American 
frigate, Chesapeake, off the coast of Virginia, and going 
aboard, seized four af the crew, three of which were 
Americans by birth. These were taken on the pretence of 
being deserters. 

226. Aaron Burr was at one time Vice President of the 



46 THE QUESTION BOOK.. 

United States. He attempted to form a government west. 
of the Alleghanies; was tried for treason, but acquitted. 
This was called "Burrs Conspiracy." Hamilton was distin- 
guished in the affairs of government, and was killed in a 
duel with Aaron Burr. 

227. For inventing the steamboat. The first voyage 
was made from New York to Alb any. 

228. The British emissaries had aroused the Indians to 
war, and Tecumseh formed a confederacy of the northwestern 
tribes. Gen. Harrison was sent against them, who at the 
battle of Tippecanoe routed them with great slaughter. 

229. June 19th, 1812, and lasted two years and a half. 

230. The government proposed to invade Canada, 
accordingly Gen. Hull crossed over hom Detroit, but learn- 
ing that the British and Indians were gathering to attack 
him, retreated, pursued by a force of British under Gen. 
Brock, and Indians under Tecumseh. 

231. As Gen. Brock marched to attack the fort, Hull 
seemed to lose all presence of mind, and dare not risk a 
battle. He raised the white flag, surrendered Detroit, with 
its garrisons and stores, and the whole of Michigan, without 
even stipulating for the honors of war. 

232. In October of the same year Gen. Van Rensselaer 
sent a small body of men across the Niagara River to attack 
the British at Queenstown Heights. The English were driven 
from their position, and Gen. Brock killed. Gen Van 
Rensselaer now returned to bring over the rest of his army ; 
but the militia had lost their courage, and refused to go. The 
troops on the Canadian shore, thus basely abandoned, were 
compelled to surrender. 

233. The capture of the Guerriere by the Constitution^ 
Aug. 19th; of the Frolic by the Wasp, Oct. iSth; of the 
Macedonia by the United States, Oct. 25 th ; of the Java by 
the Constitution, Dec. 29th. 

234. Over three hundred. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 47 

235. Three armies were raised with the intention of in- 
vading Canada. The division under Harrison was sent to 
the west shore of Lake Erie ; the division under Dearborne 
between Erie and Ontario ; and Hampden's division on the 
shore of Lake Champlain. 

236. They acompUshed but Httle. 

237. The American tieet consisted of nine vessels, car- 
rying fifty-four guns, and the British tieet of six vessels and 
sixty three guns. Perry's flag ship, the Lawrence, engaged 
two of the heaviest vessels of the enemy, and fought until 
but eight of his men were left. Leaving the Lawrence he 
passed to the Niagara, and within fifteen minutes after 
mounting the deck won the victory. 

238. It was while passing from the Lawrence to the 
Niagara. The enemy's guns were directed upon him, and, 
although he passed within pistol-shot of the British, he es- 
caped without injury. 

239. "We have met the enemy, and they are ours." 

240. Harrison was at Sandusky Bay, preparing to in- 
vade Canada, and at the news of this victory, crossed the 
lake, landed at Maiden, where on the approach of Harrison 
the British retreated, but were overtaken on the Thames 
River, and compelled to surrender. Proctor escaped by 
the fleetness of his horse. In this engagement Tecumseh 
was killed. 

241. The capture of the Peacock by the Hornet, Feb. 
24th; of the Boxer by the Enterprise, Sept. 5th; of Barkley's 
fleet by Perry's fleet, Sept. loth. 

242. The capture of the Chesapeake by the Shannon; 
and the Argus by the Pelican. 

243. It was the last command of Capt. Lawrence as he 
was carried below during the engagement between the 
Chesapeake and Shannon. 

244. A rising of the Alabama Indians. They fell upon 
Fort Mims and massacred the garrison. Gen. Jackson 



48 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

took command; drove them from place to place, and at 
Horseshoe Bend, where they had fortified themselves, the 
soldiers with fixed bayonets, scaled their breastworks, and 
a desperate battle ensued. Sixhundred Creeks were killed. 
Those who escaped were glad to make peace on any terms. 

245. Early in the spring Cockburn commenced devas- 
tating the southern coast. In Virginia and Carolina he 
burned bridges, farmhouses, and villages; robbed the in- 
habitants; plundered churches; and murdered the sick ia 
their beds. 

246. They attacked the British at Chippewa, July 5th,. 
and gained a brilliant victory. A second engagement was at 
Lundy's Lane, July 25th. 

247. It was one of the bloodiest battles of the war. Gen. 
Scott commanded the American forces of one thousand 
men, and maintained the unequal contest until dark. A 
battery located on a height was the key to the British position. 
Scott asked Col. Miller if he could take it. "I'll try, sir," 
was the reply. The battery was taken. Three times the 
British rallied for its recapture, but were unsuccessful. This 
victory, though glorious to the American army, was barren 
of direct results. 

248. In this contest the British fleet on Lake Champlain 
attacked the .American squadron under Com. McDonough 
and was nearly annihilated. Prevost with twelve thousand 
men advanced against Plattsburg, but when he found that 
his ships were lost, he fled, leaving his sick and wounded, 
and large quantities of military stores. 

249. Gen. Ross marched to Washington; burned the 
capitol and other public buildings, libraries, records, and 
several private dwellings. 

250. At Ghent, December 24th, 18 14. 

251. The battle of New Orleans, Jan . 8th. Gen. Jackson 
conmianded the American forces, numbering 6,000, and 
Gen. Pakenham commanded the British, numbering 12,000. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 49 

The American loss was seven killed and seven wounded. 
The British loss was 2,500. 

252. $127,000,000. 

253. A bill defining the limits of slavery; all states narth 
of latitude ^6^ 30/, and all territories west of the Mis- 
sissippi should be free. It was proposed by Henry Clay. 

254. La Fayette. 

255. Any attempt by a European nation to gain domi- 
nation in America would be considered by the United States 
as an unfriendly act. 

256. There being four candidates, no majority of votes 
was obtained. He was chosen by the House of Represent- 
atives. 

257. The first railroad was completed, and the Erie 
Canal was opened. 

258. The first railroad in the United States was built 
in 1833, from Albany to Schenectady. 

259. The Erie Canal is about ;^6;^ miles in length. 

260. It declared the tariff laws "null and void," 'and 
that the State (South CaroHna) would secede from the 
Union if force should be employed to collect any revenue. 

261. T/ie Black Haiok War broke out in the Northwest 
Territory. After some skirmishing they were driven off 
and their leader, Black Hawk, was captured. The Florida 
War mth the Seminoles grew out of an attempt to move 
them, in accordance with a treaty, to lands west of the 
Mississippi. 

262. They had promised to pay $5,000,000, for damages 
to our commerce during Napoleon's war. Jackson urged 
Congress to make reprisals on French ships. By the medi- 
ation of England, the debt was paid, and war prevented. 

263. TJie Fina7idal Crisis of 1837, and the Patriot 
War. 

264. (i.) The specie circular, which was issued by Jack- 



60 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

son, directing that pa)anents for public lands should be made 
in gold and silver. 

(2.) The surplus public money, amounting to about 
$28,000,000, which was ordered by Congress to be with- 
drawn from the local banks and distributed among the 
states. The banks could not meet this demand. 

(3.) Heavy importations of European goods, which had 
to be paid for in gold and silver. 

(4.) A terrible fire in New York City on the night of 
Dec. 1 6th, 1835, which had burned six hundred valuable 
stores, and property to the amount of $18,000,000. 

265. The Canadian Rebellion stirred the sympathies of 
the American people. Meetings were held; volunteers 
offered; and arms contributed. The President issued a 
proclamation, and Gen. Scott was sent to the frontier to 
preserve the peace. A bod}- of American sympathizers 
took possession of Navy Island, in the Niagara River, but 
were dislodged by British troops. The steamer Caroline 
was taken by a body of British troops, and sent, with her 
crew, over the Falls. 

266. One month. 

267. A bill for establishing a United States Bank. 

268. The people of Rhode Island organized by force a 
new constitution, and elected Dorr Governor. Dorr was 
arrested, tried for treason, and sentenced for life. He was 
afterwards pardoned. 

269. The tenants on some of the old pat7'ooii estates in 
New York, refused to pay the rent. Some assumed the 
disguise of Indians, tarred and feathered those who paid 
their rents, and even killed ofiicials who served warrants 
upon them. 

270. They were settled at Nauvoo, 111., but having in- 
curred the enmity of the people about them, were com- 
pelled to leave. Jobeph Smith, their leader, was killed by a 
mob. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 51 

271. December 27th, 1845. She applied for admission 
in 1836. 

272. From Baltimore to Washington. The message was 
the announcement of Polk's nomination for President of 
the United States. 

273. The annexation of Texas by the United States, and 
and a certain tract of land claimed by Mexico. 

274. Gen. Taylor, in 1846, and Gen. Winfield Scott, in 
1847. Scott was successful in many engagements, enter- 
ing Mexico Sept. 14th, 1847. 

2 75. A withdrawal of United States troops ; that Mexico 
should cede to the United States the territories of New 
Mexico and Upper California for the sum of $15,000,000, 
and pay $3,500,000 to American citizens due them by 
Mexico. 

276. It provided for the return of slaves to their owners, 
who had escaped to a free state. 

277. Its nature was a repeal of the Missouri com- 
promise bill, allowing the people of the territories to decide 
whether it should be bond or free. It was proposed by 
Stephen A, Douglas, and had relation to the territories of 
Kansas and Nebraska. It became a law, May, 1854. 

278. A bitter contest arose between the pro-slavery and 
anti-slavery men. Each party sent bodies of armed emi- 
grants to the territory. Disturbances arose; mobs were 
formed; houses were attacjied and pillaged; men were 
murdered in cold blood ; and for several years Kansas was 
a scene o? lawless violence. 

279. A dispute arose between the United States and 
Mexico, with regard to the boundary line. Gen. Gadsden 
negotiated a settlement, whereby $10,000,000 were paid to 
Mexico for additional territory. 

280. The Supreme Court of the United States declared 
that slave-owners might take their slaves into any state in 
the Union, without forfeiting authority over them. Dred 



52 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

Scott was a slave, and claimed freedom on the ground that 
he had been taken into a free territory. 

281. Being an ardent lover of negro freedom, he con- 
ceived the wild scheme of taking the law into his own hands 
and liberating the slaves. He seized the United States 
arsenal at Harper's Ferry in 1859, and proclaimed freedom 
to all the slaves in the vicinity. He was taken by the 
United States and hung as a traitor. 

282. Abraham Lincoln, Stephen A. Douglas, John C. 
Breckinridge, and John Bell. 

283. The Lincoln party held, that, while slavery must 
be protected where it was, it ought not to be carried into 
any free territory. 

The Douglas party favored squatter's sovereignty^ the 
right of each state to decide whether it shall exclude or 
accept slavery. 

The Breckinridge party claimed that any citizen has a 
right to migrate to any territory, taking with him anything 
that is property (including slaves), and Congress is bound 
to protect the rights of slave-holders in all the territories. 

The Bell party had for their platform: "The constitution 
of the country, the union of the states, and the enforce- 
ment of the laws. " 

284. The agitation of the slavery question. The South- 
ern States, believing they had a right to secede from the 
Union, seceded, but the federal government, denying that 
right, raised armies and enforced its authority. 

285. South Carolina, Dec. 20th, i860. 

286. Mississippi, Florida, Alabama, Georgia, Louisiana, 
Texas, Virginia, North Carolina, Arkansas, and Tennessee. 

287. The Confederate States of America, and the form 
of Government was similar to the government of the United 
States. 

288. Jefferson Davis, an-d was ra-auguraled Feb. 4th,. 
1861. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 53 

289. The bombardment of Fort Sumter. 

290. Fort Sumter fell into the hands of the Confede- 
rates under Beauregard. Maj. Anderson, the Commander 
of Sumter, was permitted to go north with his men. 

291. He issued a requisition for 75,000 troo[)s, and 
soon after for 300,000 volunteers. 

292. In Baltimore, April 19th. 186 1, where southern 
sympathizers attacked a Massachusetts regunent on its way 
to Washington. 

293. They seized the United States armory at Harper's 
Ferry, and the navy yard at Norfolk. At Norfolk there 
were twelve ships of war, two thousand cannon, two 
hundred and fifty thousand pounds of gunpowder, and 
great quantities of shot and shell. 

294. After the seizure of Alexandria, Ellsworth, seeing 
the Confederate flag still flying from the roof of a hotel, 
went up and tore it down. As he descended, he was shot, 
at the foot of the stairs, by the landlord, Jackson, v/ho, in 
turn, fell at the hands of private Brownell. 

295. July 2ist, 1861, in Northern Virginia. Gen. Mc- 
Dowell made the attack, and was defeated, after a severe 
engagement. 

296. At first they were much disappointed and dis- 
couraged; then came a renewed determination. Congress 
voted $500,000,000 and five hundred thousand men, and 
Gen. McClellan was appointed to the command of the 
Army of the Potomac. 

297. A party of 2.000 Federals crossed the Potomac 
at Ball's Bluft". They were attacked and forced down 
the slippery, clayey bluff, fifty to one hundred and fifty 
feet high, to the river below, where, in trying to escape, 
many were drowned, some were shot, and scarcely half 
their number reached the other bank. 

298. Col. Baker, United States Senator from Oregon. 

299. The state refused to pass an ordinance of seces- 



54 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

sion, yet an effort was made to preserve an armed neutral- 
ity. Capt. Lyon foiled this attempt. Gen. Sigel was de- 
feated in an engagement at Carthage. Gen. Lyon now 
took command, and was compelled to fight superior forces 
or abandon that part of the state. He chose the former. 

300. At AVilson Creek, Aug. loth, while gallantly lead- 
ing a bayonet charge. 

301. He issued a proclamation offering to commission 
privateers. Lincoln declared a blockade of the Southern 
ports. 

302. One on the Northern coast, and forty-two in the 
United States Navy. At the close of the year there were 
two hundred and sixty-four. 

303. They acknowledged them as belligerents, thus 
placing them on the same footing with the United States. 

304. Southern commissioners sent to England and 
France to plead the cause of the Confederacy. 

305. They were taken from the British steamer Trent, 
by Capt. Wilks, and brought back to the United States. 
This produced much excitement in England. The United 
States Government, however, promptly disavowed the act 
and returned the prisoners. 

306. The large vessels and stores at Harper's Ferry and 
Norfolk were captured by the Confederates. They were 
successful in the two great battles of the year, Bull Run 
and Wilson's Creek; also in the minor engagements at Big 
Bethel, Carthage, Lexington, Belmont and Ball's Bluff. 
The Federals had saved Fort Pickens and Fortress Monroe. 
The Forts at Hatteras Lilet and Port Royal were captured. 
They had gained the victories at Philippi, Rich Mountain, 
Boonsville, Carrick's Ford, Cheat Mountain and Dranes- 
ville. West Virginia, Maryland and Missouri were saved 
to the Union. 

307. On the part of the North there were three main 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 55 

objects: the opening of the Mississippi; the blockade of 
the Southern ports ; and the capture of Richmond. 

308. The Union forces numbered about 500,000; the 
Confederates about 350,000. Gen. Thomas won an en- 
gagement at Mill Springs, and Com. Footc and Gen. 
Grant captured Forts Henry and Donelson, in Ncrthern 
Tennessee. 

309. On the 6th and 7th of April. Gen. Grant com- 
manded the Union forces, and Gen. Beauregard the Con- 
federate. 

310. Sunday morning Johnson surprised the Union 
forces by a desperate assault. The Federals, having 
no time to form into order of battle, fought where 
they happened to stand, slowly yielding, and for 
twelve hours they obstinately disputed every inch of the 
way. At last, pushed to the very brink of the river (Ten- 
nessee), Grant massed his artillery, and gathered around 
it the fragments of his regiments for the final stand. By 
the aid of the gunboats below, and Buel's reinforcements, 
the tide of battle was stayed, and the Confederates fell 
back. They possessed, however, the Union camps, three 
thousand prisoners, thirty flags, and immense stores; but 
they had lost their commander, Gen. Johnson. The next 
morning the Confederates were driven from the field. 

311. In the Mississippi River, between Kentucky and 
Missouri. It was tr.ken by Corn. Foote ar.d Gen. Pope, 
April 7th. 

312. Dec. 3i3t. Gen. Bragg, with 60,000 troops, at- 
tacked the Union forces under Gen. Kosecrans, and were 
repulsed. Jan. 2d, the battle was renewed, but Bragg, be- 
ing unsuccessful, retreated. This was one of the bloodiest 
contests of tlie war. The loss was one-fourth of the num- 
ber engaged. 

313. The Confederates gave up the atten^pt to recover 
Kentucky. 



66 THE QUE3TIOX BOOK. 

314. Grant was to move along the jMississippi Central 
Railroad, while Sherman was to descend the river from 
Memphis, with the gunboats under Porter. The plan was 
spoiled by Van Dorn's cavalry dash, which destroyed 
Grant's depot of supplies at Holly Springs. Sherman, ig- 
norant of what had happened, pushed on and made an at- 
tack at Chickasaw Bayou, north of Vicksburg. After suf- 
fering a bloody repulse, and hearing of Grant's misfortune, 
he fell back. 

315. Gen. Curtis having command, attacked Gen. 
Price and drove him out of the state into Arkansas. Van 
Dorn now taking command, a desperate battle was fought 
at Pea Ridge, March 7th and 8th, in which Van Dorn was 
totally defeated. 

316. The attempt was made with a fleet of forty-four 
vessels, under Com. Farragut, and 8,000 troops under Gen. 
Butler. Mortar-boats for six days stormed the outer de- 
fences, but with little effect. Farragut then boldly resolved 
to carry the fleet past the defences to New Orleans. At 
three o'clock in the morning, April 24th, they advanced, 
running a fearful gauntlet of shot and shell, and flames of 
fire rafts. They now encountered the Confederate fleet of 
thirty armed steamers. Twelve of the Confederate flotilla 
were destroyed. New Orleans now became an easy prey, 
and soon surrendered. 

317. He ascended the river, took possession of Baton 
Rouge and Natchez, and, running the batteries at Vicks- 
burg, joined the Union fleet above. 

318. It gave control to the outer defences of Nor- 
folk ; it opened two sounds, eight riv^ers, four canals and 
two railroads. It was an excellent rendezvous for ships, 
and exposed a large country to attack. 

319. The Cumberland and Congress, March 8th. 

320. The morning after the ravages of the Merrimac, 
the Monitor made her appearance and commenced the at- 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 57 

tack. The Merrimac, confident of success, poured in a 
broadside, but the balls glanced harmlessly oft the Moni- 
tor's turret, or broke and fell to pieces on the deck. The 
battle now opened ; they fought side by side, iron rasping 
on iron. Five times the Merrimac strove to crush her an- 
tagonist by running her huge iron beak against the Mon- 
itor's side. At each dash her prow would raise above the 
water, and at the same instant heavy volleys from the Mon- 
itor would crash against the exposed p^rts. In this manner 
the Merrimac received severe injuries, gave up the contest 
and steamed back to Norfork. 

321. She could have entered any port of the United 
States, destroyed cities, opened the blockade, and, un- 
doubtedly, would have secured the acknowledgement of the 
Confederacy by European nations. On this battle hinged 
the fate of the war. 

322. It was regarded as the most formidable naval 
power in the world. 

323. Just before the ca[)ture of Norfolk she was sunk 
by the Confederacy. The Monitor sunk, in a storm, off 
Cape Hatteras. 

WAR IN THE EAST. 

324. Richmond. 

325. Gen. McClellan. 

326. Gen. iSIagruder, with only about 5,000 men, held 
such strong defences along a line of thirteen miles, that 
Gen. McClellan was brought to a stop. Heavy guns were 
ordered from Washington, but as the siege began Magruder 
quietly withdrew, having delayed the Union army a month. 

327. May 5th. Gen. Hooker with his division main- 
tained the contest for nine hours, then being reinforced, he 
carried the works, and the pursuit was continued to within 
seven miles of Richmond. 

328. McDowell, with 30,000 men, was to meet him 



58 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

near Hanover Court House, and then commence the siege 
of Richmond; but Gen. Johnston, suspecting this move- 
ment, ordered Gen. Jackson to move up the Shenandoah 
Valley and threaten Washington. 

329. After being reinforced by Gen. Ewell's division of 
10,000 men, he hurried down the valley and drove Banks 
across the Potomac. The excitement in Washington was 
intense. The President took military possession of all 
the railroads; called upon the Governors of Northern 
states to send miHtia to the defense of the capital ; ordered 
Fremont at Franklin, Banks at Harper's Ferry, and Mc- 
Dowell at Fredericksburg, to capture Jackson. He now 
commenced his retreat, burning bridges as he passed, and 
escaped. 

330. With 15,000 men, Jackson had occupied the at- 
tention of three Major Generals and 60,000 men, prevented 
McDowell's junction with McClellan, and saved Richmond. 

331. He had pushed his left wing across the Chicka- 
hominy, and before he could unite his army, a terrible 
storm flooded the swamps, and the Chickahominy Creek 
became a broad river. Johnston, seeing the exposed wing, 
commenced the attack. Johnston was severely wounded. 
The next day the Confederates were repulsed in great dis- 
order. 

;^;^2. Jackson making his appearance near Hanover 
Court House, McClellan resolved to "change his base" of 
supplies to the James River. A series of battles, lasting 
seven days, now occurred. The most important were those 
of Mechanicsville, Gaines' Mill, Savage's Station, Frazier's 
Farm, and Malvern Hill. In this famous retreat the army 
fought by day to give time for the baggage trains, and fell 
back at night to a new position. At Malvern Hill Lee 
received so bloody a check that he pressed no farther. * 

^;^;^. Seventeen miles. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 5& 

334. The North was as much discouraged as the South 
was elated. Lincoln called for 300,000 troops. 

335. To transfer his army to Acquia Creek, and put it 
under the command of Gen. Pope. 

;^;^6. After some manoeuvering, Pope was compelled to 
fight the entire Confederate army on the old battle-field of 
Bull Run. The shn.ttered remains of the Army of the Po- 
tomac retreated and took refuge within the fortifications at 
Washington. 

337. The Union army lost 30,000 men and vast sup- 
plies. The Capitol was in great danger; a victorious army 
without and only broken battalions within. 

^;^8. He crossed the Potomac and entered Marylana. 

339. McClellan. 

340. South Mountain and the terrible battle of Antie- 
tam, September 17th. 

341. He retreated across the Potomac. 

342. It was a Union victory. The Nojrth was saved 
from invasion, and Washington from any danger of attack. 

343. For the slowness of his movements in pursuing 
the retreating army. Gen. Burnside took command. 

344. Dec. 13th. The Union forces were defeated, with 
a loss of 12,000 men. 

345. They had gained the victories of Jackson in the 
Shenandoah Valley; of Lee in the Peninsular campaign; 
those against Pope; Bragg's great raid in Kentucky; the 
battles of Cedar .Mountain, Chickasaw Bluff, and Fred- 
ericksburg. 

346. They had taken Forts Henry, Donelson, Pulaski, 
Macon, Jackson, St. PhilHp, and Island No. 10. They had 
opened the Mississippi to Vicksburg; taken New Orleans, 
Roanoke Island, Newbern, Yorktown, Norfork, and Mem- 
phis. They had also won the battles of Pea Ridge, Wil- 
liamsburg/' Fair Oaks, South Mountain, Antietam, luka^, 
Corinth, and Murfreesboro, and silenced the Merrimac. 



60 THE QUESTION BOOK.. 

347. In Minnesota, Iowa, and Dakorah ; over seven 
hundred whites were slain, and many thousands driven from 
their homes. Col. Sibley routed them and took five hun- 
dred prisoners. Thirty-nine were hung on one scaffold, at 
Mankato, Minnesota, Dec. 26V:. 

348. It was about the same as the preceding year. The 
Union force was about 700,000; the Confederate, about 
350,000. 

349. January ist, 1863. 

350. After several weeks of fruitless efforts upon the 
north. Grant marched down the west side of the river, and 
crossed below the city. From May ist to the i8th, he de- 
feated the Confederates at Fort Gibson, Jackson, Cham- 
pion Hills, and Big Black River, and within seventeen days 
after he landed, Pemberton's army was shut up within the 
entrenchments of Vicksburg. After three desperate as- 
saults, the Union troops threw up entrenchments and com- 
menced undermining the city. The siege lasted forty- 
seven days. 

351. On the 4th of July. 

352. The Confederates lost the cities of Vicksburg and 
Jackson; 37,000 prisoners; 10,000 killed and wounded, 
and immense stores. On the fall of Vicksburg, Port Hud- 
son surrendered to Banks. The Mississippi was now open 
to the Gulf, and one great object of the North accomplished. 

353. January 2d. Gen. Rosecrans defeated the Con- 
federates under Gen. Bragg. 

354. But little occurred until June, when Rosecrans, 
with 60,000 men, marched against Bragg and compelled 
him to evacuate Chattanooga. Sept. Sth, Sept. 19th and 
20th, was fought the battle of Chickamauga. The Union 
army was defeated and withdrew to Chattanooga, while 
Bragg occupied the heights commanding the city, and 
threatened them with starvation. 

355. Grant was now appointed to succeed Kosecrans, 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 01 

and the relief was obtained by Hooker coming with two 
corps from the Army of the Potomac, and Sherman, who 
hastened by forced marches from luka, 200 miles away. 

356. He was in Virginia. They came by rail, 23,000 
strong, in seven days, a distance of 1,200 miles. 

357. Gen. Hooker, January 26th. 

358. May 2d and 3d. The Union army was defeated 
with great loss. 

359. "Stonewall" Jackson. While returning from a 
reconnoissance at the front, he was fired upon by his own 
men, who mistook his escort for Federal cavalry. 

360. General Meade. 

361. With the flower of the Confederate army he 
crossed the Potomac, passed through Maryland, entered 
Pennsylvania, and proceeded within four miles of Harris- 
burg. 

362. By the battle of Gettysburg, which was fought the 
I St, 2d and 3d of July. Gen. Meade commanded the- 
Union forces. Gen. Lee retreating to A^rginia. 

363. The Union loss was 23,000; the Confederate, 
36,000. 

364. These losses and defeats having occurred at the 
same time, caused the turning-point of the war, and the 
Confederacy began to wane. 

365. Having confidence in the ability of the iron-clads 
to resist cannon balls, he attempted to run the fortifications 
and force his way up to the city. The attempt was a dis- 
astrous failure. 

366. They had gained the great battles of Chickamauga 
and Chancellorville. The Union cause in Texas was 
depressed. Galveston was seized, and they successfully 
resisted every attack on Charleston. 

367. They had taken Vicksburg and Port Hudson, and 
won the battles of Chattanooga and Gett}f burg. Arkan- 
sas, East Tennessee, large portions of Louisiana, Missis- 



62 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

sippi, and some portions of Texas were held by Union 
troops. 

368. March 3d, 1864. 

369. It lay in the armies of Lee in Virginia, and Jo- 
seph E. Johnston ni Georgia. 

370. Grant was to march against Lee, and Sherman to 
attack Johnston and sweep through to the coast. 

371. He started with a force of 100,000 men. For 
one hundred miles there was continuous skirmishing. 
Sherman would drive Johnson into a stronghold, and then 
with consummate skill would outtiank him, when Johnston 
with equal skill would retreat to a new post and prepare 
to meet his opponent again. Several bloody battles were 
fought, and finally Johnston retired, July idth, to the en- 
trenchments of Atlanta. Hood was now put in command. 

372. September 2d, 1864. 

373. There had been ten pitched battles, and scores of 
lesser engagements. It cost the Union army 30,000 men, 
and the Confederacy about 40,000. 

374. He turned to invade Tennessee, with the expecta- 
tion that Sherman would follow him, and Georgia be saved 
from invasion. 

375. He marched against Gens. Thomas and Schoheld, 
at Nashville. After severe fighting, Thomas withdrew from 
the fortifications and remained two weeks. He then sud- 
denly burst forth and drove the Confederate forces out of 
their entrenchments into headlong flight. The army was 
completely demoraHzed, and, for further use, destroyed. 

376. Hood having moved from his path, there was but 
little to impede his progress. With 60,000 troops, in five 
weeks he had marched three hundred miles, and captured 
Savannah. 

377. A fertile region sixty miles wide and three ^hun- 
dred miles long, was devastated, and three hundred miles 
of railroad were destroyed. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 63 

378. The battles of the Wilderness and Spottsylvania. 

379. After crossing the Rapidan, the Union army- 
plunged into the Wilderness, where they were attacked, 
May 5th, by the Confederate army. There was none of 
the pomp or glory of war, only its horrid butchery. The 
ranks dashed into the woods, and in the gloomy shad- 
ows, dense with smoke, this strangest of battles, which no 
eye could follow, was fought. The third day, both armies, 
worn out by this desperate struggle, remained in their en- 
trenchments. Grant lost 20,000 men; Lee, 10,000. 

380. He pushed his army by the Confederate right flank 
towards Spottsylvania Court House, where, for five days, 
May 8 to 12, terrible fighting occurred. Ten thousand men 
fell on each side. 

381. Grant now concluded to try the flank movement 
again, and pushed forward to Cold Harbor, a short distance 
from Richmond. Lee hastened by a shorter route, and 
arrived in time to prepare for the defence. Early on the 
morning of June 4th, the L^nion army made an assault on 
Cold Harbor. Twenty minutes after the first shot was 
fired, fully ten thousand Union men were stretched writhing 
on the sod. or still in death, while the enemy's loss was 
little over one thousand. 

;^S2. The Confederate works could not be carried, so 
Grant threw up entrenchments, and prepared for a siege of 
Richmond. 

3S3. The Union army lost 70,000, and the Confederates 
40,000, 

384. The Mine Explosion and the capture of the Wel- 
don Railroad. 

385. A mine was dug beneath a strong Confederate 
fort in front of Petersburg, and was fired with a blast of 
8,000 pounds of powder. The fort and garrison were de- 
stroyed. At the same time the Union artillery opened 
along the line, and an assaulting column rushed forward, 



('4 THE QUESTION POOK. 

but it stopped in the crater produced by the explosion. 
The Confederates, rallying, turned their artillery toward 
the seething mass within the demolished fort, and about 
four thousand were lost before they could retreat to the 
Union lines. 

386. He entered Maryland, threatened Washington 
and Baltimore, defeated Wallace, and then withdrew to 
Virginia. In the sp.me month, July, he crossed into Penn- 
sylvania, his troops setting fire to Chambersburgh ; after 
which he withdrew. 

387. A vast amount of stores, five thousand horses, 
and a withdrawal of part of Grant's army from before 
Petersburg. 

388. In September he defeated Early at Winchester 
and Fisher's Hill, and in a week destroyed half of his army 
and put the rest to flight. Early returned with reinforce- 
ments, and, under covei of a dense fog, surprised Sheri- 
dan's army at Cedar Creek, October 19th, and drove it in 
confusion. At this critical moment Sheridan arrived from 
Winchester, checked the retreating columns, turned and 
won the battle. 

389. This was the ijnost brilliant campaign of the war. 
In one month he had virtually destroyed Early's Army. 
Sheridan's loss was 17,000. 

390. Gen. Banks was sent up the Red River to destroy 
the Confederate authority in that region and Texas. This 
campaign was a Confederate triumph. Banks lost 5,000 
men, 18 guns, and large supplies. 

391. April 1 2th. The Confederates were maddened by 
the sight of negro troops opposing them, and a terrible 
massacre followed. 

392. The capture of Mobile Harbor, Aug. 5th, and 
closing it against blockade runners. The city of Mobile 
was not captured until April 12th, 1865. 

393. This fort defended the harbor of Wilmington, N. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 65 

C. The expedition consisted of seventy vessels, under 
Com. Porter, and a land force under Gen. Butler. After 
a fierce bombardment, Dec. 24th and 25th, Butler decided 
that the fort could not be taken by assault, and the army 
returned to Fortress Monroe. Com. Porter asked for an- 
other trial. The same troops were sent back under Gen. 
Terry. By a series of trenches a column of troops worked 
themselves up within two hundred yards of the fortifica- 
tions. At the word they rushed forward and burst into the 
fort. The hand-to-hand conflict within lasted for hours. 
Late at night the garrison surrendered, Jan. 15th, 1865. 

394. She was a British steamer, built in England, but 
officered and commissioned by the Confederate govern- 
ment. Her object was to prey upon Union commerce. 
She captured over sixty vessels. Her commander was 
Capt. Semmes. 

395. The engagement was off the coast of France, in 
the Enghsh Channe/, June 15th, 1864. The Alabama was 
sunk. Capt. Winslow, commander of the Kearsarge, res- 
cued a part of the sinking crew. The English yacht, 
Deerhound, picked up the remainder and steamed off to the 
British coast. Capt. Semmes was among the number. 

396. They had gained the battles of Sabin Cross Roads, 
Wilderness, Bermuda Hundreds, Spottsylvania, New Mar- 
ket, and Cold Harbor. They had resisted the Red River 
and Florida expeditions; two attacks upon Petersburg, and 
one against Fort Fisher. 

397. They had gained the battles of Atlanta and those 
preceding it — Dalton, Rexaca, Dallas, and Last and Kene- 
saw Mountain — Winchester, Fisher's Hill, Cedar Creek, 
and Nashville. They had captured Fort de Russy, (this 
was taken by Banks in his Red River expedition); the 
forts in Mobile Harbor, and Fort McAllister; Sheridan 
had annihilated Early's army ; Sherman had marched across 
Georgia and taken Savannah; Thomas had destroyed 



66 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

Hood's army, and the Confederacy was almost extin- 
guished; only North and South Carolina were retained. 

398. April 3d, 1865. 

399. Lee surrendered to Gen. Grant, near Lynchburg, 
Va., April 9th, and Johnston to Sherman, in North Caro- 
lina, April 26th. 

400. He was taken in disguise by a party of Union 
troops, in Georgia, May loth, 1865, and imprisoned in 
Fortress Monroe, but was afterward bailed out. 

401. Four years. 

402. The T4th of April, 1865, by J. Wilkes Booth, at 
Ford's Theater. 

403. After shooting the president he sprang upon the 
stage. His spur caught in the American flag, and, throwing 
him heavily, broke his leg. He escaped, mounted his 
horse and fled into Maryland, where he was overtaken in 
a barn and shot. 

404. The Union armies probably lost in battle, or by 
its efl"ects, 300,000 men, and 200,000 were crippled for 
life. The Confederate loss is not known, but, undoubted- 
ly, as heavy. The Union debt Jan. ist, 1866, was nearly 
$2,750,000,000. The daily expenses at one time reached 
the sum of $2,500,000. 

405. By an act of Congress, ratified by two-thirds of 
the states. This act is the thirteenth amendment. 

406. The exercise of the veto power. 

407. The Freedman's Bureau, the Civil Rights, and the 
Tenure-of-office bills. 

408. The first provides for the establishment of a de- 
partment for the care and protection of the freedmen. 
The Civil Rights bill guarantees to the negroes the rights 
of citizenship. The Tenure-of-office bill makes it neces- 
sary that the consent of the Senate shall be obtained for 
the removal, by the president, of any person from a civil 
office. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 67 

409. The charge was misdemeanors, contempt of the 
Senate for violation of the Tenure-of-office bill, by the at- 
tempt to remove Edwin M. Stanton, Secretary of War. 
He was acquitted, the two-thirds majority, necessary for 
conviction, lacking one vote. 

410. It guarantees equal civil rights to all, and bases 
representation in each of the states on the number of vot- 
ers. It was adopted July 28th, 1868. 

411. The recall of the French from Mexico, under 
Maximilian. This invasion of Mexico was in opposition to 
the "Monroe Doctrine". 

412. June, 1866. 

413. In 1869. 

414. March 30th, 1870. 

415. The right of the citizens of the United States to 
vote shall not be denied or abridged by the United States 
or any state, on account of race, color, or previous condi- 
tion of servitude. 

416. A general amnesty to all connected with the civil 
war. 

417. The refusal of the English government to pay the 
damages to American commerce, caused by the cruise of 
the Alabama. It was settled by arbitration, the Eng- 
lish government paying $15,000,000. 

418. 

Years 
Presidents. Inaugurated. In Office. 

George Washington 1 789 8 

John Adams 1 797 4 

Thomas Jefferson . 1801 8 

James Madison 1809 8 

James Monroe 181 7 8 

John Quincy Adams 1825 4 

Andrew Jackson 1829 8 

Martin Van Buren 1837 4 



68 THE QUESTION eOOK. 

Years 
Presidents. Inaugurated. In Office. 

* William H. Harrison 1841 }/{2 

John Tyler. 1841 Z^}/\2 

James K. Polk 1845 4 

*Zachary Taylor 1849 ^/^ 

Millard Fillmore 1850 2^3 

Franklin Pierce 1853 4 

James Buchanan 1857 4 

* Abraham Lincoln 1861 4^ 

Andrew Johnson. . . 1865 3^ 

Ulysses S. Grant 1869 

419. John Adams, Thomas Jefferson, and James Mon- 
roe. Adams and Jefferson expired the same day — July 
4th, 1826. Monroe died in 1831. 

420. John Adams and John Quincy Adartis. 

421. Henry Clay. 

422. Bacon's, Clayborne's, Shay's, Dorr's, Whisky In- 
surrection, and the Civil War. 

423- 



Where Settled. 



When. By Whom. 



Admitted 



Florida 

Virginia 

New York 

Massachusetts. . . 

New Jersey 

New Hampshire. 

Maine 

Connecticut . . . . 

Maryland 

Rhode Island . . . 

Delaware 

Pennsylvania . . . 
North Carolina.. 

Wisconsin 

South Carolina. . 



St. Augustine 
Jamestown. . . 

Albany 

Plymouth . . . 

Bergen 

Dover 

York 

Windsor 

St. Mary's. . . 
Providence. . . 
Wilmington. . 
Philadelphia . 
Albermarle . . 
Green Bay . . . 
Port Royal 



1565 
1607 
1614 
1620 
1620 
1623 
1630 
1633 
1634 
1636 
1638 

1643 
1650 
1669 
1670 



Spanish 

English 

Dutch 

English ..... ... 

Dutch and Danes. 

English . . 

English 

English 

English 

jRoger Williams . . 

jSwedes 

|Swedes 

lEnglish 

JFrench 

lEnqlish 



1845 

t 

t 

t 

t 

t 
1820 

t 

t 

t 

t 

t 

t 
1848 

t 



•'^Died in office. 



tOriginal States. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 



69 



STATES. 


WTiere Settled. 


When. By Whom. 


Admitted 


Michigan 

Illinois 


Detroit 

Kaskaskia 
Arkansas Post. 

Vincennes 

Bexar 

Iberville 

Mobile 


1670 
1688 
I685 
1690 

1693 
1699 
1702 
1699 
1724 
^733 
1775 
1757 
I76Q 


JFrench 


1837 
1818 


i French 


Arkansas 


jFrench 

jFrencb 

[Spanish 


1836 
1816 


Texas 


1845 
1812 


Louisiana 


'French 


Alabama 


French 

French 


1819 
1817 
1791 

* 

1821 


Mississippi 


Biloxi 

Brattleboro . . . 

Savannah 

St. Genevieve. . 
Fort London . . 
San Diego . . . 


Vermont 


English . . 


Georgia 

Missouri 


English 

French .... 


Tennessee 

California 


English , . . 

Spanish 


1796 
1850 


Kentucky 

Ohio 


Boonsboro .... I770 1 Daniel Boon 

Marietta 1788 English 


1792 
1802 


Oregon 

Iowa 


Astoria 

Dubuque 

St. Paul 

Omaha 


1811 

'Pi 
1838 


Americans 

French 

Americans 

Americans 

Americans 


1859 
1846 
1858 
1867 
1861 


Minnesota 

Nebraska 


Kansas 






West Virginia. . . 






1863 
1864 


Nevada 


















424. At the close of the French and Indian war France 
yielded up all her claims to territories on the mainland in 
North America, excepting the city of New Orleans, ceding 
all east of the Mississippi to England, and all west to 
Spain. This gave England the entire country east of the 
Mississippi, excepting Florida, which was a Spanish posses- 
sion. In the treaty of peace which followed the Revolu- 
tionary war, the boundaries of the United States included 
all of the English claims east of the Mississippi and north 
to the Great Lakes. 

In 1800, Spain, by a secret treaty, restored to France 
the territory of Louisiana, comprising her possessions east 
of the Rocky Mountains, and north from Mexico to the 
British claims. The northern boundary of the Louisiana 
territory was never drawn. 

♦Original State. 



70 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

In 1803 the United States purchased the Louisiana ter- 
ritory of France for $15,000,000. 

In 1804 President Jefferson sent an exploration party 
under Lewis and Clark, to the head waters of the Missouri, 
and thence across to the Pacific. Up to this time the 
North Pacific country did not belong to any nation, but, as 
the United States became interested, England became jeal- 
ous and claimed the same. The United States, however, 
continued to assert her rights, and a great deal of cor- 
respondence between the two governments resulted. At 
last, in 18 1 8, the United States and England agreed to a 
joint occupancy of the whole territory for ten years. 

In 1828 the treaty of joint occupancy was renewed, to 
terminate on either party's giving a year's notice. No divi- 
sion was made until 1846. It was then agreed by a treaty 
that the American possessions should extend as far north 
as latitude 4q^. From this acquisition was formed the 
state of Oregon, and the territories of Washington, Idaho 
and Montana. 

In 18 1 y Florida was purchased from Spain for $5,- 
000,000. 

In 1845 Texas became a part of the United States by 
annexation. 

At the close of the Mexican war, in the treaty of Gauda- 
loupe Hidalgo, Feb. 2d, 1848, the Mexican government 
ceded to the United States California, Nevada, Utah, a 
part of Arizona, and New Mexico, for which the United 
States paid $15,000,000 and assumed the debts of Mexico 
to American citizens, amounting to $3,500,000 more. 

In 1854 the "Gadsden Purchase'' gave to the United 
States the southwestern corner of New Mexico and that 
part of Arizona south of the Gila river, for which was paid 
$10,000,000. 

In 1867 Alaska was purchased of Russia for $7,200,000 
in gold. 



UNITED STATES HISTORY. 71 

From the claims ceded to the United States, by Great 
Britain, in the Paris treaty. Congress formed two great ter- 
ritories: the Northwestern and the Southwestern terri- 
tories. From the Northwestern, the states of Ohio, In- 
diana, Illinois, Michigan, and Wisconsin have been formed ; 
trom the Southwestern, Kentucky, Tennessee, Mississippi, 
and Alabama. 

From the "Louisiana Purchase" have been formed the 
states of Louisiana, Missouri, Arkansas, Iowa, Minnesota, 
Nebraska, and Kansas, also Dakota and Indian territories. 

The Mexican treaty gave California, Nevada, Utah, 
Colorado, a part of Arizona and New Mexico. Texas 
came by annexation. Florida by purchase. Maine, until 
1820, was a part of Massachusetts. Vermont, until 1791, 
was disputed territory between New Hampshire and New 
York. As the northern and northwestern boundary of the 
"Louisiana Purchase" was never formed, the territory of 
Wyoming might be considered a part of that purchase, or 
u part of the claims made by the Clark and Louis expedi- 
tion. 

To fully understand the acquisitions of territory to the 
XJnited States, the student should refer to a geographical 
map and there trace the given lines in accordance with 
*he above. 



QUESTIONS 



ON 



GEOGRAPHY 



1. From what did the term geography derive its name ? 

2. How many kinds of geography ? 

3. Define mathematical geography. 

4. Define physical geography. 

5. Define political geography. 

6. What is the shape of the earth ? 

7. What is supposed to be the reason why the earth is 
flattened at the poles ? 

8. How much greater is the diameter at the equator 
than the diameter at the poles ? 

9. What is the axis of the earth ? What are its poles ? 

10. How many revolutions has the earth ? Define 
each. 

11. What causes day and night ? 

12. What causes the seasons ? 

13. What is the earth's orbit ? Its estimated length ? 

14. How great is the earth's annual motion ? 

15. Why is it cold in winter and warm in sununer ? 

16. What are zones? How many? Their width? 
Where situated ? 

17. What is the inclination of the earth's axis to the 
plane of its orbit ? 

18. Why are the zones given their respective widths ? 



74 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

19. What would be the climate, supposing the earth's 
axis to be horizontal to the plane of its orbit ? 

20. Why would the inclination of the earth affect the 
climate ? 

2 1. Supposing the earth's inclination to be 30°, or any- 
other degree, how would we ascertain the width of the 
several zones ? 

22. What is a compass ? Its cardinal points ? 

23. Into how many circles is the earth divided ? What 
are they ? 

24. How is every circle divided ? 

25. What is a map ? 

26. What are the lines, or circles, on a map ? 

27. What is the equator ? 

28. Through what countries does the equator pass ? 

29. What is a meridian circle ? A meridian ? 

30. What is longitude ? 

31. From what meridians do we reckon longitude ? 

32. How many degrees west of Greenwich is Wash- 
ington ? 

;^^. What is the greatest longitude a place can have ? 

34. Can a place have no longitude ? 

35. Reckoning from the meridian at Washington, what 
is the latitude and longitude of Quito ? 

;^6. What is the length of a degree of longitude. 

37. Why does the length of a degree of longitude de- 
crease after leaving the equator ? 

38. Throupjh what states does the meridian at Washing- 
ton pass ? 

39. What countries in Asia are crossed by the same 
meridian circle ? 

40. What large city in Asia is nearly opposite Philadel- 
phia ? 

41. What is latitude ? How many kinds ? 

42. What is the highest degree of latitude? 



GEOGRAPHY. 75 

43. What is the length of a degree of latitude ? 

44. Through what countries and bodies of water does 
the Tropic of Cancer pass ? 

45. The tropic of Capricorn ? 

46. The Arctic Circle ? 

47. The Antarctic Circle ? 

48. Why is it colder at the Antarctic Circle, than at 
the Arctic ? 

49. "What part of North America is in the same lati- 
tude as England and Ireland ? 

50. Why does the climate of Labrador differ so ma- 
terially from that of England ? 

51. ^\Tiy are the winters more mild at Puget Sound, 
than in the region of Lake Superior ? 

52. Describe the Gulf Stream. 

53. Where and what is the Sargasso Sea ? 

54. "What is the meaning of sargasso ? 

55. What are the natural divisions of land ? Describe 
each. 

56. ^^^^at are the natural divisions of water ? Describe 
each. 

57. How are straits divided ? 

58. "What is the size of the Eastern Continent com- 
pared with the Western ? 

59. What is the area of the entire surface of the glol 

60. Which of the grand divisions is the largest ? Sn . 
est ? Most populous ? Richest in fertility ? 

61. What country contains the greatest number o 
habitants in proportion to its area ? 

62. How does England compare in size with the "Uniteu 
States. 

62,. Which is larger, Europe or the United States ? 

64. How does Europe compare in size and population 
to Asia ? 

65. What is a frith, or estuary ? 



4 b THE QUESTION BOOK. 

66. What IS an archipelago ? 

6 7. What is a delta ? 

68. Wliy is this tract of land called a de/ta ? 

69. What is a road, or roadstead ? 

70. What is an oasis ? 

71. What is a valley, or basin of a river ? 

72. What river of the world has the greatest basin ? 
What is the extent of this basin ? 

73. What is the extent of the basin of the Mississippi ? 

74. How wide is the mouth of the Amazon ? 

75. Into how many classes is mankind divided, in re- 
gard to social condition ? 

76. How many kinds of government ? 

77. What is a monarchy ? 

78. What is an aristocracy ? 

79. What is a democracy ? 

80. What are the political divisions of the earth ? 

81. What is an empire, kingdom, republic, state, county? 

82. What is the government of Great Britam ? 
S;^. What countries are absolute monarchies ? 
04. How many distinct races of men ? 

85. How many prevaihng systems of religion ? 
S6. How many classes of Christians ? 
" 7. Wliat is the Mohammedan religion ? 
8. What is the principal difference between the Qiris- 
1 and Jewish religions ? 

89. Who are Pagans ? 

90. What proportion of the inhabitants embrace these 
,orms of religion ? 

91. Name and give the length of the longest four riv- 
ers in the world. 

92. Name and give the length of the longest four rivers 
of North America. 

93. What would be the length of the St. Lawrence 



Gf.OGRAPHY. IT 

through the chain of lakes to the head of the St. Louis 
river ? 

94. Name and give the length of the longest four rivers. 
of South America. 

95. Of Europe. 

96. Of Asia. 

97. Of Africa. 

98. W^at is noticeable of the Amazon river ? 

99. Of the Mississippi ? 

100. Of the Missouri ? 

10 1. Of the Nile ? 

102. Describe the Rio de la Plata. 

103. Describe Egypt. 

T04. By what two great commercial routes can we travel 
around the world, starting from New York ? 

105. What country in the world has the longest and 
most numerous lines of railroads ? 

106. Between what parallels does the United States lie ? 

107. What is the longitude of San Francisco, and 
about how far is it from New York City ? 

108. What State is the geographical center of the 
United States ? 

109. What country produces the most cotton ? Sugar? 
Coffee ? Rice ? Tea ? 

no. What countries produce largely of the same pro- 
ducts ? 

111. What country produces the most spices ? 

112. What are cloves ? 

T13. What are nutmegs ? Mace ? 

114. What is a mountain system ? 

115. Name the mountain systems of America? 

116. What is the length of the longest day at the 
equator ? At the Tropic of Cancer ? Arctic Circle i^ 
North Pole ? 



78 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

117. Why does so little rain fall on that part of South 
America west of the Andes mountain range ? 

118. What large city in Europe is noted for the manu- 
facture of cotton cloth ? For silks ? Linen ? Cutlery ? 
Laces ? 

119. What are the leading pursuits of the people of the 
Eastern States ? 

120. What are the products of the Eastern States ? 

121. Where are the manufactures carried on to the 
greatest extent in these states ? 

J 22. Where is marble obtained ? 

123. What is granite, and where found ? 

124. What state is called the "Granite State"? 

a. Where are the following mountains: White, Blue, 
Hoosick, Alt. Katahdin, Mt. Holyoke, Bunker Hill. 

b. What are Nantucket and Martha's Vineyard, and to 
what state do they belong ? 

c. Where are Rhode and Mt. Desert islands, and to 
what states do they belong ? 

d. Describe lakes Memphremagog, Moosehead, Ches- 
uncook, Grand, Winnipiseogee, Sebago, and Umbagog. 

e. Describe the bay of Passamaquodda, Massachusetts, 
Cape Cod, Penobscot, Casco, Narragansett, and Long Is- 
land Sound. 

125. How many square miles in the area of Rhode 
Island, and how many states of the same size could be 
formed out of the State of Texas ? 

126. What is particularly noticeable about the northern 
boundary of Connecticut ? 

a. Locate Burlington, Belfast, Dov^er, Salem, Bath, 
Bennington, Bangor, Eastport, and Lowell. 

b. Describe the following : Housatonic, Kennebec, 
Merrimac, Pawtucket, Connecticut, Thames, St. Cioix, 
Taunton, Onion, White, and Androscoggin. 

127. What is the size of California ? 



GEOGRAPHY. 79 

128. What is the surface of this state ? 

129. What is the name of this valley, and from what 
did it derive its name ? 

130. What is the Golden Gate ? 

131. When was gold discovered in California ? 

132. What is the climate ? 

a. Locate ^'allejo, San Jose, Los Angelos, Stockton, 
Benicia, and San Francisco. 

133. What is the difference in latitude between San 
Francisco and Richmond ? 

134. How far north of Richmond is Xew York City ? 
a. Name and locate the capital cities oi South 

America. 

135. What part of South America is in the same lati- 
tude south of the equator, that Central United States is 
north of it ? 

136. How does Brazil compare in size with the United 
States (not including Alaska)? 

137. What city in the West Indies is in the same lati- 
tude north of the equator, that Rio Janeiro is south of it ? 

138. Describe South America. 

139. What are the llanos 2 

140. What are the selvas ? 

141. What are the pampas? 

142. What are the wastes of Patagonia ? 

143. What is a plateau, or table land ? 

144. How may the plateaus of South America be di- 
vided ? 

145. Describe the plateau of the Andes. 

146. Describe Quito. 

147. What are Chimborazo and Cotopaxi ? 

148. \\^hat is the Peruvian Balsa ? 

f 149. Describe the Cassiquiare river. 

150. How far north does South America extend ? 



80 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

151. What part of South America is in the same lati- 
tude of Cape Colony ? 

152. What city in Australia is in, nearly, the same lati- 
-ude as Buenos Ayres ? 

153. What large city in the United States is in, nearly, 
the same longitude as Quito ? 

154. What part of the western coast of Africa is in the 
same latitude as Cape Gallinas ? 

a. Describe the following islands : Joanes, Desola- 
tion, Chiloe, Falkland, Staten, Wellington, Juan Fernandez, 
Trinidad, St. Felix, Hermit, Margarita. 

b. Locate tne following places: Conception, Trux- 
illo, Areguipa. Santiago Villa Bella, Pernambuco, Popay- 
an, Aspinwall, Villa Rica, Valparaiso, Cobija, Callao, 
Chagres, Guayaquil, Para, Bahia, Barcelona, Angostura, 
Potosi, Panama. 

c. Name and locate the capital cities of South 
America. 

155. Where is Cape Horn ? 

156. What is Terra del Fuego ? 

157. Why was Patagonia so named ? 

158. What Cape in South America is the most north- 
ern, eastern, southern, western ? 

a. Locate the following capes: North, Frio, St. 
Antonio, Blanco. 

b. Where are the peninsulas of St. Joseph's and Tres 
Montes ? 

c. Locate the Gulf of Darien, St. Mathias, All Saints, 
Choco, Blanco, Guayaquil, St. George's, Paranagua, 
Panama. 

d. Where are IpJces Titicaca and Uros ? W^hat river 
connects them ? 

159. Where is Lake Reys; and whai river is its outlet ? 

160. What IS the general character of the lakes of 
South America ? 



GEOGRAPHY. 81 

a. Locate lakes Xarayes, Yber, and Alaracaibo. 
i6i. Describe Lake Titicaca and Maracaibo. 

a. Where is the Desert of Atacama ? 

b. In how many zones is South America ? 

c. Between what two mountain chains is the basin of 
the Orinoco ? 

d Of the countries of South America, which border 
on the Caribbean Sea ? Which on the Atlantic Ocean ? 
On the Pacific Ocean ? 

162. Where are the Lobos and Chinrha islands ? For 
what are they valuable ? 

163. Which is the smallest division of South America, 
and what state is about the same size ? 

164. How does Brazil compare in size to the whole of 
South America. 

165. What is the Argentine Confederation ? 

a. What are the following : San Francisco, Geral, 
Magellan, Port Stanley, De los Patos, Madeira, Pichincha, 
Essequibo, Despoblado, Maranham, Tobago, Margarita ? 

b. Describe the following rivers : Orinoco, Magda- 
lena, Rio Negro, Para, Tocantins, Araguay, Tapajos, 
Xingu, Mamore, Purus, Pilcomayo, Salado, Rio Colorado. 

166. Describe the Andes mountains. 

167. How is British America divided ? 

168. How are the British Provinces of North America 
divided ? 

169. What is the government of these provinces ? 

1 70. Is there any similarity between the government of 
these provinces and that of the United States ? 

171. Where is Rupert Land ? 

172. What does the province of British Columbia com- 
prise ? 

1 73. Whdii island forms a part of the province of Nova 
Scotia ? 

174. Describe Newfoundland. For what is it noted ? 



82 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

175. What is the Bras d'Or ? 

176. What are the French possessions near these pro- 
vinces ? 

177. What are the banks of Newfoundland ? 

178. Where is Anticosta Island ? Is it valuable i* 

179. Which of the United States is about the size of 
New Brunswick ? Prince Edward Island ? 

180. How is Montreal situated ? 

181. For what is the Basin of the St. Lawrence re- 
markable ? 

182. For what is the Bay of Fundy noted ? 

183. What are tides ? Neap-tides ? Spring tides ? 

184. What are the chief causes of tides ? 

185. What are the three distinct movements of the 
ocean ? 

186. What are waves ? 

187. What are ocean currents, and how are they caused? 

188. How are ocean currents divided ? 

189. W^hat is a counter current ? 

190. Why are the tides 0/ Fundy Bay so much greater 
than at other ports ? 

191. What are the chief productions of the Canadian 
provinces ? 

192. Name and locate the the capital cities of these 
provinces. 

a. Locate the following cities : Prescott, Kingston, 
St. John, Liverpool, Toronto, Quebec, Pictou, Hamilton, 
Bathurst, Three Rivers, Yarmouth, Harbor Grace, Sydney, 
Louisburg, Chatham, Windsor, Truro, and Victoria. 

b. Describe the capes : Sable, Canso, North, Race, 
Bauld, Ray, St. Lewis, Rozier. 

c. Describe the following gulfs and bays: James, 
Hudson, St. Lawrence, Chaleurs, Georgian, Fundy, Notre 
Dame, Placentia, Fortune, Bonavista, Trinity, and St. 
George's. 



GEOGRAPHY. 83 

d. Locate the straits: Belle Isle, Northumberland, 
and Canso. 

e. Describe some of the principal lakes : Abbitibbe, 
Mistissinnie, St. John, Grand, Nipissing, Sinco. 

/. Describe the following rivers: Albany, Moose, 
Ottawa, East Main, St. Maurice, Saguenay, Rupert's, 
Severn, Grand, Richelieu, St. Francis, St. John, Fraser. 

193. To what province does Labrador belong ? 

194. What are the obstructions to navigation from the 
Gulf of St. Lawrence to Lake Superior ? 

195. How are these obstructions avoided ? 

196. How is Nova Scotia joined to New Brunswick ? 

197. What islands are in the Niagara river ? 

198. How is Oceanica divided ? 

199. WTiat does Malasia comprise ? 

200. Which are the principal Sunda Isles ? 

201. What are the productions of these islands ? 

202. What is said of the animals of Malasia ? 

203. What are the inhabitants ? 

204. What nations have possessions here ? 

205. Which are the most important cities of this Archi- 
pelago ? WTiere are they situated ? 

a. Locate Acheen, Macassar, Bencoolen. 

b. What strait separates Sumatra from Java ? 

c. What strait separates Sumatra from Asia ? Borneo 
from Celebes ? 

d. Where is Mt. Ophir ? 

206. How large is Borneo, Sumatra, Java, Celebes, 
Philippine Isles ? 

207. What state is about the size of Celebes ? 

208. In which zone are these islands situated ? 

209. What is the surface of these islands ? 

210. Are these islands thickly inhabited ? 

211. How is Australasia divided ? 



84 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

212 To what country does Australia, New Zealand, and 
Tasmania belong ? 

2 r3. What possessions have France in these divisions ? 

214. How is Australia divided ? 

215. How large is Australia ? 

216. What is the surface of this island ? 

217. What are the inhabitants ? 

218. What are the chief pursuits of the people ? 

219. What is said of the native animals of Australia ? 

220. Which are the principal cities ? Locate them. 

221. Is this country thickly settled ? 

222. Describe Tasmania. 

223. Where is New Zealand ? 

a. Locate Auckland, Hobarton, Cook Strait. 

b. Where is Bass Strait, Torres, Molucca Passage ? 

224. What is said of Papua, and the other islands ? 

225. What does Polynesia include ? 

226. Name the principal groups ? 

227. What is the surface of the island? of Polynesia ? 

228. What are the inhabitants ? 

229. What is said of the animals ? 

230. Which is the only important town in Polynesia? 

a. Locate Timor, Sumbawa, Kangaroo, Hawaii. 

b. To what divisions of Oceanica do the following 
islands belong: Luzon, Feejee, Lombock, Chatham, 
Mindanao, North and South, Sooloo, Banca ? 

c. Describe the Gulf of Carpentaria, Spencer, Shark, 
Plenty, Botany, and Great Bay. 

231. Name the Middle States. 

232. Which is the larger. New York or Pennsylvania ? 

233. What is the surface of these states ? 

234. "What can be said of New York ? 

235. For what are Rochester, Syracuse, West Pointy 
and Saratoga noted ? Locate them. 

236. What is noticeable of Pennsylvania ? 



GEOGRAPHY. 85 

237. What is said of its minerals ? 

238. For what are Pittsburg and Philadelphia noted ? 

239. What are the pursuits of the people of New 
Jersey. ? 

240. WTiat fashionable resorts for sea-bathing in this 
state ? Locate them. 

241. How large is Delaware ? 

a. Where are capes May and Henlopen, Charles and 
Henry ? 

b. Name and locate the capitals of the Middle States. 

c. Locate Sing Sing, Poughkeepsie, Hudson, Troy, 
Buffalo, Gettysburg, Erie, Newark, Paterson. 

d. Which one of the States is called the "Empire 
State"? Which one the "Keystone State".? 

e. Describe the Hudson, Ivlohawk, Susquehanna, 
Delaware, Genesee, Tioga, Juniata, and the rivers which 
form the Ohio. 

/. Locate. Pottsville, Rome, . Utica, Wilmington, 
Camden, Jersey City, Reading, Alleghany, Scranton, Oswe- 
go, Lockport, Ithaca, Ticonderoga. 

g. Locate the following: Lake George, Oneida, 
Cayuga, Seneca, Delaware Bay, Egg Harbor, Manhattan 
Island. 

h. Wliere is Sandy Hook, Blackwell's Island, East 
River ? 

i. Locate New Castle, Titusville, Oil City, Ogdens- 
burg. Flushing, Whitehall, Albion, Lebanon, Schoharie, 
Auburn. 

242. How great a fall has the cataract of Niagara ? 

243. How are the West India Islands divided ? 

244. What islands belong to the Greater Antilles ? 

245. What does the Lesser Antilles include ? 

246. What and where are the Bahama Islands } 

247. To what country do these islands belong ? 

248. What are the inhabitants of these islands ? 



OD THE QUESTION BOOK. 

249. Where are the negroes held as slaves ? 

250. What is the surface of the Antilles ? 
25 I. What are the productions ? 

252. What is rum ? 

253. How is Hayti divided ? 

254. What is the history of this Republic ? 

255. Where are the Bermuda Islands ? To whom do 
they belong ? 

256. How large are Cuba and Hayti ? 

a. Name and locate the capital cities of the West 
Indies. 

b. Locate Mantanzas, Kingston, Falmouth, Ponce, 
Manzanillo, Nuevitas, Samana, Gonaives. 

c. Describe the following capes: Maysi, Morant, 
St Antonio, Negril, De Cruz, Engano. 

d. Describe the straits, Mona Passage, Windward 
Passage, Channel of Yucatan, and Florida Strait. 

e. To what divisions do the following islands belong: 
Barbadoes, Dominica, Guanahani, Antigua, Tobago, Trini- 
dad, Tortuga, St. Thomas, Guadeloupe, Grenada, Isle ot> 
Pines, Orchilla ? 

257. What are Keys ? 

258. What is a reef? 

259. Describe the southern coast of Florida. 

260. Where is Key West ? What are its exports ? 

261. How is salt made in Key West ? 

262. What is sponge ? 

263. What is the general surface of Florida ? 

264. What are the productions of this state ? 

265. What is Lake Okeechobee, and where is it ? 

266. Why has this state so few good harbors ? 

a. Locate the following cities : Pensacola, Apalachi- 
cola, Tallahassee, St. Augustine, St. Marks. 

h. How is the Apalachicola river formed ? Describe 
them. 



GEOGRAPHY. 87 

267. Which state is separated by the Mississippi river ? 

268. On which side of the river is New Orleans ? De- 
scribe it. 

269 What is the soil of Louisiana ? 

270. How many territories in the United States ? 
Name them. 

271. What is Alaska and the District of Columbia ? 

272. Describe Alaska. 

273. Is this possession valuable to the United States ? 

274. Which is the principal settlement, and how situ- 
ated? 

275. What does Danish America include? 

276. Has Greenland been fully explored ? 

277. Why was Greenland so named ? 

278. Describe Iceland. 

279. What natural curiosities here ? 

280. What is supposed to be the cause of this phenom- 
enon ? 

281. What gave the name of Icelaftd? 

282. Which are the principal towns of Danish America ? 

283. How much larger is Asia than Africa ? 

284. What is the greatest length and breadth of Africa ? 

285. Give a short description of Africa. 

286. What are the inhabitants ? 

287. What does Barbary include ? 

288. To what nation do these countries belong ? 

289. How large is the Desert of Sahara ? 

a. Describe the following mountains: Atlas, Mount- 
ains of the Moon, Snow Mountains, Kong, Crystal, and 
Mocambe. 

290. How is Southern Africa divided ? 

291. How are these countries governed ? 

292. WTiere, and what is Liberia ? 

293. Where is the colony of Sierra Leone ? 

294. Wliat are the principal exports of Africa ? 



88 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

a. Locate Morocco, Monrovia, Free Town, Cairo, 
Cape Town, Mozambique, Cobbe, Tripoli, Sego, Condar, 
Sokoto, Algiers, Antananarivo, Petermaritzburg, Timbuc- 
too, Wara, Mesna, Coomassie, Kouka, Zanzibar, Graham 
Town, and Port Natal. 

b. What capes project from the four extremities of 
Africa ? 

c. Describe the Mozambique Channel, Gulf of Aden, 
Guinea, Sidra, Niger river, Senegal, Orange, and Congo. 

d. Locate the following islands: Azores, Canary, 
Cape Verd, Ascension, Helena, Madeira, Peak of Tenerifife. 

295. Describe Madagascar. 

296. Locate the capital cities of the territories of the 
United States. 

297. For what are Idaho and Montana noted ? 

298. Describe Dakota. 

299. Describe the Union Pacitic P.ailroad. 

300. Locate the principal towns on this railroad 

301. How is Salt Lake City situated ? 

302. Describe Utah. 

303. For what are the southern territories and Texas 
especially adapted ? 

304. How is the western part of Texas occupied .? 

305. What are the productions of Texas ? 

306. What is the climate ? 

a. Locate Austin, Houston, Matagorda, Brownsville, 
Corpus Christi, Colorado City, Greeley, Filmore City, 
Walla Walla, Portland, Ft. Benton, Ft. Union, Sioux City, 
Ft. Laramie, Silver City, Dallas, Preston, Pembina, Ver- 
million. 

b. Describe the following rivers: Cohmibia, Snake, 
Humboldt, Colorado, Gila, Rio Grande, Brazos, Trinity, 
Arkansas, Smoky Hill Fork, Platte. 

c. Locate Pike's Peak, Mt. Hood, Mt. Baker, Mt. 



GEOGRAPHY. 89 

Shasta, Diamond Peak, Long Peak, Spanish Peaks, Fre- 
mont's Peak, Mt. Fairweather, Mt. St. EUas. 

307. Which of the states and territories border on 
British America ? 

308. Which of the states are separated by the Mississippi 
river ? 

309. Which are separated by the Ohio river ? 

310. What is the general outHne of Europe, and what 
advantages does it offer ? 

311. What is the surface ? 

312. What are the principal European parts of this 
great mountain system ? Describe each part. 

313. What part of Euro})e is included in the Great Plain ? 

314. What is the climate ? 

315. Name the political divisions. How are they 
classified ? 

316. Which divisions are called the "Five G^eat Pow- 
ers"? 

317. Name and locate the peninsulas of Europe. 

318. Describe the Scandinavian peninsula. 

319. What are the exports of this peninsula ? 

320. How much farther north can grain be raised in 
Norway than on the iVtlantic shore of America ? 

321. What point on the American continent is in the 
same latitude as Christiana ? 

322. Where is Eapland ? 

323. Is this country inhabited ? 

324. What is the size of the Russian empire ? 

325. What is the surface of this empire ? 

326. How are the inhabitants divided ? 

327. What is the government ? Religion ? 

328. In what does the principal wealth of Russia con- 
sist ? 

329. Where are the great wheat-growing regions of 
Europe ? 



90 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

330. What is the nature of the country around the 
Caspian sea ? 

331. Describe the Caspian sea. 

332 . What are steppes^ and where found ? 
T^T^Tj. Where is Poland ? Circassia ? 

334. Describe Moscow. When was it burned ? 

335. For what is Sebastopol famous ? 
2i2i^. What was the cause of this siege ? 

337. Who inhabit the steppes, or barren plains of 
Russia ? 

338. Where is Niznei Novgorod, and what takes place 
there every year ? 

339. Which are the principal ports for foreign com- 
merce ? Locate them. 

340. WTiat seas and gulfs wash the shores of Russia ? 
Describe each. 

341. What do the British Islands comprise ? 

342. What does Great Britain include ? 

343. What is the surface of the British Islands ? 

344. How is Scotland divided ? 

345 What is the nature of the sea-coast ? 

346. What is tiiC climate ? 

347. In what does the chief wealth of Great Britain 
consist ? 

345. How does she rank with other nations in the 
amount of her manufactures and commerce ? 

349. What is the population of the several divisions ? 

350. Where is tin obtained 1 

351. What is the chief article of fuel in Ireland ? 

352. What is the extent of the British Empire ? 

353. Which are the principal possessions of Great 
Britain in Europe ? 

354. Which in Asia ? 

355. In Africa ? 

356. In Oceanica ? 



GEOGRAPHY. 9"! 

357. In America ? 

a. Locate Malta, Gozo, Ceylon, Singapore, Hong 
Kong, Aden, Mauritius and Seychelle islands. 

b. Where are the Hebrides, Orkney, Shetland, Ang- 
lesea, Man, Isle of Wight, Skye, Mull, Lewis, Uist, Islay, 
Arran ? 

c. Describe St. George's Channel, North Channel, 
English Channel, Bristol Channel, Dover Strait, Menai, 
The Minch, Little Minch, Jura Sound. 

d. Describe the following capes : Land's End, Liz- 
ard Pt., Dunnet Head, Kinnaird Head, Malin Head, Miz- 
zew Head, Flamborough Head, Butt of Lewis, and Cape 
Wrath. 

358. For what are Liverpool, Leeds and Bradford, 
Birmingham, Limerick, and Merthyr Tydvil noted ? Lo- 
cate them. 

359. Describe the Spanish Peninsula. 

360. What are the productions of Spain ? 

361. What parallel crosses the central portion of Spain, 
and through which of the United States does the same 
parallel pass ? 

362. What other countries in Europe does the same 
parallel cross ? 

363. Were we to follow this parallel, what countries in 
Asia would we pass through ? 

364. Where is the Republic of Andorra ? 

365. What is noticeable of this republic ? 

T,66. What are the foreign possessions of Spain ? 

367. How wide is the strait of Gibraltar ? 

368. What is noticeable of the Fortress of Gibraltar }■ 

369. How large is France ? 

370. How does she rank with other countries ? 

371. What is the surface ? 

372. What, and where are the Ia?ides ? 

373. What are the principal exports ? 



^2 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

374. What influence has Paris throughout the civilized 
-world ? 

375. Name and locate the principal possessions of 
France. 

a. Where is Pondicherry } 

b. Locate Minorca, Majorca, Sardinia, and Ivica. 

c. Describe, Bay of Biscay, Cxulf of Lyons, Gulf of 
Genoa, and Strait of Bonifacio. 

376. What are the pursuits of the people of Holland 
and Belgium ? 

377. What is the condition of much of the coast of this 
country ? 

378. How is internal communication promoted ? 
What is the Zider Zee ? 
W^hat people are called Dutch ? 
\Miat is the surface of Denmark ? 
How is Copenhagen situated ? 
What does Germany com.prise ? 
Which are the free cities ? 
Where is the state of Alsace ? 
WTiich are the chief ports of Germany ? 
What are the productions ? 
What are heaths? 

What are the inhabitants of Austria ? 
How is Venice situated ? 
What was Poland formerly ? 
Which is the most mountainous country of Eu- 



379- 
380. 
381. 
382. 

224. 

385. 
386. 

387. 
388. 

389. 
390- 
391- 
392- 
rope ? 

393. Of how many states is Switzerland composed ? 
How large is it ? 

394. For what are the Swiss noted ? What language 
do they speak ? 

395. For what is Geneva noted ? 

396. How is Italy governed ? 



GEOGRAPHY. 95 

397. In ancient times, for what was this country cele- 
brated ?■ 

398. For what are the towns and cities noted ? 

399. Where is San Marino ? 

400. To what country do the islands of Sardinia and 
Sicily belong ? 

401. ^\^lat is the extent of the Ottoman Empire ? 

402. Describe the Turk. 

403. AVhat was Greece in ancient times ? 

404. What is the shape of Greece ? 

405. Name and locate the capital cities of Europe. 

a. Locate Matapan, Spartivento, De Gata, St. Vin- 
cent, Finisterre, Ortegal, St. Matthew, The Naze, North, 
Sviatoi. 

b. Describe the followmg straits : Otranto, Messina, 
Bosphorus, Dardanelles, Enikale, Vaigatch Skager Rock, 
and Cattegat. 

c. Name and describe the seas which wash the shores 
of Europe. 

d. Describe the following Gulfs : Taranto, Salonica, 
Dantzic, Lubcck, Murray Frith, The Wash, Frith of Solway. 

e. Locate the principal seaports of Europe. Lon- 
don, Marseilles, Elsinore, Amsterdam, Venice, Aberdeen. 
Rotterdam, Palermo, Lisbon, Lubeck, Naples, Genoa, 
Hull, Oporto, Southampton, Brest, Constantinople, Bre- 
men, Hamburg, Limerick, Dundee, Bordeaux, Galway^ 
Dublin, Bristol, Port Mahone, Havre, Wat'erford, Belfast, 
Portsmouth, Cork, Liverpool, Stettin, Antwerp, London- 
derry, Barcelona, Dantzic, Dover, Leith, Swansea, Kings- 
ton, St. Petersburg, Riga, Odessa, Archangel, Malaga, 
Navarino, Sebastapol, Trieste, Aalborg, Salonica, Calais, 
Cronstadi. 

/. Describe the mountains of Kiolen, Carpathian, 
Balkan, Apennines, Pyrennees, Cevennes, Cantabrian, 
Siera Morena, Sierra Nevada, Jura, Alps, Ural, Valdai 



94 ' THE QUESTION BOOK. 

Hills, Cheviot Hills, Grampian Hills, Cambrian, Mt. Etna, 
Mt. Vesuvius, Ben Nevis, Ben Lomond, Mt. Snowdon. 

406. With what country is England most extensively 
engaged in trade ? 

407. Which is the most northern town in Europe ? . 

a. Locate the principal inland cities, not capitals : 
VIoscow, Warsaw, Dresden, Metz, Manchester, Birming- 
ani, Sheffield, Nottingham, Nancy, Orleans, Granada, 
aragossa, Cologne, Hanover, Adrianople, Sophia, Flor- 
ence, Turin, Milan, Geneva, Waterloo, Kilkenny, Killarney, 
Bradford, Norwich, Oxford, Pesth, Munich, Versailles, 
Rouen, Breslau. 

408. What countries are termed Spanish America ? 

409. What part of Spanish America is still in posses- 
sion of Spain ? 

410. What is the surface of Mexico ? 

411. Are the table-lands accessible from the Gulf? 

412. What is the climate ? 

413. What are the inhabitants ? 

414. How are the seasons divided ? 

415. What are the productions ? 

416. Wliat are the principal minerals ? 

417. How is the city of Mexico situated ? 

418. What two volcanoes are visible from the city ? 
V\Tiat do their names signify ? 

419. What is cochineal ? Pulque ? 

420. What is the history of Mexico ? 

421. What peninsulas belong to this republic ? 

422. What does Central America comprise ? 

423. Locate the capital cities. 

424. Where is Balize? To what country does it be- 
long ? 

425. What are the exports of Balize ? 

a. Locate the following cities: Vera Cruz, Mata- 



GEOGRAPHY 95 

moras, Monterey, Merida, Balize, San Luis Potosi, Puebla, 
Acapulco, Guatemala. 

426. What three routes were projected from the Atlan- 
tic to the Pacific ? 

42 7. How does Mexico compare in size with the United 
States ? 

428. In what zones is Mexico ? 

429. Where are the greatest copper regions in the 
United States ? 

430. Where is lead found most abundantly ? 

a. How many Western States ? Name them. 

b. How many Southern States ? Name them. 

43 1. WTiat are the great staple productions of the South- 
ern States ? 

432. "WTiich state produces the most cotton ? Rice ? 
Sugar ? Tobacco ? Sweet potatoes ? Corn ? Wheat ? 

433. Which State has the greatest number of swine ? 
Cattle ? Horses ? Mules ? Sheep ? 

434. Which state produces the greatest quantity of 
gold ? Silver ? Iron ? Copper ? Lead ? Coal ? Pine 
lumber ? Turpentine, resin, and tar ? 

435. How is turpentine, resin, and tar manufactured ? 

436. From what does North Carolina derive her chief 
wealth .? 

437. WTiat is South Carolina often called } 

438. What article can be raised extensively in all the 
states and territories ? 

439. Into what sections is the United States divided ? 

440. What does the Atlantic Slope embrace ? 

441. What does the Pacific Slope embrace ? 

442. What division is included in the Central Plain .? 

443. Into what divisions may the United States be di 
vided, with reference to its drainage ? 

444. What is the surface of Asia ? 



96 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

445. How are the table-lands divided ? What is said 
of them ? 

446. What countries co^^stitute the Great Northern 
Plain of Asia ? 

447. Describe the mountain system of Asia. 

448. W^here is the Great Desert of Gobi ? 

449. How may the climate be described ? 

450. What is the climate of Northern Asia ? 

451. Describe Siberia. 

452. What is the climate of Central and Southern Asia ? 

453. To what three races do the inhabitants of Asia 
belong ? 

454. What people belong to the IVtongolian race ? 

455. What nations, or tribes, living in Asia, belong to 
the Caucasian race ? 

456. What countries are occupied by the Malay race ? 

457. Wliat is the estimated number of inhabitants of 
the several races ? 

458. For what has Siberia long been used ? 

459. To what country does Georgia belong ? What is 
noticeable of the inhabitants ? 

460. What is the Khan ? 

a. Locate the following cities: Tobolsk, Irkoutsk,, 
Tashkend, Bokhara, Yarkand, Khokan, Khiva, Tiflis, 
Smyrna, Jerusalem, Damascus, Medir.a, Mecca, Mocha, 
Aden, Muscat. 

461. What does the Chinese Empire include ? 

462. What is said of the population of China ? 

463. What are the productions of China ? 

464. What is the government ? 

465. Which are the most important sea-ports for foreign 
trade ? Locate them. 

466. Name the principal islands of Japan. 

467. What are the chief productions of these islands? 

468. What two peninsulas comprise India ? 



GEOGRAPHY. 97 

469. How is Farther India divided ? 

470. Name and locate the capitals of India. 

471. "V\Tiat are the productions of India ? 

a. Locate Singapore, Rangoon, Monchobo, Bombay, 
Madras, Benares, Mandalay, Cabul, Candahar, Herat, 
Kelat, and Lassa. 

472. What is the government of Persia ? 

473. What is the surface of Arabia ? 

474. Who are the inhabitants ? 

475. For what is Mecca noted ? Medina ? 

476. Where is the country of Cochin China ? 

a. Locate Teheran, Ispahan, Sana, Yeddo, Hako- 
dadi, Kauagawa, Pekin. 

b. Name and describe the seas which wash the shores 
of Asia: Kara, Behring, Ochotsk, Japan, Yellow, China, 
Arabiar), Red, Mediterranean, Marmora, Black, and Cas- 
pian. 

c. Where are the Aral and Dead seas ? 

d. Describe, Bay of Bengal, Persian, Siam, Tonguin^ 
Petchelee, Lena, Obe, Martaban, and Cambay. 

e. Describe Lake Baikal, Tchany, Balkash, Tonting. 
/. Describe the following rivers: Lena, Obe, Yene- 

sei, Irtish, Amoor, Hong Ho, Yang tse Kiang, Hong 
Kiang, Euphrates, Tigris, Amoo, Indus, Ganges, Brahma- 
putra, Irrawadda, and Cambodia. 

477. Name and locate the peninsulas of Asia. 

478. Where is the Isthmus of Kraw ? 

479. AVhich is the most elevated lake in the world ? 

a. Locate Formosa, Hainan, Socotra, Nova Zembla, 
Ceylon, Laccadive, Maldive, Hong Kong, Lew Chew, 
Saghalien, Kurile, Aleutian, New Siberia. 

b. Describe the following straits and capes : Babel- 
Mandel, Ormus, Tartary, Corea, Formosa, Manaar, Ma- 
lacca, Comarin, Ras-al Gat, Cambodia, Lopatka, an-^ 
Vastochnoi. 

7 



yo THE QUESTION BOOK. 

480. How wide is Behring Strait ? Gibraltar ? Dover ? 

481. How wide is the Isthmus of Panama, Suez, Te- 
huantepec ? 

482. Which are the largest five islands in the world ? 

483. What is the size of the oceans ? 

484. Wliat is the highest point reached by Arctic ex- 
plorers ? By the Antarctic ? 

485. Name four of the largest cities in the world, in 
order of population. 

486. Name the next four in order. 

487. Name the five largest cities of the United States. 

488. In the production of what minerals does Great 
Britian exceed every other country ? 

489. Name the largest seven rivers in the United 
States. Describe them. 

490. What is the population of the Chinese Empire ? 
Japan ? Hindoostan ? United States ? 

491. How does China compare, in size and population, 
to the United States ? 

492. What is the horizon ? 

493. What are the principal uses of rivers ? 

494. What important places of the globe are situated 
on or near the 40th parallel north latitude ? 

495. What part of the United States is in the same 
latitude north of the equator, that the southern part of 
Africa is south of it .^ 

496. What is the latitude of Cape Horn ? Cape Good 
Hope ? 

497. What is the difference between the location of 
commercial and manufacturing cities ? 

498. Why is the water of Great Salt Lake not fresh ? 

499. Name five of the principal articles exported by 
the people of the United States. 

500. Name five of the principal articles imported. 



I 



AN S"WE RS 

TO 

Questions on Geography. 



1. From the two words geo (earth) and graphy (de- 
scription). 

2. Three: Mathematical, Physical and Political. 

3. It treats of the form, magnitude, and motions of 
the earth, and of the various imaginary lines on the sur- 
face. 

4. It treats of the solid and fluid parts of the earth's 
surface, the atmosphere, and all animal and vegetable life. 

5. It treats of the various countries on the earth's sur- 
face; the people, customs, religion, and government. 

6. A sphere flattened at the ends. 

7. By the revolution of the earth while in a plastic 
condition. 

8. About twenty-six miles, the diameter at the equa- 
tor being 7,925 miles. 

9. An imaginary Hne on which it performs its daily 
revolutions ; its poles are the points where its axis meets 
the surface. 

10. Two: diurnal and annual. The diurnal is its mo- 
tion from west to east; its annual is its revolution around 
the sun. 

1 1 . The revolution of the earth on its axis. 

12. The revolution of the earth around the sun. 

13. The course it takes in its annual motion; its esti- 
mated length is about 600,000,000 miles. 



100 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

14. About 68,000 miles an hour. 

15. It is due to the direction of the sun's rays, and is 
on the same principle that morn and eve are cooler than 
mid-day. 

16. Belts, or divisions of the earth, bounded by the 
tropic and polar circles, of which there are five — two frigid, 
two temperate, and one torrid. The north frigid lies be- 
tween the pole and Arctic Circle, and is 2^J4^ in width; 
the north temperate lies between the Arctic Circle and the 
Tropic of Cancer, and is 43^^ in width ; the torrid lies be- 
tween the Tropic of Cancer and the Tropic of Capricorn, 
and extends 2^j4'^ north and south of the equator; the 
south temperate is of the same size as the north, and lies 
between the Tropic of Capricorn and the Antarctic Circle; 
the south frigid is all of the earth's surface south of the 
Antarctic Circle. 

17. It is 66^2 degrees, or 23^^ degrees out of a per- 
pendicular direction. 

18. During the revolution of the earth around the sun 
a part of the earth's surface comes directly perpendicular 
to the sun's rays. This belt, 47° wide, is enclosed by the 
tropics, and termed torrid, meaning great heat. Geo- 
graphers have decided that the limit of the temperate zones 
should be to that line where the length of the longest day 
is twenty-four hours, and as the inclination of the earth is 
23^^ that line should be 23^° from the poles, where the 
polar circles have been drawn. 

19. WTiat the exact influence upon the earth's climate 
would be, might be difficult to determine, but during the 
annual revolution of the earth the entire surface would 
come directly perpendicular to the sun's rays, and become 
torrid. When one pole would come perpendicular to the 
sun's rays, the other would necessarily be in darkness, and 
frigid. The length of the longest day at the equator would 
be twenty-four hours, and would occur every six months. 



GEOGRAPHY. 101 

This would give, at the equator, four zones in one year — 
two torrid and two temperate. 

20. If the earth was perpendicular to the plane of its 
orbit there would be no change of seasons, but as it be- 
comes inclined the position of the earth to the sun is 
changed in its anaual revolution, consequently this change 
must produce a diversity of climate. It is by this inclina- 
tion that the temperate zones ha\'e four seasons. 

21. The inclination of the earth will vary that line 
where the length of the longest day is twenty-four hours, 
one degree for every degree of incHnation. As it is now 
23/^^j the line must be 23%^ from the poles, or the 
boundary of the frigid zones. If the inclination should be 
30^, the frigid zones would extend 30^, and 30^^ each side 
of the equator would become perpendicular to the sun's 
rays, making the torrid 60^, the temperate 30-' and the 
frigid 30 ° ; and so on of any other degree of inclination. 
The frigid zone would be in width the number of degrees 
of the inclination of the earth ; the torrid would be the 
same each side of the equator, and the temperate what lies 
between. 

22. A magnetic needle, resting upon a pivot, enclosed 
in a circular box. It always points nearly north. The 
cardinal points are north, south, east, and west. 

23. Into great and small circles. The great circles are 
the meridians and the equator; the small circles are the 
tropic and polar circles, and the parallels of latitude. 

24. Into 360 equal parts, called degrees. 

25. A drawing representing a part or whole of the 
earth's surface. 

26. The equator, meridians, parallels, tropic and polar 
circles. 

27. A great circle equally distant from the poles. 

28. It crosses the mouth of the Amazon river, Brazil, 
United States of Columbia, Ecuador, Pacific Ocean, East 



102 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

Indies (Celebes, Borneo, Sumatra), Indian Ocean, Zangue- 
bar, Ethiopia, Lower Guinea, Atlantic Ocean. 

29. Any great circle passing through the poles. A 
meridian is half a meridian circle. 

30. The distance either east or west from any given 
meridian. 

31. The one which passes through Washington, and 
the one near Greenwich. 

32. About 77 ° . 

;^^. 180 "^ either east or west. 

34. If situated on the meridian from which we reckon, 
it can have no longitude. 

35. It has no latitude, and but one degree of longitude, 
west. 

^6. Sixty geographical miles at the equator, but they 
gradually grow less as they approach the poles; in lati- 
tude 30 ° it is about fifty-two geographical miles ; in latitude 
60 it is thirty, and at the poles it is nothing. 

37. All meridian lines terminate at the poles, and as a 
degree of longitude is enclosed by meridian lines, the 
length must decrease as the lines approach the poles. 

T^S. New York, Pennsylvania, Maryland, Virginia, and 
North Carolina. 

39. Siberia, and Chinese Empire. 

40. Pekin. 

41. The distance north or south of the equator, called 
north and south latitude. 

42. 90 ° , which is at the poles. 

43. Sixty geographical, or 69^ statute miles. 

44. Bahama Islands, Florida Strait, Gulf of Mexico,, 
Mexico, Pacific Ocean, Sandwich Islands, near Canton 
(China), Burmah, Hindoostan, Arabian Sea, Muscat 
(Arabia), Egypt, Sahara Desert, and Atlantic Ocean. 

45. Near Rio Janeiro, Paraguay, th-e Northern part of 
the Argentine Republic, the southern part of Bolivia,, 



GEOGRAPHY. 103 

Pacific Ocean, Central Australia, Isle of Madagascar, 
Southern Africa, and Atlantic Ocean. 

46. Greenland, British America, Alaska, Behring strait, 
Siberia, northern part of Russia, Lapland, Sweden, Norway, 
and Atlantic Ocean. 

47. Discoveries of land have been made in this region, 
but the cold is so great that animal or vegetable life does 
not exist. 

48. In the northern hemisphere there are vast tracts of 
land to receive the rays of heat and warm the atmosphere; 
but towards the south pole the rays of heat are lost on the 
great bodies of water, and the air is not warmed. 

49. The southern part of British America. 

50. Cold winds from the north and the Arctic current 
which flows near the coast of Labrador, cause the climate 
to be too cold for cultivation, while in the same latitude in 
England snov/ is seldom seen, which is due to the nearness 
of the warm waters of the Gulf Stream, a branch of which 
flows into the Irish Sea, and the northeast current flows by 
the coast of Norway. This stream renders the clinmte of 
Western Europe mild and moist. 

51 It is by the presence of the Japan current, which 
brings the warm waters of the torrid zone. 

52. It issues from the Gulf of Mexico, spreads out a 
breadth of 150 miles, and sweeps along the shore of North 
America to Newfoundland. Here it meets the Arctic cur- 
rent and divides into two branches, one of which takes a 
southeasterly course towards the coast of Africa, while the 
other flows in a northeasterly direction towards the British 
Isles and Norway. 

53. It is situated in the middle of the Atlantic Ocean, 
consisting of seaweed, and occupies the eddy or whirl 
caused by the several ocean currents which surround it. 

54. It is a Spanish name, meaning grassy. 



104 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

55. Continents, islands, peninsulas, isthmuses, capes, 
promontories, mountains, hills, plains, and valleys. 

56. Oceans, seas, gulfs or bays, straits, lakes, and rivers. 

57. Straits, passages, sounds, and channels. 

58. It is little more than twice as large. The Westiern 
Continent contains about 15,000,000 square miles. 

59. About 200,000,000 square miles. 

60. Asia. Europe. Europe. South America. 

61. England; 22,500,000. 

62. It is about one-sixtieth as large, or about the size 
of Wisconsin. 

6;^. Europe is about one-tenth larger. 

64. Asia contains four times as many square miles and 
two and a half times as many inhabitants. 

65. A narrow arm of the sea into which a river 
empties. 

66. A sea interspersed with many islands. 

67. When a river discharges its waters by several out- 
lets, the tract of land embraced by these outlets is called a 

68. From its resemblance to the fourth letter of the 
Greek alphabet, which is deUa, and shape of a triangle. 

69. A place some distance from the shore where ves- 
sels can anchor in safety. 

70. A fertile spot in a desert. 

71. The tract of country drained by that river and its 
tributaries. 

72. The Amazon. It contains more than 2,000,000 
square miles. 

73. About 1,000,000 square miles. 

74. One hundred and eighty miles. 

75. Into four : enlightened, civilized, half-civilized, and 
savage. 

76. Three: Monarchy, Aristocracy, and Democracy. 
These forms of government may be variously modified 



GEOGRAPHY. 105 

77. The form of government where the supreme power 
is in the hands of one person. 

78. The form of government where the power is in the 
hands of a privileged few. 

79. Where the power is in the hands of the people. 

80. Empires, kingdoms, republics, states, counties, 
townships and cities. 

81. An empire is a country governed by an emperor; 
a kingdom^ one governed by a king ; a republic, one gov- 
erned by representatives chosen by a people; a state is a 
•division of a republic, having laws of its own harmonizing 
with the general government; a county is a division of a 
state or kingdom. 

82. A limited monarchy. 

S;^ China, Persia, Morocco, and the most of the half- 
civilized countries of the Eastern Continent. 

84. Five : Caucasian, Mongolian, American or Indian, 
African, and Malay. 

85. Four: Christian, Jewish, Mohammedan, and 
Pagan. 

86. Three : Protestants, Roman Catholics, and adher- 
ents of the Greek Church. 

87. The Mohammedans are followers of the false 
prophet Mohammed, who lived in Arabia about six hundred 
years after Christ. They believe in one God; they con- 
sider Moses and Christ as true prophets, but Mohammed 
as the greatest and last. 

88. The Jews reject Christ and his gospel, and expect 
a IVIessiah, yet to come. 

89. The greater part ot the inhabitants of Asia and 
Africa, nearly all of the tribes of the islands of the Pacific, 
and the Indians of America. 

90. About one-half of the people of the globe are Pa- 
gans, about one- third are Christians, nearly one-sixth are 
Mohammedans, and about 4,000,000 are Jews. 



106 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

91. Mississippi, with the Missouri, 4,200; Nile, 4,000; 
Amazon, 3,750; Yenisei, 3,400. 

92. Mississippi proper, 2,800; Missouri, to the Missis- 
sippi, 2,900; Mackenzie, 2,300; Arkansas, 2,000; Sas- 
katchawan, 1,900, 

93. 2,000. 

94. Amazon; La Plata, 2,300; Orinoco, 1,550; San 
Francisco, 1,550. 

95. Volga, 2,000; Danube, 1,600; Don, 1,000; Dniep- 
er, 1 ,000. 

96. Yenisei; Yang-tse-Kiang, 3,320; Obi, 3,000; Lena, 
2,700. 

97. Nile; Niger, 3,000; Zambesi, 1,800; Senegal, 1,200. 

98. It is a broad, deep river, and navigable for 
large vessels about 2,400 miles, and for steamboats to 
the foot of the Andes. The tide flows up 600 miles. Its 
waters teem with aUigators, and its banks are lined with 
almost impenetrable forests, filled with huge serpents, 
ferocious beasts, troops of monkeys, swarms of insects, 
and flocks of gaudily-colored birds. 

99. It rises in Itasca Lake, and is navigable to the 
Falls of St. Anthony, which are very heavy rapids. The 
upper part of the river in many places, has very high and 
rugged banks, while in Louisiana levees^ or banks are built 
to prevent inundations. Its mouth is not favorable for the 
navigation of large vessels. Instead of being broad and 
clear it has many outlets, and sand-bars are continually 
forming. 

100. This river is very rapid. It is much larger than 
the Mississippi above, and is navigable to the Great Falls 
above Ft. Benton, where there are some of the grandest 
cataracts in the world. 

loi. Its source is not definitely known. It flows 
through a rainless district, but its periodical inundations 
make the valley one of the most fertile in the world. 



GEOGRAPHY. 107 

« 

Above its mouth, for 1,500 miles, there are no rivers or 
creeks which flow into it. 

102. It is a great estuary 200 miles long, and formed 
by the union of the Parana and Uraguay. For 1,000 
miles on the Parana there is a continuous and safe navi- 
gation for vessels of three hundred tons burden. 

103. This country is nearly as large as Texas; about 
three-fourths of its area consists of sandy deserts. The 
settled portions are principally in the valley of the Nile, 
which is from ten to twenty miles in width. Egypt is noted 
for its wonderful ruins. The pyramids, temples, sphynxes, 
statues, and caves hewn m the rocks, are traces of its 
former civilization. 

104. Cross the Atlantic, enter the Mediterranean Sea; 
pass through the Suez canal ; down the Red Sea into the 
Indian Ocean; pass near the southern points of Asia, to 
Canton; thence across the Pacific, to San Francisco; then 
by rail across the continent to New York. 

2d. Sail southwest on the California route until nearly 
opposite Rio Janeiro; cross the Atlantic; pass Cape of 
Good Hope; through the Indian Ocean to the East In- 
dies; then up the China Sea to Canton; cross the Pacific 
to San Francisco; thence to Panama, and across the Isth- 
mus; then north, through the West Indies, to New York. 

105. The United States. 

106. Between the 26lh and 49th. The distance from 
the southern point of Texas to the British possessions is 
about 1,600 miles. 

107. It is about 45^ west from Washington, and about 
3,000 miles from New York. 

108. Kansas. 

109. Cotton — United States. Sugar — West Indies. 
Coffee — Brazil. Rice and tea — China. 

no. Cotton — South America and Egypt. Sugar — 
United States and South America. Coffee — Java Islands, 



108 THE QUESTION BOOR. 

West Indies, and United States. Rice — United States and 
Egypt. 

111. The Spice Islands are celebrated for the produc- 
tion of cloves, nutmegs, and other spices. Java produces 
more pepper than all other countries combined. 

1 12. The unexpanded flower dried. The clove tree 
grows to the height of from twenty to thirty feet. 

113. The fruit of the nutmeg tree. This tree is about 
the size of the common pear. 

114. Several ranges near each other and connected. 

115. The Rocky, Californian, AUeghanian, Andean, 
Parime, and Brazilian. 

116. At the equator the length of the days are equal, 
"being twelve hours each ; at the tropics the longest day is 
about thirteen and a half hours; at the Polar circles 
twenty-four hours ; at the Poles six months. 

117. Rains from the Pacific are of rare occurrence, 
and the height of the Andes range prevents the rain-clouds 
from the east. 

118. Manchester. Lyons. Belfast. Sheffield, Brussels. 

119. Agriculture, manufactures, lumbering, and com- 
merce. 

120. Grains, butter, cheese, wool, ma{)le sugar, and 
live stock. 

121. On the Merrimac and Pawtucket rivers. 

122. From the extensive quarries in Vermont and 
Italy. It is also found in the states of Maine, Massachu- 
setts, and Rhode Island. 

123. It is very hard rock, and much used for millstones. 
It is found in the Eastern States. 

124. New Hampshire. 

125. 1,300 square miles. 1S3. 

126. The boundary line varies by taking, as it appears 
to be, a township in one place and part of another from 
the state of Connecticut and giving it to Massachusetts. 



GEOGRAPHY. 109 

127. About 189,000 square miles. 

128. A large portion of it is traversed by mountain 
ranges. The great agricultural valley lies between the 
Sierra Nevada and coast range, and extends 500 miles. 

129. It is the Sacramento and San Joaquin valley, and 
derives its name from the Sacramento river, which rises in 
the northern part of the state, and the San Joaquin which 
rises in the southern part. These rivers flow towards each 
other and empty into a branch of the San Francisco Bay. 

130. A narrow strait about four miles long, which is 
the efitrance from the Pacific Ocean to San Francisco Bay. 

131. It was first announced at the close of the year 
1848. 

132. The cHmate is noted for its periodical changes. 
There are two seasons, the wet and the dry. In the lati- 
tude of San Francisco the wet season lasts from the middle 
of November to the middle of May. 

133. Richmond is about twenty-five miles south. 

134. About 230 miles. 

135. The northern part of Patagonia. 

136. It is a little larger than the United States, con- 
taining about 3,230,000 square miles. 

137. Havana. 

138. It is a vast peninsula, occupying the southern 
half of the Western Continent. Its length from north to 
south is about 4,000 miles, and its greatest breadth is 
about 3,000. Three great mountain systems diversify the 
surface, viz : The Andean, which stretch along the western, 
coast; the Parime, which consists of several parallel 
ranges, extending from east to west, between the Orinoco 
and Amazon rivers ; and the Brazilian system, which con- 
sists of two ranges running parallel to the coast of Brazil, 
with several diverging chains. Between these mountain 
systems extends a vast plain. This plain may be divided 



110 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

into four parts — the region of the llanos, the selvas, the 
pampas, and wastes of Patagonia. 

139. They are level grazing tracts, which occupy most 
of the region of the basin of the Orinoco. During the 
dry season they are parched and desolate ; but with the 
return of rain, rich pastures are abundant. 

140. They are the forest plains of the Amazon, occu- 
pying the lower part of the basin, extending as far as the 
periodical inundation. 

141. These tracts are in the Argentine Republic, and 
are covered with a heavy growth of grass, which afford 
sustenance to great herds of cattle and horses. 

142. Sterile tracts covered with sand and gravel. 

143. An extensive level tract considerably elevated 
above the level of the sea. 

144. The Great Plateau of the Andes; the elevated 
plains of Quito, Bogota, and Popayan; and the table-land 
of Brazil. 

145. It is an extensive tract of lofty table-land, stretch- 
ing along the tops of the Andes between parallels 3 ° and 
15 o south latitude, with an elevation of nearly 13,000 

/ feet. 

146. It is situated under the equator, on the side of a 
volcanic mountain, 9,500 feet above the sea. The climate 
is that of continued spring. Earthquakes are frequent. 
There are in sight eleven summits of the Andes coverei? 
with perpetual snow. 

147. Volcanoes of Equador. Chimborazo is a peak 
of the Andes range, 21,440 feet high. Cotopaxi, 18,900 
feet high, is the most tremendous volcano in the world. 
The flame sometimes rises 3,000 feet above the top. 

148. A light raft, which is formed of inflated skins cov- 
ered with a light platform. These are used for unloading 
vessels through the breakers, which continually dash upon 
the shores and prevent the approach of any ordinary boat. 



\ 



GEOGRAPHY. Ill 

149. It is a connecting river between the Orinoco and 
Rio Negro rivers. This tract of country is so level that a 
rise or fall of the Orinoco governs the course of that river, 
which flows during a portion of the year into the Amazon, 
and at other times in an opposite direction. 

150. Twelve and a half degrees north of the equator. 

151. Uruguay. 

152. Sydney. 

153. Buffalo. 

154. Near Cape Verd. 

155. It projects from Horn Island, which is southwest 
from Hermit Island. Cape Horn has usually been given as 
projecting from the Isle of Hermit. 

156. The most southern part of the inhabited world, 
and is peopled by a race of miserable savages, who live 
chiefly by fishing. These islands were discovered by 
Magellan, in 1520, and so named by him on account of 
the number of fires he saw along the coast, which he sup- 
posed to be eruptions of volcanoes. The meaning of 
Terra del Fuego is land of fire. 

157. It was taken from the Spanish word PatagoJi — 
a man with large feet. jMagellan gave the inhabitants of 
this country the name of Patagonians on account of the 
apparent large size of their feet, which, being wrapped in 
skins, seemed much larger than they really were. 

158. Cape Gallinas, St. Roque, Horn, Parina. 

159. It is in Peru, and the Ucayle river is its outlet. 
This lake is the source of the Amazon. 

160. With the exception of Lake Titicaca and Lake 
Maracaibo, they are more like vast morasses than lakes. 

161. Lake Titicaca is a saltish lake, about half as 
large as Lake Erie;, and is situated on the Great Plateau 
nearly 13,000 feet above the level of the Pacific Ocean. 
Its waters are inland, having no outlet to the ocean. Lake 



112 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

Maracaibo is, more properly speaking, a bay being con- 
nected by a strait with the Carribbean Sea. 

162. They lie off the coast of Peru, and are of great 
value for the immense quantities of guano found upon, 
them. 

163. French Guiana, which contains about 3,500 square 
miles, or about the size of Maine. 

164. It contains nearly one half of the peninsula. 

165. It consists of a number of states united under a 
government modelled after that of the United States. Uru- 
guay and Paraguay were formerly members of this con- 
federation. 

166. They form one of the grandest mountain ranges 
in the world. They commence in low hills on the Isthmus 
of Panama, and terminate in the Island of Cape Horn,, 
which is a bleak and naked rock, rising 3,500 feet above 
the sea. In Patagonia they rise abruptly from the shore; 
but farther north, they are from 60 to 100 miles from the 
coast. They consist generally of parallel ranges of lofty 
mountains, with high valleys and table-lands between. This 
system is from 30 to 400 miles wide. 

167. Its divisions are Rupert Land, and the British 
Provinces. 

168. The Dominion of Canada, which includes the Pro- 
vinces of Quebec, Ontario, New Brunswick, and Nova 
Scotia; Prince Edward Island Newfoundland, and British 
Columbia. 

169. A governor for each of these provinces is appoint- 
ed by the British government. Every province, however, 
elects its own legislature, and in a great measure are inde- 
pendent. The Governor of Canada is Governor-General 
of the whole of British America. 

170. Ottawa, like Washington, is the capital of the sev- 
eral provinces, or states, and the Canadian Parliament, like 



GEOGRAPHY. 118 

our CoBgress, meets there to enact general laws. The 
Governor-General is President. 

171. It comprises the greater part of British America, 
formerly known as the Hudson Bay Company Territory, 
who had exclusive right to the fisheries and fur trade of 
this vast region. 

172. The south-western part of British America, be- 
tween the Rocky Mountains and the Pacific Ocean, and 
Vancouver's and Washington islands. 

173. Cape Breton. 

174. The surface is generally rocky and barren. The 
coast is indented by deep inlets, Avhich form many excellent 
harbors. It is noted for its fisheries. 

175. It is an arm of the sea, which almost divides the 
island of Cape Breton. 

176. The small islands of St. Pierre and Miquelon. 
These islands lie south of Newfoundland, and serve as 
fishing-stations. 

177. They are shallow places in the sea, the largest of 
which is Grand Bank, and lies to the eastward of the island. 
This bank is more than 600 miles long and 250 broad. 

1 78. It is situated at the mouth of the St. Lawrence 
river. It is a barren island and only occupied by keepers 
of light-houses upon the coast. 

179. South Carolina, Delaware. 

180. On Montreal island. This island is 32 miles in 
length, and is situated at the junction of the Ottawa with 
the St. Lawrence. The isle of Jesus lies north of it. 

181. For the grandeur and beauty of its natural scenery. 
Niagara FaUs, the Thousand Isles, and Rapids of St. Law- 
rence, the falls near Quebec, and the grand scenery of the 
Saguenay river, are the admiration of thousands of tourists. 

182. For having the highest tides in the world, which 
rise to the height of seventy feet. 

183. Tides are elevations and depressions of the ocean 



114 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

at regular intervals, occurring twice in twenty-four hours; 
the neap tides are the least ebb and flow of the water and 
are at the close of the first quarter, and first of the last 
quarter of the moon; spring tides are the greatest ebb and 
flow of the water, which occur at the time of the new and 
the full moon. 

184. The attraction of the moon and sun. 

185. Waves, tides, and currents. 

186. The action of the winds on the surface of a body 
of water. On the ocear., the height of vvaves produced 
by storms averages from to to 20 feet. 

187. They are like vast rivers, transporting its waters 
from one part to another, and are caused by the heat of the 
sun, rotation of the earth, the saltness of the sea, by winds, 
tides, and melting ice. 

188. Into constant, periodical, and temporary. 

189. A stream which runs by the side of, or beneath 
another current, and in an opposite direction. 

190. The position of the bay is such, that the Atlantic 
tide is forced into it, and the waters are raised by this pres- 
sure above the adjoining sea. 

191. Grain, hemp, flax, potatoes, lumber, fish, coal, 
grindstones, and gypsum. 

192. Halifax, Charlotte Town, St. John's, Frederic- 
town, Ottawa, and New Westminster. 

193. Newfoundland. 

194. The Rapids of the St. Lawrence, Niagara Falls, 
and falls in the river St. Mary. 

195. In ascending the river, the rapids are avoided by 
canals on the left bank ; but the downward passage, though 
perilous, is made by the river itself. The Welland Canal 
connects lakes Ontario and Erie, thereby avoiding the Falls 
of Niagara. The falls of the St. Mary river are passed by 
a ship canal. 

196. By an isthmus, fourteen miles in width. 



GEOGRAPHY. 116 

197. Grand, Navy, and Goat. 

198. Into three divisions: Malasia, Australasia, and 
Polynesia. 

199. The East India Archipelago, which Hes to the 
southeast of Asia. The principal divisions are the Sunda 
Isles, Spice Islands, Philippine, and Celebes. 

200. Borneo, Sumatra, and Java. 

201. They are varied, for no part of the world is richer 
in its vegetable productions. The minerals are also valu- 
able. Nearly all of the spices that we use — such as cinna- 
mon, cloves, nutmegs, and pepper — are raised on these 
islands. The bread-fruit tree, sago, cocoanut palm, ba- 
nanas, yams, and various tropical fruits are grown exten- 
sively. Coffee is exported from Java; gold and diamonds 
from Borneo ; tin from Banca ; sugar, hemp, and tobacco 
from the Philippine Isles. 

202. They are among the largest and fiercest upon 
the earth. The tiger, rhinoceros, elephant, and ourang- 
outang are found in Sumatra. 

203. They are principally Malays, and are engaged in 
maritime pursuits, many of which are pirates. 

204. The Dutch, English, Spanish, and Portuguese. 
Java, the Spice Islands, Sumatra, Celebes, a part of Borneo, 
and most of Timor belong to the Dutch; the Philippine 
Isles to Spain; a part of Borneo and Lapuan to the Eng- 
lish; and a part of Timor belongs to the Portugese. 

205. Batavia and Manilla. 

206. Borneo contains about 260,000 square miles, Su- 
matra 125,000, Java 52,000, Celebes 46,000, Philippine 
66,000. 

207. Pennsylvania. 

208. The torrid. The equator crosses Sumatra, 
Borneo, Celebes, and some of the Spice Islands. 

209. Most of them are mountainous, and many con- 
tain active volcanoes. Java, alone, contains forty-three. 



116 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

210. With the exception of Java they are not. Java, 
which is about the size of Arkansas, contains 16,000,000 
people. 

211. This is the largest division of Oceanica, and 
comprises Australia, Papua or New Guinea, Tasmania,, 
New Zealand, New Caledonia, and many other islands. 

212. To Great Britain. 

213. New Caledonia. 

214. North Austraha, South Australia, West Australia,. 
Queen's Land, New South Wales, Victoria, and Alexan- 
dra Land. 

215. About four-fifths as large as the United States. 

216. Near the coast are mountain ranges. The central 
regions have never been explored, but are supposed to 
consist of a low, barren plain. The Murray is the only 
river of much importance. 

217. The greater part of them are Europeans and 
their descendants. The natives are a race of negroes,, 
called Papi.ia7is, 

218. Mining and raising wool. 

219. The largest is the kangaroo. The most singular 
one is the platypus, which has the body of an otter, the 
bill of a duck, and lays eggs. 

220. Melbourne, Sydney, Adelaide, and Perth. 

221. It is not. The estimated number of inhabitants, 
is only a million and a half. 

222. It is about one-half as large as England, and is a 
fine agricultural island, inhabited solely by European col- 
onists. 

223. It is situated southeast of Asia. These islands 
are mountainous, and the inhabitants belong to the Malay 
race. 

224. They are but little known. There are no white 
settlements in any of them except New Caledonia. 



GEOGRAPHY. 117 

225. The great number of islands which are scattered 
throughout the wide expanse of the Pacific Ocean. 

226. The San(fwich, Society, Friendly, Marquesas, 
Caroline, and Ladrone. 

227. They are divided into two classes: The mountain- 
ous, which are principally ot volcanic formation, and the 
low islands, which are the work of the coral insect. 

228. Most of the natives belong to the Malay race. 

229. When first discovered, these islands contained 
neither insects or reptiles, and no animal larger than a hog. 

230. Honolulu, on Oahu, one of the Sandwich Islands. 

231. New York, Pennsylvania, New Jersey and Dela- 
ware. 

232. New York contains 47,000 square miles, and 
Pennsylvania 46,000. 

233. New York is somewhat undulating. The Cats- 
kill and Adirondack mountains are in this state. Penn- 
sylvania is quite mountainous : here the Alleghany system 
has attained its greatest breadth. The greater part of 
New Jersey, Delaware, and Maryland is a low and gener- 
ally sandy tract. 

23^. In wealth, population, and commercial import- 
ance, it holds the first rank in the Union. 

235. Rochester has the most extensive flour-mills, and 
Syracuse the greatest salt works in the country. West 
Point is the seat of the United States Military Academy, 
and Saratoga is well-known as a fashionable watering 
place. 

236. It is one of the wealthiest states in the Union. 
Much of its wealth lies in mining and manufacturing; but 
it is also rich in grain and live stock. 

237. The mines of iron and coal far surpass those of 
any other state. Petroleum in large quantities is found in 
the northwestern part. 

238. Pittsburg is the greatest iron manufacturing city 



118 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

and Philadelphia is the greatest manufacturing city in the 
Union. 

239. Chiefly agricultural. They supply New York and 
Philadelphia with vegetables. 

240. Long Branch, Cape May, and Atlantic City. 

241. With the exception of Rhode Island, it is the 
smallest state in the Union. It contains 2,120 square 
miles. 

242. One hundred and sixty-five feet. 

243. Into three divisions: the Greater Antilles, the 
Lesser Antilles, and the Bahamas. 

244. Cuba, Hayti, Jamaica, and Porto Rico. 

245. The chain of islands which extend from Porto 
Rico to South America. 

246. They are low islands of coral formation, and lie 
north of the Greater Antilles. 

247. Cuba and Porto Rico belong to Spain; Jamaica, 
the Bahamas, and most of the Lesser Antilles belong to 
Great Britain; Hayti is independent; and the remaining 
islands are owned by France, Denmark, Holland, and 
Venezuela. 

248. They consist principally of whites, free negroes, 
and slaves. About one-sixth are white. 

249. In Cuba and Porto Rico. 

250. They are mountainous, and are supposed to be 
the remains of a mountain chain, which at some remote 
period, connnected North and South America. 

251. Tropical fruits, sugar, coffee, tobacco, rum, ma- 
hogany, and spices. 

252. Spirits distilled from molasses. 

253. Into two distinct states: the Republic of Domin- 
ica and the Republic of Hayti. 

254. The island once belonged to France and Spain. 
In 1 791, the slaves in the western, or French division, rose 
against their masters, and, after a bloody and cruel war. 



GEOGRAPHY. 119 

succeeded in establishing themselves, first as an empire, 
then as an independent republic. In 1849, ^^^ President 
(Soulouque) proclaimed himself emperor, with the title of 
Faustin I. After a reign of ten years, Soulouque was deposed 
and a republican form of government was again adopted. 
In 182 1, the eastern division revolted from Spain, and form- 
ed a republic. 

255. They are east of the United States and belong to 
Great Britain. There are about 400 of these islands. 
Most of them are so small and barren that they have neither 
name or inhabitants. 

256. Cuba is about the size of Pennsylvania, and Hayti 
is about half as large as Michigan, containing 28,000 
square miles. 

257. Small rocky islands of coral formation. 

258. A chain of rocks lying near the surface of the water. 

259. It is fringed with reefs, and as many of the rocks 
are just below the surface of the water, it becomes danger- 
ous to navigation. 

260. It is the most southern town in the United States, 
and is situated upon an island of coral formation, south- 
west of the main-land of Florida. Its exports are salt and 
sponge. 

261. By solar evaporation. 

262. A soft porous substance, which is found attached to 
rocks below the surface of the water, supposed to be the 
work of marine insects. 

263. It is generally level, there being no mountains in 
the state. In the south, dense marshy thickets, called 
everglades, cover the surface for a distance of 160 miles 
with an average breadth of 60 miles 

264. Cotton, corn, sugar-cane, rice, and tobacco. Trop- 
ical fruits, such as oranges, lemons, figs, pomegranates, 
pineapples, olives, &c., are abundant. 



120 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

265. It is near the southern part of Florida, and is a 
great swamp connected with the everglades. 

266. On account of the numerous reefs, or keys, which 
skirt the shores, and the lowness of the land as it approaches 
the sea. 

267. Louisiana. About one-fifth part of the state is on 
the east side of the river. 

268. On the east side. It is the greatest cotton mart 
in the world, and is about 100 miles from the mouth of the 
Mississippi. It is built round a bend in the river, and there- 
fore is called the "Crescent City." The foundation is arti- 
ficial; having been built on a swamp. It lies below the 
level of the river, but is protected by the Levee, which at 
this place is a continuous quay, 4 miles long and 100 feet 
wide. 

269. It is various. The richest tract in the state is a 
narrow belt of land, from one to two miles wide, on both 
sides of the river, extending from 150 miles above, to too 
miles below New Orleans. This tract is annually inun- 
dated by the spring floods. Only a small part of the state 
is under cultivation. 

270. There are ten: Washington, Idaho, Montana, 
Dakota, Wyoming, Alaska, Utah, Arizona, New Mexico, 
and Indian Territory. 

271. Alaska is a posession of the United States, not or- 
ganized into a territory. The District of Columbia con- 
tains 60 square miles, and is situated on the north bank of 
the Potomac river. It contains the cities of Washington 
and Georgetown, and has a territorial form of government. 

272. It has an area of 577,000 square miles, or more 
than ten times that of Illinois. The climate is cold, and 
with the exception of the southern point, it is untit for 
civilization. In the northern part the coast is low and 
marshy, while in the south it is mountainous. About five 



GEOGRAPHY. 121 

hundred whites, and 70,000 Indians and Esquimaux con- 
stitute the inhabitants. 

273. It may be, for there are extensive forests of pine 
and other timber; valuable deposits of minerals; great 
numbers of fur-bearing animals ; and almost inexhaustible 
fisheries. 

274. Sitka, in the southern part, on Baranoff Island. 

275. Greenland and Iceland. 

276. It has not. The interior and northern parts are 
unknown, and the supposition by some, is, that the island 
is only a projection of an Arctic continent not yet dis- 
covered. 

277. It was named by an Icelandic chief, who, for 
some crime, was obliged to flee from his native land. To 
induce his countrj-men to follow him to Greenland, he 
falsely represented it to be superior in fertility to Iceland. 

278. It is of volcanic formation. Ranges of high, 
rugged mountains border the coast, while the interior is a 
dreary desert of volcanoes, ice-clad mountams, or fields of 
lava. 

279. The Geysers, or boiling springs. About fifty of 
these hot springs occupy an area not exceeding twelve 
acres. Some are so powerful that they throw up water, 
and even large stones, to a great height. 

280. The nearness to Mount Hecla, which is thirty-five 
miles distant, or the volcanic commotion beneath. 

281. It was so called by a Norwegian pirate, who, on 
his first visit, saw a bay filled with ice, which had floated 
there from Greenland. 

282. Lichtenfels and Reikiavik, 

283. About 4,000,000 square miles. 

284. From north to south it is about 5,000 miles, and 
its greatest breadth is about 4,800. 

285. I>arge portions of it have not, as yet, been ex- 
plored. The shores are not indented by deep gulfs or in- 



122 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

lets, which is one of the principal reasons why the interior 
is so little known. The surface is various. There are 
mountain systems; sandy deserts; and elevated plateaus. 
The greater part is in the torrid zone, and, much of the 
country being desert land, it is, as a whole, the hottest and 
dryest grand division of the globe. 

286. Except the northern part and some settlements on 
the coast, the inhabitants are negro tribes, whose religion, 
is Paganism and their condition barbarous. 

287. Morocco, Algiers, Tunis, and Tripoli. 

288. Morocco is an independent empire. Algiers is a 
colony of France. Tunis and Tripoli are subjects of 
Turkey. 

289. It is from 750 to 1,200 miles wide, and 3,000 in 
length. 

290. Cape Colony, Natal, Caffraria, the Trans Vaal 
Republic, Orange Free States, and Zoolu, Bechuna, Nam- 
aqua, and Damara. 

291. Cape Colony and Natal are British colonies. The 
others are in possession of independent tribes. 

292. It is on the western coast of Africa, and is a negro 
republic, with a government modeled after that of the 
United States. Liberia was founded in 182 1, by the 
American Colonization Society, as a place of refuge for 
free blacks and liberated slaves from the United States. 

293. It is situated above Liberia, and was founded for 
the same purpose, in 1787, by the British government. 

294. They differ in different parts. The southern por- 
tion exports corn, wine, wool, hides, horns, ivory, gold, and 
diamonds; the western part, ebony, palm oil, gold dust, 
and ostrich feathers; the northern, fruits, wool, hides, gums, 
indigo, salt, leather, cotton, rice, opium, coffee, and many 
other articles. 

295. It is the largest of the African islands, containing 
240,000 square miles. It is a mountainous country, and 



GEOGRAPHY. 123 

but little known. Part of the inhabitants belong to the 
African and part to the Malay race. 

296. Boise City, Helena, Yankton, Cheyenne, Salt Lake 
City, Prescott, Santa Fe, and Tahlequah. 

297. For their rich gold and silver mines, and the 
natural advantages for grazing and stock-raising. 

298. It has less mountains than Idaho or Montana. 
Much of its surface consists of rolling prairie land, well 
watered, and especially adapted for farming and cattle- 
raising. 

299. This name is given to that part of the great rail- 
road west of the Missouri river. It passes through the 
southern part of Nebraska, up the valley of the Platte 
river, touching the northern boundary line of Colorado, 
and the southern part of Wyoming, through Northern 
Utah and Nevada, and thence through California to the 
Pacific Ocean. 

300. Omaha, Fremont, Columbus, Kearney, Julesburg, 
Cheyenne, Laramie, and Ogden. 

301. It is on the Jordan river, near Great Salt Lake,, 
south of the Union Pacific Railroad, on a branch of that 
road. 

302. It contains the Great Salt Lake and the eastern 
portion of the Great Basin, which is the most desolate 
region in the United States. Rain seldom falls in this 
Basin, but some portions near the rivers and lakes have 
been made fertile by irrigation Gold, silver, iron, salt, 
coal, and other minerals are plentiful. 

303. For grazing. 

304. By tribes of Indians, and large herds of wild 
horses and buffaloes. 

305. Cotton, corn, sugar, tobacco, rice, and tropical 
fruits. Stock-raising is the principal business of the in- 
habitants. 

306. A great portion of the state is much elevated, and 



124 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

therefore free from extremes of heat and cold. Snow is 
seldom seen, but from October to March, the "Northers" 
(violent winds) sweep over the prairies of Texas and plains 
of Mexico. 

307. Maine, New Hampshire, Vermont, New York, 
Michigan, Minnesota, Dakota, Montana, Idaho, Wash- 
ington. 

308. Wisconsin, Illinois, Kentucky, Tennessee, Missis- 
sippi, on the east, and Minnesota, Iowa, Missouri, Ai'kan- 
sas, and most of Louisiana, on the west. 

309. Ohio, Indiana, and Ilhnois, from Kentucky and 
West Virginia. 

310. It is more irregular than that of any other division 
of the earth. Large seas and gulfs penetrate far into the 
interior, affording unequaled advantages for commercial 
intercourse. 

311. It is divided into extensive plains and mountain 
systems. Southern Europe is crossed from west to east 
by a great mountain system, which is continued, in Asia, 
to the Pacific Ocean. Northward from this system ex- 
tends a great plain, which stretches from the Atlantic to 
the Pacific. 

312. Caucasus, Balken, Alps, Cevennes, Pyrenees, and 
Cantabrian. 

313. Russia, Northern Germany, Denmark, Holland, 
Belgium, and a part of France. 

314. It varies in the same latitude. In Eastern Eu- 
rope the winters are excessively cold; while the summers 
are very hot. On the shores of the Atlantic the warm 
ocean current renders the climate mild and moist. 

315. Russia, Austria, Germany, and Turkey are empires ; 
Great Britain, Norway and Sweden, Denmark, Holland, 
Belgium, Spain, Portugal, Italy, and Greece are kingdoms; 
France and Switzerland are republics. 



GEOGRAPHY. 125 

316. Great Britain, Russia, Germany, France, and 
Austria. 

317. Scandinavian, Jutland, Iberian, Italian, Moreaand 
Crimea. 

318. It comprises Sweden and Norway, two distinct 
states, with separate governments, but are united under one 
king. Nearly the whole of Norway and the eastern part 
of Sweden are mountainous. The southeastern part of 
Sweden is a level plain. 

319. Iron, copper, lumber, and hsh. 

320. 1,400 miles. These grains are, rye, oats and barley. 

321. The southern point of Greenland. 

322. It is in that part of Europe north of the Arctic 
Circle, and between the White Sea and Atlantic Ocean. 
It belongs to Russia, Sweden and Norway. 

323. It is, by a tribe of the Mongolian race, called 
Laplanders, who own numerous herds of reindeer, which 
supply them with food, clothing and means of travelling. 

324. It is the largest, in extent, in the world, com- 
prising fully one-half of Europe, and more than one-third 
of Asia. 

325. For the most part it is very level. The only 
mountainous section in European Russia, is between the 
Azov and Caspian seas. 

326. Into four classes: i — The nobles. 2 — The 
clergy. 3 — The merchants. 4 — The lately emancipated 
serfs. 

327. It is an absolute monarchy. The greater part of 
the inhabitants are adherents of the Greek Church. 

328. In its forests (two-fifths of the country is covered 
with forests), and the products of agriculture and grazing. 

329. In Central and Southern Russia. 

330. It is mostly a sterile region, and has the appearance 
of having been subjected to volcanic fires. Salt lakes and 
fire-hills are numerous. 



126 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

331. It is an inland sea, containing 140,000 square 
miles, and below the level of the Mediterranean Sea. 
Several large rivers flow into it, but there is no visible out- 
let. 

332. Large, barren plains in southeastern Russi-a. 
SS3' Poland is that part of Russia lying north of Aus- 
tria. Circassia is the region of the Caucasus mountains. 

334. Near Central Russia, on a branch of the Oka 
river. It is a railroad center, and one of the principal 
cities for trade. It was burned during Napoleon's invasion 
of 181 2, to defeat him, by having no protection for his 
troops in winter. 

335. For the siege which it sustained for one year, 
against the English, French, Turkish, and Sardinian armies. 

3^6. It was one of the strongest Russian fortifications, 
and was a perpetual menace to Turkey. Its destruction 
ended the Crimean war. 

337. The Cossacks are the inhabitants, and are of 
great service to the Russian army as light cavalry. 

;^$S. A great fair is held there every year, which is at- 
tended by thousands of people who come from different 
parts of Europe and Asia to buy and sell goods. 

339. St. Petersburg, Cronstadt, Riga, Archangel, and 
Odessa. 

340. Caspian, Azov, Black, Baltic, White, and Kara; 
Riga, Finland, Bothnia, Onega, and Petchora. 

341. Great Britain, Ireland, and many small adjacent 
islands. 

342. England, Scotland and Wales. 

343. England and Ireland are generally level or undu- 
lating; Scotland and Wales are rugged and mountainous. 

344. It is divided by the Grampian Hills into the High- 
lands and Lowlands. The Highlands lie north, and the 
Lowlands south of the mountains. 



GEOGRAPHY. 127 

345. It is very irregular, and abounds in fine harbors 
and roadsteads. 

346. It is moist and mild. The winters, even of Scot- 
land, are rarely severe. The moisture of the climate and 
low temperature in summer sometimes prevent crops from 
maturing. Corn will not ripen. 

347. In her commerce, manufactures and mining. 

348. She surpasses every other country in the world. 
The principal manufactures are those of cotton, wool, and 
iron. 

349. Europe, 285,000,000; Asia, 790,000,000; Africa, 
188,000,000; North America, 50,500,000; South America, 
24,500,000; Australia, 3,500,000. 

350. Principally from Cornwall (England) and the is- 
land of Banca- The mines of Cornwall have been famous 
from remote antiquity. 

351. Peat, or bog turf, of which there are over 3,000,- 
000 acres. 

352. It has colonies in every quarter of the globe, and 
unites under one sovereign a greater number of people than 
are ruled by any other government. 

353. Gibraltar, in Spain, and the islands of Malta and 
Gozo. 

354. British India, including Ceylon, Hindoostan, a 
part of Farther India, and Singapore ; the island of Hong 
Kong, and the city of Aden. 

355. Sierra Leone, and otner settlements on the 
western coast; Cape Colony and Natal; the islands of 
Sychelle, Mauritius, Ascension, and St. Helena. 

356. Australia, Tasmania, New Zealand, Nbrfolk, 
Labuan, and a part of Borneo. 

357. British America, Bermuda Isianas, Balize, Jamaica, 
Bahama Islands, and many of the Lesser Antilles, British 
Guiana, and the Falkland Islands. 

358. Liverpool, for its great commerce. Its fine dock 



128 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

covers more than 400. acres. Leeds and Bradford, for 
their manufactures of wool; Birmingham, for hardware; 
Limerick, for the manufacture of gloves, laces, and fish- 
hooks; Merthyr Tydvil, for its iron-works. 

359. It is the principal plateau of Europe, the whole 
central part of which consists of a series of lofty plains^ 
divided from each other by parallel mountain chains. This 
plateau comprises 93,000 square miles, or nearly one-half 
of the peninsula. 

360. The vine, olive, mulberry, and orange. Large 
flocks of sheep are raised on the table-lands of the interior. 

361. The 40th parallel. It passes through central 
United States, or New Jersey, Southern Pennsylvania, 
Ohio, Indiana, Illinois, Northern Missouri, Central Ne- 
braska and Kansas, Colorado, Utah, Nevada, and North- 
ern California. 

362. Southern Italy and Turkey. 

363. Turkey, Georgia, Turkistan, Pekin, and the Em- 
pire of Japan. 

364. In the northeastern part of the Spanish Peninsula. 

365. The population is only 5,000 or 6,000, but the 
country has been independent for more than a thousand 
years. 

^66. Cuba, Porto Rico, a part of the Phihppine, La- 
drone, Caroline, and the Canary islands. 

367. Twelve miles in its narrowest place. 

368. It is situated on a mountainous promontory, and is 
the strongest fortification in the world. 

369. It contains 204,000 square miles. 

370. As one of the richest and most powerful. The 
position of the country and the fertility of the soil give it 
great commercial and agricultural advantages. 

371. The eastern portion is mountainous, while tne 
rest belongs to the Great Plain, which extends across the 
continent. 



GEOGRAPHY. 129 

372. They are plains of shifting sands, in the south- 
western part of France. 

373. France exports more wine, brandy, and silk goods 
than any other country. 

374. The influence of fashions. 

375. Algeria, Senegal, Pondicherry, Isle of Bourbon, 
New Caledonia, Marquesas Islands, French Guiana, St. 
Pierre and Miquelon, Martinique, Guadeloupe, and 
Corsica. 

376. In Holland, stock-raising and dairying are the 
chief pursuits. Belgium is an agricultural and manufac- 
turing country; it also has extensive mines of coal andiron. 

377. It is so low that in many places dikes, or em- 
bankments, are necessary to prevent inundations. 

378. By numerous canals. In Holland especially, 
canals run through the principal streets of the towns, and 
and form a complete network over the country. 

379. An arm of the sea, or gulf, which indents the 
northern part of Holland. 

380. The people of Holland. 

381. It is nearly flat; some portions are below the sur- 
tace of the sea, from which it is defended by dykes. 

382. On the eastern coast of the island of Zealand, 
and partly on the adjacent island of Amok. Many of the 
buildings are built above the water. 

383. The kingdoms of Prussia, Bavaria, Wurtemburg, 
and Saxony; six grand duchies; five duchies; seven 
principahties ; three free cities; and the new State of 
Alsace. 

384. Hamburg, Bremen, and Lubeck. 

385. It was formerly a part of France, but since the 
late Franco-Prussian war it was ceded to Germany. 

386. Hamburg and Bremen. 

387. Nearly the whole of Germany is under cultivation, 



130 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

and large crops of wheat, rye, barley, oats, tobacco, beet- 
root, and linseed are produced. 

388. Sandy tracts in Northern Germany and Denmark. 

389. They are of different races. The Germans, 
Hungarians, Italians, and Poles are most numerous. 

390. On eighty-two small islands, separated by 150 
canals crossed by 360 elevated bridges. 

391. An important kingdom of Central Europe, but, 
after suffering many reverses, it was divided between 
Russia, Germany and Austria. 

392. Switzerland. 

393. It is composed of twenty-two states, or cantons. 
It is about one-third as large as the state of New York. 

394. For their love of hberty, and attachment to their 
native country. Most of the population speak the Ger- 
man language. Italian and French are spoken in the 
cantons adjoining Italy and France. 

395. For the manufacture of watches and jewelry. 

396. It was formerly divdded into a number of states, 
but after a protracted struggle, the efforts of the people to 
obtain national unity were successful, and the whole country 
is now united under a liberal and enlightened government. 

397. It was the central part of the Roman Empire, 
which ruled all the known world. 

398. Almost every place is connected with some re- 
markable event, which is renowned in history or art. 

399. It is a small republic, with an independent gov- 
ernment, on the Adriatic Sea. 

400. Italy. 

401. It comprises Turkey in Europe, Asiatic Turkey, 
Isle of Candia, and Egypt. Tripoli and Tunis are nominally 
under the control of the government. 

402. They are a grave and solemn people, — ignorant, 
bigoted, and indolent. Their religion is Mohammedanism. 

403. This country was in advance of all other nations 



GEOGRAPHY. 131 

in civilization and learning. Athens was the birtaplace of 
many renowned philosophers and orators. 

404. It is very irregular, projecting southward, and hav- 
ing many indentations from the sea, one of which, the gulf oi 
Lepanto, nearly separates it, forming the peninsula of 
Morea, which is connected with the mainland by the isthmus 
of Corinth. 

405. St. Petersburg, Stockholm, Copenhagen, Berlin, 
Hague, Brussels, Paris, Madrid, Lisbon, Rome, Vienna. 
Athens, Constantinople, Berne, London, Edinburgh. 

406. The United States. 

407. Hammerfest. 

408. Mexico, Central America, West Indies, and the 
greater part of South America. 

409. Cuba and Porto Rico. 

410. The interior consists of table-lands, from 4,000 to 
9,000 feet high. The Pacific coast is abrupt, and abounds 
in fine harbors; but upon the Gulf of Mexico, it is flat 
and sandy, and deficient in good harbors. 

411. Only by two carriage roads; one by Jalapa, from 
Vera Cruz; the other by Saltillo, from Matamoras and 
Monterey. 

412. As Mexico contains high and lowlands, it exhibits 
a great variety of climate. In ascending from the coast to 
the surface of the plateau, there are three regions: the 
hot, swampy and pestilential lowlands ; the temperate re- 
gions ; and the cold, desolate plains above. 

413. Wliites, Indians, and mixed races. The .l,:dians 
and mixed races form the greater part of the po]!;ulation. 

414. The wet and dry. The rainy season continues 
from May to October, and the dry from October to May. 

415. They vary with climate, \ni.23t and barley are 
produced in the cooler regions, and cotton, tobacco, sugar- 
cane, tropical fruits and spices in the plains and valleys 
below. 



132 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

416. Gold and silver, iron and copper. 

417. It is situated in a plain, 7,000 feet above the level 
of the sea, enclosed by lofty mountains. The city is about 
two miles from Lake Tezcuco ; is in the form of a square, 
and noted for its numerous churches, convents, and 
squares. 

418. Popocatapetl and Iztaccihuatl. The former is 
17,717 feet high, and its name signifies Smoking- ivlountain. 
The latter is 15,600 feet high, and is White Lady. 

419. The cochineal is an insect which feeds on a 
species of cactus. When killed and dried in the sun it 
yields a brilliant crimson dye. Pulque is a favorite Mexi- 
can beverage, manufactured from the Maquey plant. It is 
intoxicating. 

420. In 1 52 1. Fernando Cortez, a Spanish adventurer,, 
conquered the country. He found an extensive kingdom, 
with regular laws, and with cities, temples, public roads^ 
and many of the arts of civilization. After the conquest 
the cruelty of the Spaniards drove the Indians back into- 
a state of barbarism. In 1821 Mexico became independ- 
ent of Spain, and established first an empire, then a re- 
publican form of government. The people are restless,, 
and revolutions have been common. By the war with the 
United States she lost valuable territory. 

421. Yucatan and Old California. These parts are but 
little known. Yucatan is noted for its ruins of ancient 
cities and temples. 

422. Five states: Guatemala, Honduras, San Salvador, 
Nicaragua, and Costa Rica. This country bears a general 
resemblance to Mexico. 

423. Comayagua, San Salvador, Managua, Nicaragua^ 
and San Jose. 

424. It is situated south of the eastern part of Yuca- 
tan. It belongs to the British. 



GEOGRAPHY. 133 

425. Mahogany and other hard cabinet wood, cochi- 
neal, tortoise shells, sarsaparilla and cocoa-nuts. 

426. Across the isthmus of Panama; by way of the 
San Juan river and Lake Nicaragua ; and by the Isthmus 
of Tehuantepec. 

427. About one-fourth as large. 

428. North, temperate and torrid. The Tropic of Can- 
cer in the central part. 

429. In Northern Michigan and Wisconsin. 

430. In southwestern Wisconsin and parts of Illinois 
and Iowa which adjoin. 

431. Cotton, tobacco, rice, sugar, corn, and sweet po- 
tatoes. 

432. Cotton — Alabama. Rice — South Carolina. Sugar — 
Louisiana. Tobacco — Kentucky. Sweet potatoes — 
Georgia. \Mieat — California. Corn — Illinois. 

433. Swine — lUinois. Cattle — Texas. Horses — Illi- 
nois. Mules — Alabama. Sheep — Ohio. 

434. Gold — California. Silver — Nevada. Iron — 
Pennsylvania. Copper — Michigan. Lead — Illinois. Coal — 
Pennsylvania. Lumber — Michigan. Turpentine, etc. — 
North CaroHna. 

435. Turpentine and resin are made of the sap of the 
pitch pine, by boiUng; turpentine is the vapor, while resin, 
like sugar, is what remains. Tar is also made from the 
pitch, but by burning ; the timber having been placed in 
nearly a perpendicular position, and covered to prevent a 
flame, the heat causes the pitch to ooze out and run below 
where it can be saved. 

436. From her pine forests. 

437. On account of the abundance of palmetto trees, 
which grow there, it is often called the Palmetto State. 

438. Corn. 

439. The Atlantic Slope, the Pacific Slope, and the 
Central Plain. 



134 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

440. The country which extends from the Alleghany 
Mountains to the Atlantic Ocean and Gulf of Mexico. 

441. The country between the Rocky Mountains and 
the Pacific Ocean. 

442. The Mississippi Valley, the Texas Slope, the 
basin of the St. Lawrence, and the small valley of the Red 
River of the North. 

443. The St. Lawrence Basin, Atlantic Slope, Missis- 
sippi Valley, Texas Slope, Pacific Slope, inland Basin of 
Utah, and Red river. 

444. It is crossed by a system of mountains, table- 
lands and plains. 

445. They are divided into two classes: Those of 
Central and those of Southern Asia. They are the loftiest 
and most extensive in the world. 

446. Turkistan and Siberia. This is a continuation of 
the great plain of Europe. 

447. It commences with the Taurus Mountains, and is 
continued by the Elborz and Hindoo Koosh to the Balor 
Mountains. From this point it branches off into four 
great chains — the Himalaya, Kuen Lun, Thian Shan, and 
Alti — which are the grandest and most stupendous moun- 
tains upon the globe. 

448. It is near the central part of Asia, south of the 
Thian Shan mountains. This desert is only a part of an 
immense belt of desert land, which extends almost across 
the continent from west to east. 

449. Into three divisions: that of Northern, Central, 
and Southern Asia. 

450. It is characterized by intense cold, with short in- 
tervals of great heat during summer. 

451. It is a great plain, comprising more than one-third 
of Asia. Near the Arctic Ocean, it is a barren and deso- 
late region, and the cold is so intense that the spongy soil 
is frozen to the depth of several hundred feet. Near the 



GEOGRAPHY. 136 

'Irtysh river the soil is rich, and pasturage good, but there 
are few inhabitants. 

452. Central Asia has the climate of the temperate 
zone. It is subject to great extremes of heat and cold, 
and, except near the shores of the Pacific, is remarkably 
dry — for the mountain system intercepts the warm and 
moist winds of the Indian Ocean. Southern Asia has the 
climate of the torrid zone. 

453. Mongolian, Caucasian, and the Malay. 

454. Those nations living north of the Himalaya moun- 
tains, those of ]''arther India, the Japanese, and Turks. 

455. The Georgians, Armenians, Arabs, Persians, 
Afghans, and Hindoos. 

456. The Peninsula of i\Ialacca, and many of the is- 
lands of Oceanica. 

457. Caucasian race, 564,500,000; MongoHan, 535,- 
500,000; Ethiopian, 180,000,000; Malay, 55,000,000; 
American, or Indian race, 15,000,000. Total, 1,350,- 
000,000. 

458. As a place of banishment for exiles and criminals. 
A large portion of the population consists of them and their 
descendants. 

459. It is a Russian province. The people are a vig- 
orous and handsome race. 

460. The name given to the rulers of the several inde- 
pendent states of Turkistan. 

461. China, Thibet, and Chinese Tartary (Corea, Mon- 
golia, Mantchooria, and Soongaria). 

462. So dense is the population in some districts that 
great numbers of the inhabitants dwell constantly upon 
boats in the rivers, or on rafts in the lakes, which they con- 
vert into gardens by covering them with earth. They are 
a very industrious people, but deceitful and very immoral, 
and jealous of Europeans. 



136 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

463. The most important are rice, tea and silk. Rice 
is the chief article of food for the entire population. 

464. A despotic monarchy. The laws are severe; for 
trifling oftences punishment with the bamboo is inflicted, 
while serious crimes almost always meet with death. 

465. Canton, Shanghai, Ningpo, Fuchow, Amoy 

466. Niphon, Sikoke, Kiusui, and Jesso. 

467. Rice, wheat, barley, tea, tobacco, and camphor. 

468. Hindoostan and Farther India. 

469. Into the kmgdoms of Burmah and Siam, the em- 
pire of An am, the interior state of Laos, and that part of 
British India on the east side of the Bay of Bengal. 

470. Calcutta, Pondicherry, Goa, Ava, Bangkok, and 
Hue. 

471. The chief productions are rice and cotton. 

472. A despotic monarchy. The sovereign is called a 
shah. 

473. The greater part is a desert plateau. The princi- 
pal fertile tracts are Oman and Yemen, and the mountain 
valleys. 

474. The greater portion of them are Bedouins, who 
are a wandering people and inhabit the deserts, devoting 
themselves to the care of their camels, horses, goats, and 
sheep. They are generous and hospitable, but quarrel- 
some, revengeful, and addicted to plunder. 

475. Mecca is regarded by the IVIohammedans as a 
holy city, and is annually visited by vast numbers of pilgrims. 
Medina is the burial place of Mohammed. 

476. The southeastern part of Anam. 

477. Arabia, Hindoostan, Farther India, Corea, and 
Kamtschatka. 

478. It connects Malacca with the main land. 

479. Sirikol, the source of the Amoo river, on the 
table-land of Pamer, is 15,600 feet above the level of the 
sea. 



GEOGRAPHY. 137 

480. Behring, 40 miles; Dover, 30; Gibraltar, 12. 

481. Panama, 27 miles; Tehaantepec, 130; Suez, 65. 

482. Australia, Greenland, Borneo, New Guinea, and 
Madagascar. 

483. The Pacific Ocean contains about 82,000,000 
square miles; greatest width 10,000 miles. The Atlantic, 
30,000,000; width 5,000. The Indian 22,000,000, width 
6;Ooo. Antarctic, 12,000,000; and the Arctic 4,000,000. 

484. By Captain Perry, in 1827, 502 miles from the 
pole. By Captain Ross, in 1842, 803 miles from the pole. 

485. London, 3,311,000; Paris, 1,852,000 ; Pekin, 
1,648,000; Canton, 1,000,000. 

486. New York, 942,000; Tientsin, 930,000 ; Vienna, 
834,000; Berlin, 825,000. 

487. New York; Philadelphia — 674,000; Brooklyn — 
396,000; Chicago — 325,000; St. Touis — 320,000. 

488. Coal, iron, salt, lead, and tin. 

489. Mississippi, Missouri, Arkansas, Rio Grande, 
Columbia, Nebraska, and Red. 

490. Of the Chinese Empire, 470,000,000; Japan, 37,- 
000,000; Hindoostan, 200,000,000; United States, 40,- 
000,0000. 

491. It is a little more than one-fourth as large as the 
United States, and contains about 420,000,000 people. 

492. That part of the heavens which appears to meet 
the earth. 

493. For drainage, commerce, and milling. 

494. Philadelphia, Columbus, Indianapolis, Springfield, 
Denver, Pekin, Constantinople, and Madrid. 

495. The boundary line between the states of Missis- 
sippi, Alabama, and Georgia, from Tennessee. 

496. Cape Horn is 53^^ south, and Good Hope about 
32 o. 

497. Commercial cities require good harbors and water 



138 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

communication to faciliate commerce; while manufactur- 
ing cities depend very much upon water power to run their 
machinery. 

498. Lakes of this class lose water by evaporation 
only, and retain the salt and other materials carried into 
them by their affluent rivers. 

499. Cotton, wheat, pork, cheese, machinery. 

500. AVool, tea, coffee and spices, dry-goods, sugar, 
and liquors. 



QUESTIONS 



ON 



Knglish Graminar. 



1. What is English Grammar ? 

2. Into what parts is it divided? 

3. Of what does pronunciation treat? 

4. Define etymolog)-. 

5. Of what does syntax treat? 

6. Ofwhat does prosody treat? 

7. What is the basis of grammar? 

8. Ofwhat does language consist? 

9. What is a part of speech? How many'i' 

10. How are nouns divided? 

1 1. V/hat is a collective noun? 

12. Wliat is an abstract n®un? 

13. What is a participial noun? 

14. When does a proper noun become a common noun?" 

15. When does a common noun become proper^ 

16. What is the office of a pronoun? 

17. What is the antecedent of a pronoun? 

18. Into what classes are pronouns divided? 

19. What is a personal pronoun ? Name them. 

20. Where are tJiou^ thy^ ihitie^ thee and_>'^ used? 

21. In parsing, how are the pronouns ours^ yours ^ hersy 
theirs and mine disposed of ? 

22. What peculiarity about the pronoun it ? 

23. What is a compound personal pronoun ? 



140 THE QUESTION BOOK. 



What is a relative pronoun? 



To what are the relatives who and which applied? 
How is the relative ivhat used? 
When is a3 a relative pronoun? When is thaf} 
What are the compound relative pronouns? 
What is an interrogative pronoun? 
30 What is a responsive, or indirect interrogative 
pronoun ? 

31. What is an adjective pronoun? How many? 

32. To what do distributive pronouns relate? 

Ty2i' What is the difference between the demonstrative 
and indefinite pronouns? 

34. What do the reciprocal pronouns denote? 

35. How should either-^ neither^ each other ^ and one an- 
other be used? 

2^6. How should this and that be used? 

37. What properties have nouns and pronouns? 

38. When are objects personified? 

39. In personified objects when is the masculine gen- 
der preferred? 

40. When is the feminine gender preferred? 

41. WTiatare the methods of distinguishing the two sexes? 

42. When and how are proper nouns made plural? 

43. What class Of nouns is generally used in the singu- 
lar number? How may they be used in the plural? 

44. When is a collective noun singular? When plural? 

45. How are most nouns made plural? 

46. How are most compound words made plural? 

47. How are the titles Mr., Mrs., Miss and Dr. made 
plural ? 

48. How is the plural of foreign nouns formed? 

49. How are foreign words ending in a, us, U7?i or on, is, 
X or ex changed to form the plural? Form the plural of 
the following words : formula, larva, nebula, vertebra, focus, 
radius, sarcophagus, stimulus, phenomenon, datum, analysis, 



GRAMMAR. 141 

synthesis, axis, basis, crisis, emphasis, oasis, parenthesis,, 
thesis. 

50. Ho.w are letters and figures made plural? 

51. How is the editorial we used? 

52. What is case? Name them. 

53. When is a noun or pronoun used in the different 
cases? 

54. When is a noun or pronoun used independently? 

55. How is the possessive case denoted? 

56. How can the possessive case be expressed without 
the apostrophe ? 

57. When are two terms in opposition? When is one 
predicated by the other? In what must these terms agree? 

58. How is a compound term expressed in the posses- 
sive case? 

59. When is a noun or pronoun in the same case as 
another? 

60. In how many cases are compound personal pro- 
nouns used ? 

61. Decline who^ which, what, and that. 

62. When may that have two cases? 

63. What is declension? 

64. How are the articles the, a, and an used? 

65. Why are a and an both called the indefinite arti- 
cles? 

66. When should a be used? 

67. When should an be used? 

68. What is an adjective? 

69. How are the adjectives divided? Define eachclass^ 

70. Into what smaller classes are adjectives divided? 

71. Define a common adjective. • 

72. Define a proper adjective. 

73. What is a participial adjective? 

74. What is a compound adjective? 

75. What is a numeral adjective? 



142 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

76. How are the numeral adjectives divided? Define 
them. 

77. What is a pronominal adjective? 

78. Into what classes are the pronominals divided? 

79. What is comparison? How many degrees? 

80. Detine the positive degree. Comparative. Super- 
lative. 

81. What parts of speech have comparison? 

82. How are degrees below the positive expressed. 

8;^. When should more or 7nos/ in comparison be pre- 
ferred ? 

84. Must adjectives always agree with their substan- 
tives in number? 

85. When does an adjective become a noun? 

86. What is a verb? A regular verb? An irregular 
verb ? 

87. What are the principal parts of a verb? 

88. Why are these called the principal parts? 

89. What is a redundant verb? A defective verb? A 
finite verb? 

90. What jjarts of a verb are not finite? 

91. What is a transitive verb? An intransitive verb? 

92. When may a transitive verb become intransitive? 

93. When ma}' an intransitive verb become transitive? 

94. What is a neuter verb? 

95. What is a principal verb? An auxiliary verb? 

96. What properties have verbs? 

97. Define voice, mode, tense. 

98. What are the person and number of a verb? 

99. When is a verb in the active or passive voice? 

100. How is a verb in the active voice changed into 
the passive? 

loi. To what verbs does voice belong? 

102. How many modes are there? 



GRAMMAR. 143 

103. "VVliat does a verb in the indicative mode express? 
In the subjunctive? In the potential? In the imperative? 

104. How many tenses in each of the modes? 

105. What are the signs of the tenses? 

106. What are the forms of a tense? 

107. How is the emphatic form of a verb expressed? 
loS. How is the passive form expressed? The pro- 
gressive? 

109. What is the ancient form? 

no. How is a proposition made interrogative? How 
made negative? 

III. When the subject consists of words differing in 
how is the form of the verb or pronoun deter- 

What is an impersonal verb? 
What properties have auxiliary verbs? 
Which are auxiliary verbs? 
Which are sometimes principal verbs? 
When is it proper to use shall and should "i 
When is it proper to use ivill and would'i 
When are do^ be and have principal verbs? 
What is an infinitive? How many? 
How is the present infinitive formed, and what 
does it denote? 

121. How is the perfect infinitive formed, and what 
does it denote? 

122. WTien is to, the sign of the infinitive, omitted? 

123. What is a participle ? How many? 

124. Howis the present participle formed? What does 
it represent? 

125. How is the perfect participle formed? What does 
it represent? 

126. "What voice have participles? 

127. What is a compound participle? 



person. 


mined ? 


112. 


ii3- 


114. 


115- 


116. 


117. 


118. 


119. 


120. 



144 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

128. What do bei?ig, having and hazing beefi express in 
relation to participles? 

129. What are some of the chief particulars in which 
participles and infinitives agree? Some in which they 
differ? 

130. What is the conjugation of a verb? 

131. What is the synopsis of a verb? 

132. What forms of a verb are called composite? 

a. Conjugate lie, to repose; lie, to speak falsely; dare,. 
to venture ; bear, to carry. 

b. Give the principal parts of the following verbs: 
drink, lay, rose, build, eat, sow, dive, gone, set, sit, get, bid, 
dig, slay, thrust, was. 

c. Give the synopsis of the verb eat, in the third per- 
son, singular number, indicative mode, passive voice. 

d. Give a synopsis of the verb ric7i, in the first per- 
son, singular number, interrogative form, in the indicative 
and potential modes. 

133. What is an adverb? How are most of them 
formed ? 

134. What is a conju-nctive adverb? 

135. Into what classes are adverbs divided? 

136. What is the difference in the use of an adjective 
and adverb? 

a. Classify the following adverbs: Now, much, 
more, so, well, here, whither, everywhere, to-morrow, for- 
ever, daily, enough, nearly, yesterday, aloud, hither, whence 
forth, away, often, little, yet, too, nevertheless, together, 
to-day. yonder, out, somewhat. 

137. How can we ascertain to what class adverbs be- 
long? 

138. What is a preposition? An adjunct? To what 
does an adjunct relate? 

139. What may a ^.ubstantive, governed by a preposi- 
tion, be? 



GRAMMAR. 145 

140. When does a preposition become an adverb? 

141. What is a conjunction? Correlative connective? 

142. What is the difference between analysis and 
synthesis? 

143. What is parsing? 

144. What is relation? Agreement? Government? 

145. What is a sentence? Clause? Proposition? 
Phrase? 

146. What is a declaratory sentence? Interrogatory? 
Imperative? Exclamatory? 

147. What is a simple sentence? Compound? Com- 
plex? 

148. What is the subject and predicate of a sentence? 

149. What is the logical and grammatical subject and 
predicate of a sentence? 

150. What is discourse? Of what may it treat? 

151. What is aparagrajjh? 

152. What is analysis based upon? 

153. WTiat are elements of sentences? 

154. What must every proposition have? 

155. What is a modifier? How many kinds? 

156. By what may a noun and pronoun be modified? 

157. By what may a verb be modified? 

158. WTien an infinitive or participle is used as a noun? 
What modifiers do they take? 

159. WTiat parts of speech are never modified? 

160. What kinds of words are connectives? 

161. In the analysis of phrases, what forms are given? 

162. What part of a sentence is considered the most 
important ? 

163. When may a subordinate element occupy the chief 
place? 

164. What is a period in grammar? 

165. In what do all the errors of language consist? 

166. What is a figure in. grammar? 
10 



146 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

167. What is aphoeresis? Syncope? Apocope? Pros- 
thesis? Paragoge? Tmesis? 

168. What is eUipsis? Aposiopesis? Zengaia? Ple- 
onasm? 

169. What is a simile? Metaphor? Allegory? Synec- 
doche? 

170. Wliat is antithesis? Irony? Paralipsis? Hyper- 
bole? 

171. What is euphemism? Interrogation ? Exclamation ? 

172. What is versification? Verse? 

173. What is rhyme? Blank verse? 

174. What is a couplet? Stanza? 



ANSWERS 



TO 



Questions on English Grranmiar. 



1. The science of speaking and writing the English 
language correctly. 

2. Pronunciation, orthography, etymology, syntax and 
prosody. 

3. Of the sounds of letters and syllables. 

4. It treats of the different parts of speech, their deri- 
vation and modification. 

5. Of the arrangement and relation of words in sentences. 

6. Of versification, punctuation, figures and utterance. 

7. The usage of the best authors. 

8. Of sounds, which, combined, form words which rep- 
resent ideas. 

9. Classes of words, differing according to their usage 
and meaning. 

10. Into pi-oper and common; and the common are 
divided into collective, abstract and verbal. 

11. One that denotes a collection. 

12. The ^ame of some quality of a substance. 

13. A participle or infinitive used as a noun. 

14. When it is used to denote a whole class; as, "The 
Washi?tgtons of the world are few. " 

15 When personified, or used as a proper noun. 
16. To avoid the repetition of nouns. 



148 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

1 7. The word, phrase, or clause, which the pronoun rep- 
resents. 

18. Personal, relative, interrogative and adjective. 

19. One which distinguishes the persons. /, thou or 
you, he, she and it, with their compounds and declined 
forms, are the personal pronouns. 

20. In the Bible and addresses to the Deity, and fre- 
quently, in poetry. 

21. As these words are equivalent to a noun and pro- 
noun, the parsing should correspond with the words which 
they represent. 

22. The antecedent of z'/is sometimes considered lost, 
when the pronoun denotes merely the state or condition of 
things, or a point of time, or when it introduces a sentence 
and is explained : as. It rains. It is twelve o'clock. It was 
moonlight. It is mean to take advantage of another's dis- 
tress. Some authors consider it in the above examples as 
having no antecedent, yet, if we observe closely there may 
be one somewhat remote; as, in the first example, we might 
use clouds for the antecedent; in the second example, timc^^ 
in the third, night; and in the last example we might use 
actioT the antecedent: as, the act is mean, &c. 

23. My, thy, your, him, her, or //, compounded with 
self to form the singular; and our, your, and them, com- 
pounded with selves to form the plural. 

24. A pronoun that joins a descriptive clause to its an- 
tecedent. 

25. \VJio is applied to persons only; which to persons 
or things. 

26. What is used in place of that which or ihirigs whichy 
and may denote persons or things. 

Note — This idea, of forming an antecedent for it, has been given 
to provoke discussion and impress the mind with the peculiarity of this 
pronoun. 



GRAMMAR. 149 

27. Wlien preceded by such, many, ox same, and relates 
to the objects thus specified, thai is a relative pronoun, 
when it is equivalent to who, whom or which. 

28. Who, which, and what, with ever and soever 
annexed. 

29. One used to ask a question. 

30. One used indirectly as an interrogative; as, "Tell 
me what truth is. " 

31. An adjective that is sometimes used as a pronoun. 
They are divided into four classes: distributive, demonstra- 
tive, indefinite, and reciprocal. 

32. They relate to objects taken singly, and are each, 
either, and ?ieither. 

-^T^. The demonstrative pronouns point out objects 
definitely, while the indefinite relate to objects indefinitely. 
The demonstratives are this, these, that, those, same, former, 
latter. The indefinites are ofie, ones, other, others, any, 
some, such, all, both, and none. 

34. The same signification, and consequently are con- 
vertible, and may be used for each other. 

35. In speaking of two, either, neither, and each other 
should be used ; but in speaking of more than two, one an- 
other. ' 

36. That shoula be applied to the more distant, the first 
mentioned, or the absent; this, to the nearer, the last 
mentioned or the present. 

37. Gender, person, number, and case. 

iZ. When they are regarded as persons. Nouns thus 
used have gender "by personification. 

39. When the character of the object denotes size, 
power, or domineering quaUties; as, "The Sicn seemed 
shorn of his beams." "Lo, steel-clad ?^^r his gorgeous 
standard rears. " 

40. When the character of the object is noted for 
beauty, amiability, productiveness, or submission; as, 



150 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

"Soon Peace shall come with all her smiling train." The 
earth, moon, and ship, when personified, are given the 
feminine gender. 

41. By different words, different endings, and by a dis- 
tinguishing word; as, father, mother; emperor, empress; 
man-'i>tx\z.r\X, maid-servsint 

42. When they refer to a class of the same character,, 
they are made plural by adding s when it does not coalesce 
in sound, otherwise es; as, the Cherokees; the Napoleons; 
the twelve Caesars. 

43. The names of substances, actions, states, quaUties, 
arts, sciences, and diseases, when they refer to the kind of 
thing; but when different kinds are meant they are plural; 
as, rinne, wines; tea, teas; fever, fevers; religion, religions. 

44. When the whole collection is regarded as one 
thing, it is singular, but plural when different collections 
are meant, or when it refers to the individuals composing 
the collection ; as, army, armies; congregation, congregatiofis; 
most people are eager to succeed. 

45. By adding s to the singular; but those ending in i, 
0, u, y, and preceded by a consonant, and s, x, z, sh, and 
soft ch, add es. 

46. By making plural that part described by the rest; 
as, mouse-trapi", cup-fulU. 

47. Mr., Dr. and Miss are made plural by annexations; 
as, Messrs., Drs., Misses. When the title is Mrs., or when 
a numeral stands before the title, the noun is made plural; 
as, the Mrs. Browns, the two Miss Smiths. 

48. Most of them retain their foreign plural when used 
in the English language. 

49. When the ending is a, it is changed to ce or ata, us 
is changed to i, um or 07i to a, is to es or ides, x or ex to 
ces or ices. 

50. By annexing 's. 

51. To represent one person. 



GRAMMAR. 151 

52. The property of nouns and pronouns which shows 
their relation to other words. They are nominative, 
possessive, and objective. 

53. In the nominative when it is the subject of a verb; 
in the objective when it is the object of a verb or preposi- 
tion ; and in the possessive when il denotes possession. 

54. By direct address. ''John^ your father is here.'* 
By exclamation, "Alas, poor Yorick !'' By pleonasm or 
specification, ''He that hath ears, let him hear. " 

55. By adding the apostrophe and j-, except when the 
word ends in s, when the apostrophe only is added. 

56. By using of, or by making the possessive word an 
adjective. "The death of Socrates," "Soldiers' Home." 

57. ^Vhen a verb joins the terms, one is predicated of 
of the other: as, "He is president;" but when no verb joins 
them, the latter term is in apposition ^vith the former; as, 
"Webster, the orator." These terms must agree in case. 

58. It takes the possessive sign but once ; generally at 
the end, or next to the name of what is owned. The couri- 
martiaVs decision. Da?iiel Webster's oration. 

5Q. When it denotes the same person or thing. 

60. Only in the nominative and objective cases, and 
then they retain the same form. 

61. Nominative who, possessive whose, 6b]QCt\vQW horn; 
which and what have the same form in the nominative 
and objective, but borrow whose for their possessive. That 
is not declined. 

62. When it is a relative, and equivalent to that which. 

63. A regular arrangement of the grammatical properties 
of a noun or pronoun. 

64. The is used to point out a particular one, object or 
class; while a or an is used to show that no particular one 
of a class is meant. 

65. They have the same meaning, therefore used in the 



152 THE QUESTION BOOK.. 

same class. One is a later and the other an earlier form of 
the same word. 

66. Whenever the next word begins with a consonant 
sound. 

67. Whenever the next word begins with a vowel sound. 

68. A word used to qualify or limit the meaning of a 
noun or pronoun. 

69. Into two chief classes : descriptive and definitive. 
The descriptive describes or qualifies; the definitive speci- 
fies or limits. 

70. Into common, proper, numeral, pronominal, par- 
ticipial, and compound. 

71. The common adjective expresses quality. 

72. A proper adjective is derived from a proper name. 

73. A participle used as an adjective. 

74. A compound word used as an adjective. 

75. One that expresses number. 

76. Into cardinal, ordinal, multiplicative, and indefinite. 
The cardinals are 07ie, two, etc. ; the ordinals, Jirsf, second, 
etc. ; the multiplicative, single, double; the indefinite, few, 
many. 

77. One sometimes used as a pronoun. 

78. The distributive, demonstrative, and indefinite. 

79. A variation in the form of adjectives and adverbs 
to denote the difterent degrees of meaning. There are 
three degrees : positive, comparative, and superlative. 

80. The positive expresses the quality of the adjective; 
the comparative expresses the quality in a higher or lower 
degree; the superlative expresses the quality in the highest 
or lowest degree. 

81. Adjectives, and adverbs. 

82. Usually by adding less and least. 

83. Usually with adjectives of more than two syllables, 
or those of two syllables that do not end in le or y. 



GRAMMAR. 153 

84. Yes: although the substantive is not always ex- 
pressed. 

85. When it is used abstractly, or in place of a noun of 
which it expresses quality; as, the briny deep, the good. 

%(). A word used to state the act or state of the subject. 
A regular verb is one that forms its past tense by adding 
€d; an irregular verb does not add ed, 

87 The present tense, past tense, present participial, 
and perfect participial. 

88. By the means of these and the auxiliary verbs all 
the other parts of the verb can be formed. 

89. A redundant verb is one that has more than one 
form for some of its principal parts. A defective verb is 
wanting in some of its principal parts. A finite verb pred- 
icates the act or state of its subject. 

90. The infinitives and participles. 

91. One that has or requires an object. An intransitive 
does not have or require an object. 

92. WTien it is the chief design to set forth the act, and 
leave the object unknown. She reads well. 

93. In poetical expressions, in a causitive sense, and in 
idiomatic expressions; as, to viarch armies, I laughed myself 
hoarse. 

94. One that does not express action or state. 

95. A principal verb expresses the chief act or state. 
An auxiliary verb helps other verbs to express their gram- 
matical properties. 

96. Voice, mode, tense, person and number. 

97. Voice shows whether the subject does or receives 
the act. Mode is manner of assertion. Tense expresses 
time. 

98. The form of the verb to agree with the subject. 

99. In the active, when the subject acts, in the passive 
when it receives the act. 

100. By using the object of a verb for the subject. 



154 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

10 1. To transitive verbs only. 

102. Four: indicative, subjunctive, potential, and im- 
perative. Some grammarians add the infinitive mode? 

103. The indicative indicates or declares a fact. The 
potential expresses power, possibility, liberty, inclination, 
duty, and necessity. The subjunctive expresses a wish, 
an uncertainty, or future contingency. The imperative 
commands, or entreats. 

104. Six in the indicative ; three in the subjunctive — 
the present, past, and past-perfect; the potential, four — 
the present, present-perfect, past, and past-perfect; the 
imperative, one — the present tense. 

105. In the indicative mode have is the sign of the 
present-perfect tense; had the sign of the past-perfect; 
shall or will^ of the future ; shall have or will have, of the 
future perfect; the present or past tense is a verb in its 
simplest form, expressing present or past time. The 
signs of the present potential are 7nay, ca7t, ?tmst; of the 
present-perfect, may have, can have, must have; of the 
past, might, could, would, should; of the past-perfect, might 
have, could have, would have, should have. The three 
tenses of the subjunctive mode are the same in form as the 
indicative, except in the singular number of the present 
and past tense, which takes the plural form without varia- 
tion. The imperative has the same form as the present in- 
dicative. 

106. The different ways in which it can be expressed; 
as the common form, the emphatic, the progressive, the 
passive, and solemn. 

107. It denotes emphasis and is expressed by do 01 did,. 
as a part of the verb. 

108. By combining the verb be, or some of its varia- 
tions, with the perfect participle. The progressive form 
represents the continuation of the act or state, and is 



GRAMMAR. 155 

foimed by combining the verb be, or some of its variations, 
with the present participle. 

109. The old common form that is still used in the 
solemn style. It uses thou ot ye and has the ending /, st or 
est {ox the second person singular; th or eth for the third 
person singular. 

no. By placing the verb, or part of it, before the nom- 
inative. It is made negative by placing not after the verb, 
or after the first auxiliary. 

HI. The first person is preferred to the second, and 
the second to the third. You, John, and I, are attached to 
otir country. If the nominatives are taken separately, or 
connected by or or twr^ the verb prefers the nominative 
next to it. He or I am to blame. 

112. A verb having person and number without a sub- 
ject; as methinks^ meseems. 

113. Voice, mode, tense, person, and number. 

114. Be and its variations — do^ did; ca?t, could; have 
had; may, might; must; shall^ should; 7aill Siud would. 

115. Be^ or am^ zuas, do, and have. 

"V 1^6. When required to express a duty, command, de- 
termination, resolve; and in future propositions when the 
subject is of the first person and no reference is made to 
the will of the subject. 

117. WTien the expression is of willingness, inclination, 
or in future propositions when the subject is of the 
second or third person, and no compulsion required. 

1 1 8. When not combined with any other verb expressed 
or understood. 

119. The form of the verb generally preceded by to^ 
expressing an act or state without predicating it. There 
are two infinitives — \\\^ present Siwd perfect. 

120. By combining to with the simplest form of the 
verb, or to be with a simple participle. 

121. By combining io have, or to have been, with a. 



156 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

simple participial. It represents the completion of the 
act or state at the time referred to. 

12 2. When the infinitive is combined with an auxiliary 
or after the active verbs bid^ dare, let, make, need, see, hear, 
feel, and sometimes after Jiave, help, please, and find. 

123. A word derived from a verb, participating in the 
properties of a verb and adjective, and is generally formed 
by adding ing, dor ed to the verb. There are two partici- 
ples — the present and perfect. 

124. By annexing ing to the simplest form of the verb, 
and represents the act or state as present and continuing 
at the time referred to. 

125. By annexing ed to to the simplest form of the 
verb, and it represents the act or state as completed at the 
time referred to. 

126. The simple present participle of a transitive verb 
is nearly always in the active voice. The simple perfect 
participle of a transitive verb is either active or passive \ 
it is in the active voice when have or any of its forms is 
combined with it; in the passive voice when it stands by 
itself, or when he in any of its forms is combined with it. 

127. Being, having, or having been, combined with some 
other participle. 

1 28. Being expresses the present passive participle; 
having expresses the perfect active participle ; having been 
the perfect passive participle. 

129. The recent acknowledged construction of infinitives 
and participles, has made it necessary to give special notice 
of these parts of speech in a separate department, which will 
be found under the head of "Participles and Infinitives Made 
Easy." This department should be carefully studied, as it is 
a deviation from many of our past standard authors on 
grammar. 

130. The regular arrangement of the modes, tenses, 
persons and numbers, and participles of verbs. 



GRAMMAR. 157 

131. An outline of its parts through the modes and 
tenses, in a single person and number. 

132. Those which consist of auxiliaries combined with 
participles or infinitives. 

133. A word used to modify the meaning of a verb, 
adjective, or other adverb. The most of them are formed 
from adjectives by adding ly. 

134. A word used to perform the office of a conjunc- 
tion and adverb at the same time. 

135. Into adverbs of time, place, degree and manner. 

136. An adverb expresses manner, or describes the act; 
an adjective describes the object. 

137. Adverbs of time answer to the question when ? 
Hoiv long ? How often ? Adverbs of place answer to the 
question: Where? W7ience? Adverbs of degree answer 
to the questions: How much? To zvhat extejti? In what 
degree? Adverbs of manner answer to the question: 
How ? 

138. A word used to show the relation between a fol- 
lowing noun or pronoun and some other word. An ad- 
junct is a preposition with its object and modifiers, and 
may relate to a substantive, verb, adjective, or adverb. 

139. A noun, pronoun, infinitive, participle noun, and 
a clause. 

140. When there is no word to govern; as, The eagle 
flew up, then around, then dotvn again. 

141. A word used to connect words, phrases, or propo- 
sitions. A correlative connective is one of a separated 
pair that connect the same parts. Neither this nor that. 

142. Analysis is the resolving of the whole into its 
parts. Synthesis is the combining of the parts to form the 
whole. 

143. The resolving of a sentence into its parts, giving 
their properties and syntax. 

144. The relation of words is their relation or connec- 



158 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

tion with one another; agreement is their similarity in per- 
son, number, gender, case, etc. ; government is the power 
one word has over another. 

145. A sentence is an assemblage of words making 
complete sense; a clause is a proposition that makes but 
part of a sentence; a proposition is a subject combined 
with its predicate ; a phrase is two or more words, but not 
an entire proposition. 

146. The declaratory expresses a declaration; the in- 
terrogatory asks a question; the imperative expresses a 
command or entreaty; the exclamatory expresses an excla- 
mation. 

147. A simple sentence has but one proposition; a 
compound has two or more propositions ; a complex has 
one principal clause, with one or more dependent clauses. 

148. The subject is that of which something is said; 
the predicate is that which denotes what is said of the 
subject. 

149. The grammatical subject and predicate are the 
subject and predicate words; the logical subject and predi- 
cate are these words with all their modifiers. 

150. A train of thought expressed in language, and 
may be description, narration, science or philosophy. 

151. A sentence or combination of sentences, com- 
pleting a train of thought, and distinguished by a new be- 
ginning. 

152. Three relations: the predicate relation, the ad- 
jective relation, and the adverbial relation. 

153. Words, phrases, and clauses. 
454. A subject and predicate. 

155. A dependent word, phrase or clause, used to 
limit or vary the meaning of some other word or expression, 
and may be an adjective or adverbial modifier. 

156. By an article, adjective, a possessive, an oppo- 
sitive, a participle, an infinitive, phrases, and clauses. 



GRAMMAR. 159 

157. By an object, a predicate adjective, an adverb, a 
participle, an infinitive, phrases and clauses. 

158. They both take the modifiers of a verb and 
noun. 

159. Articles, prepositions, conjunctions, and interjec- 
tions. 

160. Conjunctions, prepositions, relative pronouns, 
responsive pronouns, and the conjunctive adverbs. 

161. Simple, complex, compound, mixed, and prepo- 
sitional. 

162. The beginning; the next most important is the end. 

163. When it is uppermost in the speakers mind, or 
denotes what is most striking. " Otitfleiv millions of flaming 
words. " '^ By these we acquired our liberty. " 

164. A sentence so construed that the meaning is sus- 
pended till the close. 

165. In the improper arrangement of words, in the use 
of improper words, in the omission of words, and the use of 
unnecessary words. 

166. A deviation from the ordinary form, construction 
or application of words, for the sake of brevity, force, or 
beauty. 

167. The shortening of a word by taking a letter or 
syllable from the beginning; as, 'gainst, there's. Syncope 
is the shortening of a word by taking a letter or syllable 
from the middle; as, red'ning for reddening. Apocope is 
the shortening of a word by taking a letter or a syllable 
from the end; as, th' for the. Prosthesis is the lengthening 
of a word by prefixing a syllable. Paragoge is the length- 
ening of a word by annexing a syllable. Tmesis is the in- 
serting of a word between the parts of a compound ; as, on 
which side soever. 

168. Ellipsis is the omission of words, and elision the 
omission of letters Aposiopesis the leaving of something 
unsaid. Zengma is the referring of a word to two different 



160 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

ones, when in strict syntax it can agree with only one of 
them. Pleonasm is the using of more words than the sense 
or syntax absolutely requires 

169. A comparison expressed. A metaphor is a com- 
parison implied. "Life is an ij-//z;;^//j- between two eterni- 
ties. " An allegory is a fictitious story about one thing, 
which is designed to teach some moral or practical wisdom 
about another. Synecdoche is the name of a part applied 
to the whole, or that of the whole applied to a part. 

170. A contrast : " Virtue ennobles, vice debases." Irony is 
the sneering use of words with a contrary meaning. Paralipsis 
is the pretented omission or concealment of what is meant. 
" I will not call him a villain, for it would be unparliamen- 
tary. " Hyperbole is exaggeration. 

171. A softened mode of speech for what would be 
disagreeable or offensive if told in the plainest language. 
An appeal in the form of a question to strengthen a state- 
ment. An abrupt mode of speech, designed to express 
more strongly the emotions of the speaker. 

172. The art of making verse. Verse is the musical 
arrangement of words, according to some regular accent. 

173. The similarity of sounds between the endings of 
poetic lines. Blank verse is verse without rhyme. 

1 74. Two poetic lines that usually rhyme together. A 
stanza is a regular division of the poem, and consists of 
three or more poetic lines with complete rhymes. 



QUESTIONS 



ON 



Written Arithmetic 



What is mathematics? 



2. WTiat is quantity? 

3. What is a unit? 

4. What is a number? A power of a number? Root? 

5. What is an integer? 

6. What is an abstract number? Concrete number? 

7. What is a sign? What is the sign of aggregation? 

8. WTiat is a rule ? Problem ? Axiom ? 

9. \Miat is analysis in arithmetic? 

10. What is notation? Numeration? 

11. How many systems of notation in general use? 

12. Upon what is the Roman notation founded? 

13. What is the difference between the simple and local 
value of a figure? 

14. WTiat are the fundamental principles of arithmetic? 

15. What is the minuend? Subtrahend? 
J 6. \Miat is a composite number? 

17. Whas are the component factors of a number? 

18. What is the first power of a number? Second? 
Third? 

19. What is the reciprocal of a number? 

20. How find the true remainder by dividing by factors? 

21. What is a prime number? When are numbers 

prime to each other? 
11 



162 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

22. WTiat is a common divisor? The greatest common, 
divisor? 

23. What is a multiple? Common multiple? Least 
common multiple? 

24. What are fractions? 

25. What is the value of a fraction? 

'26. What does the numerator show? The denomin- 
ator? 

27. "What is a proper fraction? Improper? Mixed? 
Complex? 

2S. Why invert the divisor in division of fractions? 

29. How find the greatest common divisor of fractions? 

30. How find the least common multiple of fractions? 

31. What are decimal fractions? 

32. How find the product of two decimals by a con- 
tracted multiplication? 

^^. How find the quotient of one decimal divided by 
another by a contracted division? 

34. "WTiat are circulating decimals? 

35. What isarepetend? 

2,6. What are continued fractions? 

37. What is the difterence between decimal fractions 
and common fractions? 

^S. What is currency ? 

39. From what was the sign $ derived? 

40. WTiat is an aliquot part of a number? 

41. What is a bill? 

42. What is a compound number? 

43. What is a measure? How divided? 

44. How many dimensions have extension? A line? 
Surface? A solid? 

45. What is a scale? 

46. What is weight? 

47. Describe the Gunter's chain. 



WRITTEN ARITHMETIC. 



163 



48. Wliat is the difterence between a pound Troy and 
a pound Avoirdupois? 

49. What is linear measure? 

50. What is a square? A cube? 

51. How many inches in a wine gallon? In a beer 
gallon? In a bushel? 

52. What are duodecimals? 

53. What is percentage? What is its base? 

54. WTiat do the words per cent, mean? 

55. What is commission? Brokerage? 

56. What is a commission merchant? 

57. What is a consignee? Consignor? 

58. WTiat is a company? Corporation? 

59. What is a share? Stock? Stockholder? 

60. What 15 the difference between a charter and a firm? 

61. When is stock at par? When below par? 

62. What is profit and loss? 

(y^. How find the gain or loss per cent when the cost 
and selling price are given? 

64. How find the selling price when the cost and gain 
or loss per cent, are given? 

65. How find the cost when the selling price and the 
gain or loss per cent, are given ? 

66. What is an installment? Assessment? Dividend? 

67. W^hat is insurance? A policy? A premium? 

68. What is a tax? Poll tax? Assessor? 

69. What is an inventory? 

70. What is general average? Jetson? 

71. What are duties or customs? What is a custom- 
house? 

72. What is smuggling? 

73. How many kinds of duties? Define them. 

74. What is interest? Usury? 

75. The time, rate per cent., and interest being given, 
how find the principal? 



164 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

76. The time, rate per cent., and amount being given^ 
how find the principal? 

7*7. The prmcipal, time, and interest being given, how 
find the rate per cent. ? 

78. The principal, interest, and rate per cent, being 
given, how find the time? 

79. What is a partial payment? Indorsement? 

80. What is discount? Present worth of a debt? 
How find it? 

81. \\Tiat is a bank? Bank discount? Days of grace? 

82. What is a promissory note? Bank note? Nego- 
tiable note ? 

83. What is a notary-public? A protest? 

84. What is exchange? How many kinds? 

85. What is domestic exchange? Foreign exchange? 

86. What is a set of exchange? Course of Exchange? 

87. What is equation of payments? 

88. What is equated time? 

89. What is the focal date? 

90. What is partnership? Partners? 

91. What is ratio? Define each kind? 

92. What is the antecedent? Consequent? 

93. Wh^t is direct ratio? Inverse or reciprocal? 

94. What is proportion? 

95. Which are the extremes? The means? 

96. Of what does allegation treat? 

97. How many kinds of allegation? Define each^ 

98. What is involution? Evolution? 

99. What is a surd? 

100. What is the square root of a number? 
loi. What is the cube root of a number? 

102. What is arithmetical progression? 

103. What is geometrical progression? 



ANSWERS 

TO 

Questions on Written Arithmetic. 



1. The science of quantity. 

2. Anything that can be increased, diminished or 
measured. 

3. One, or a single thing. 

4. A unit or a collection of units. The power of a 
number is the product produced by repeating a number 
any number of times as a factor. A root is a factor re- 
peated to produce power. 

5. A whole number. 

6. An abstract number is one used without reference 
to any particular thing. A concrete number is one that 
has reference to a particular thing. 

7. A character indicating an operation to be performed. 
The sign of aggregation is a parenthesis, or bar, which 
shows that the numbers enclosed by it are to be considered 
together subject to the same operation. 

8. A rule is a prescribed method of performing an 
operation. A problem is something to be done. An ax- 
iom is any truth that is self-evident. 

9. The process of investigating principles, and solving 
problems, independently of set rules. 

10. Notation is a method of writing or expressing num- 
bers by characters. Numeration is a metiiod of reading 
numbers expressed by characters. 

1 1. Two : the Roman anu Arabic. 



16b THE QUESTION BOOK. 

12. Upon five principles: first, repeating a letter re- 
peats its value ; second, if a letter of any value is placed 
after one of greater value, it is added to the greater; third, 
if a letter of any value is placed before a greater, it is to 
be taken from :he greater; fourth, if a letter of any value is 
placed between letters of higher value, it is to be taken 
from their united values; fifth, if a bar or dash is placed 
over a letter, it increases its value a thousand-fold. 

13. The simple value of a figure is its value when taken 
alone, while the local value depends upon the place it oc- 
cupies with other figures. 

14. Notation and numeration, addition, subtraction, 
multiplication, and division. 

15. The minuend is the number to be subtracted from. 
The subtrahend is the number which is subtracted. 

16. One that can be produced by multiplying two or 
more numbers together. 

1 7. The several numbers, which, being multiplied to- 
gether, produce the number. 

18. The number itself, or the root. The second power, 
or square, is the number multipHed by itself. The third 
power, or cube, of a number, is the product arising from 
using the number three times as a factor. 

19. It is I divided by that number. 

20. Multiply each partial remainder except the first, 
by all the preceding divisors, and add these products to the 
first remainder. It will be noticed that after the first divis- 
ion, the remamder cannot be of the same denomination as 
the first number divided; and as- each succeeding division 
increases the value of the remainders, therefore each re- 
mainder must be niultiplied by all the preceding divisors to 
reduce it to its former denomination. 

21. One that cannot be resolved into factors. Num- 
bers are prime to each other when they have no common 
divisor. , 



WRITTEN ARITHMETIC. 167 

2 2. One that will divide two or more numbers without 
a remainder. The greatest common divisor is the greatest 
number that will divide two or more numbers without a re- 
mainder. 

23. A multiple is a number that is exactly divisible by 
a given number. A common multiple is one that is exactly 
divisible by two or more numbers. The least common 
multiple is the least common multiple that is exactly divis- 
ible by two or more given numbers. 

24. Parts of a unit. 

25. The quotient of the numerator divided by the de- 
nominator. 

26. The denominator shows into how many parts a 
number is divided ; the numerator shows how many parts 
are taken. 

27. A proper fraction is one whose numerator is smaller 
than its denominator. An improper fraction is one whose 
numerator is equal to or greater than its denominator. A 
mixed number is one expressed by an integer and fraction 
written together. A complex fraction is one that has a 
fraction in its numerator, or denominator, or both. 

28. For convenience; if not inverted they must be re- 
duced to a common denominator, and one numerator 
divided b\ the other. 

29. Find the greatest common divisor of the given 
numerators, and the least common multiple of the denom- 
inators. 

30. Find the least common multiple of the numerators, 
and the greatest common divisor of the denominators. 

31. Fractions whose denominators are increased or de- 
creased in ten-fold ratio. 

■^2. Write the multiplier with the order of its figures 
reversed, and with units' place under that figure of the mul- 
tiplicand w^hich is the lowest decimal to be retained in the 
producr. Find the product of each figure of the multiplier 



168 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

by the one above in the multiplicand and those to the left, 
increasing this multiplication by as many units as would 
have been carried had the rejected part of the multiplicand 
been used. Write these partial products with the lowest 
figure in the same column and add together, pointing off 
the required number of decimal figures. 

$;^. Compare the left hand hgure of the divisor with 
the units of like order in the dividend, and determine how 
many figures will be required in the quotient. For the first 
contracted divisor, take as many figures from the left of 
the divisor as there are places required in the quotient, and 
in each following division reject one place from the right of 
the last preceding divisor, using the remainder for a new 
dividend. 

34. A decimal in which a figure or set of figures are 
continually repeating. 

35. The figure or set of figures continually repeated. 

^6. A fraction whose numerator is i, and whose de- 
nominator is a whole number, plus a fraction whose nu- 
merator is also I, and whose denominator is a similar frac- 
tion, etc. 

37. The first has a denominator understood, showing 
that a unit is divided into ten equal parts, or sub-divided 
in a ten-fold ratio; the seconv^ has a denominator showing 
that a unit is divided into any number of equal parts. 

;^S. The medium of circulation. 

39. From the initial letters of the United States, U. S. 
joined together as a monogram. 

40. Such a part as will exactly divide that number. 

41. A written statement of articles bought or sold, to- 
gether with price of each and the whole cost. 

42. A concrete number, whose value is expressed in 
two or more different denominations. 

43. That by which extent, dimension, capacity, or 
amount is ascertained. Measures are of seven kinds: 



WRIITEN ARITHMETIC. 169 

Length, suiface or area, solidity, weight, time, angles 
and money. 

44. Extension has three : Length, breadth, and thick- 
ness. 

45. A series of numbers, descending or ascending, used 
in operations upon compound numbers. 

46. A measure of the quantity of matter a body con- 
tains, according to some fixed standard. 

47. It consists of 100 Hnks, each link containing 7.92 
inches, or the whole length 66 feet, or 4 rods. 

48. Troy has 5,760 grains; avoirdupois has 7,000. 

4Q. That which is used in measuring lines or distances. 

50. A square is a figure having four equal sides and 
four equal angles; a cube is a figure having six equal sides. 

51. In a wine gallon, 231 cubic inches; beer, 282; in 
a bushel, 2,150.4 cubic inches. 

52. The divisions and subdivisions of a unit, resulting 
by continually dividing by 12. 

53. Such part of a number as is represented by the per 
cent. Its base is the number on which the percentage is 
reckoned. 

54. By the hundred. 

55. The percentage allowed an agent, factor or com- 
mission merchant, is commission. Brokerage is the fee 
paid to a dealer in money, stocks, &c., for the transaction 
of business. 

56. An agent who buys or sells goods for another. 

57. A person who receives goods to sell for another. 
A consignor is a person who sends goods to another to be 
sold. 

58. Individuals united for the purpose of performing 
some business or undertaking. A corporation is a com- 
pany formed and authorized by law to act as one person. 

59. One of the equal parts into which capital stock is. 



170 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

divided. Stock is the amount of capital invested. Stock- 
holders are the owners of stock. 

60. A charter defines the powers of an incorporated 
body, while firiii is the name under which an unincor- 
porated body transacts business. 

61. Stock is at par when it sell? for its first cost; below 
par when it sells for less than first cost. 

62. A commercial term, used to express the gain or 
loss in business transactions. 

6^. Divide the gain or loss by the purchase price. 

64. Multiply the purchase price by $1, increased or 
diminished, as the case may be, by the gain or loss per 
cent. 

65. Divide the selling price by $1, increased or dimin- 
ished, as the case may be, by the gain or loss per cent. 

66. A portion of the capital stock required of the 
stockholders as a payment on their subscription. An as- 
sessment is a sum required of the stockholders to meet the 
losses or the business expenses of the company. A divi- 
dend is a sum paid to the stockholders from the profits of 
the business. 

67. Security on property guaranteed by one party to 
another, for a stipulated sum, against the loss of that prop- 
erty by any casuality. A policy is a written contract be- 
tween the parties. Premium is the sum paid for insurance. 

dZ. A tax is a sum of money assessed on the person 
or property of an individual for public purposes. Poll tax 
is a sum required of each male citizen liable to taxation, 
without regard to his property. An assessor is the person 
appointed to prepare the assessment roll, and apportion 
the taxes. 

69. A written list of articles of property with their 
value. 

70. A metho(5 of ascertaining the loss to be sustained 
by the proprietors of ships, freight, and cargo, where a por- 



WRITTEN ARITHMETIC. 171 

tion 01 the property nas oeen sacrificed or damaged for the 
common safety. Jetson is the portion of goods thrown 
overboard. 

71. Duties are taxes levied on imported gooas. A 
custom-house is an office established by government for 
the transaction of business relating to duties. 

72. Carrying on foreign commerce secretly, without 
paying the duties imposed by law. 

73. There are two kinds: Ad valorem and Specific. 
Ad valorem duty is a sum computed on the cost of the 
goods in the country from which they were imported. 
Specific duty is a sum computed on the weight or measure 
of goods, without regard to their cost. 

74. A sum paid for the use of money. Usury is illegal 
interest. 

75. Divide the given interest by the interest on $i for 
the given time at the given rate. 

76. Divide the given amount by the amount of $i for 
the given time at the given rate. 

77. Divide the given interest by the interest on the 
principal at i per cent, for the time. 

78. Divide the given interest by the interest on the 
principal for one year at the rate per cent. 

79. Part payment of a note, bond, or other obligation. 
An endorsement is an acknowledgement written on the 
back of a note, or any obligation, stating the time and 
amount of a partial payment. 

80. Discount is an allowance made for the payment of 
a debt before it is due. The present worth of a debt is 
such a sum, which, being put at legal interest would amount 
to the debt when due. It is found by dividing the given 
debt by the amount of $i for the given time and rate. 

81. A bank is a corporation chartered by law for the 
purpose of receiving and loaning money, and furnishm.g a 
paper circulation. Bank discount is an allowance made to 



172 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

a bank for the payment of a debt before it is due. Days 
of grace are three days allowed a bank to pay its notes after 
they become due. 

2>2. A promissory note is a written agreement to pay a 
certain sum either on demand or at a specified time. Bank 
notes are paper circulation issued by banks as money. A 
negotiable note is one which may be bought and sold, or 
negotiated, and is made payable to the bearer or to the or- 
der of the payee. 

2)^. An Officer authorized by law to attest documents 
or wTitings of any kind to make them lawful. A protest is 
a formal declaration in wTiting, made by a notary-public, 
at the request of the holder of a note, notifying the makers 
and the endorsers of its non-payment. 

84. A method of remitting money from one person to 
another, or making payments by written orders. There 
are tw^o kinds, domestic and foreign. 

85. Domestic or inland exchange is the exchange be- 
tween different places in the same country. Foreign ex- 
change is the remittance made between different countries. 

86. It consists of three copies of the same, made in 
foreign exchanges, and sent by diiierent conveyances to 
provide against a loss ; when one has been paid the others 
are void. A course of exchange is the current price paid 
in one place for bills of exchange on another place. 

87. The process of finding the meantime of the pay- 
ment of several sums, due at different times, without 
interest. 

88. The date at which several debts may be paid atone 
time. 

89. The date by which all others are compared in 
averaging an account. 

90. A relation established by two or more persons in 
trade. Partners are the individuals thus associated. 

91. The comparison ot two numbers with each other. 



WRTTIEN ARITHMETIC. ITS 

Arithmetical ratio is the difference between two numbers. 
Geometrical ratio is one divided by the other. 

92. The antecedent is the first term of a ratio; a con- 
sequent is the second term. 

93. Direct ratio is dividing the consequent by the ante- 
cedent. Inverse ratio is dividing the antecedent by the 
consequent. 

94. An equality of the ratio. 

95. The extremes are the first and fourth terms. The 
means are the other two. 

96. Of mixing or compounding two or more ingredients 
of different values. 

97. Two: medial and alternate. Medial is the process 
of finding the average price or quality of several ingredients 
whose prices or qualities are known. Alternate is the pro- 
cess of finding the proportional quantity to be taken of 
several ingredients whose prices are known. 

98. Involution is the process of raising a number to a 
given power. Evolution is the process of extracting the 
root of any number considered as a power. 

99. The indicated root of an imperfect power. 

100. One of two equal factors that produce that number. 

10 1. One of three equal factors that produce that 
number. 

102. A series of numbers increased or diminished by a 
common difference. 

103. A series of numbers increased or diminished by a- 
constant multiplier. 



QUESTIONS 



ON 



READING, 



1. What is reading ? 

2. What is elocution ? 

3. What does elocution embrace ? 

4. What is expression ? 

5. What does orthoepy embrace ? 

6. Define articulation. 

7. What are the oral elements ? How produced ? 
S. What is accent ? 

9. When two syllables of a word are accented, which 
has the greater force ? 

10. What are the expressions of speech ? 



II 
12 

13 
14 
15 
16 

17 
18. 

19 
20, 
21 

22 
23 



What is emphasis ? 

Define slur. 

How are emphatic words distinguished ? 

When should emphatic words be used ? 

How many kinds of emphasis are there ? 

What is absolute emphasis ? 

Define antithetic emphasis. 

How many inflections are there ? 

What is the circumflex ? 

What is the monotone ? 

When is the rising inflection used ? 

When is the falling inflection used ? 

In what is the circumflex mainly used ? 



READING. 175 

24. What is modalation and its divisions ? 

25. "What is pitch ? How divided ? 

26. Define force. What are its divisions ? 

27. Define rate. How classified ? 

28. "Wliat is quality, and how divided ? 

29. What is a pure tone ? 

30. What is the orotund ? 

.^i. Describe the aspirated tone. 

32. What is the gutturai quality ? 

;^;^. When is the trembling tone used ? 

34. Wliat is personation ? 

35. WTiat are pauses ? 

;^6. What are grammatical pauses ? 

37. Define rhetorical pauses. 

^8. What is suspensive quantity ? 

39. WTiat does quantity embrace ? 

40. What are some of the essential qualities of good 
reading ? 

41. What is the difterence between enunciation and 
pronunciation ? 

42 What quality of voice is mostly used in reading and 
speaking ? 

43. What determines the proper accent of words ? 

44. How is inflection sometimes affected by emphasis ? 

45. What is cadence ? 

46. What is the difference between the construction of 
prose and poetry ? 

47. What is a parenthetic clause, and how should it be 
read ? 

48. When melody comes in conflict with accent, which 
must yield ? 



A N S \V E R S 



TO 



Questions on Reading, 



1. The enunciation of written language. 

2. The delivery of composition. 

3. Orthoepy and expression. 

4. It is the manner of delivery. 

5. Articulation, syllabication, and accent. 

6. It is the distinct utterance of the oral elements. 

7. The sounds that form syllables and words; and are 
produced by the positions of the organs of speech in con- 
nection with the breath. 

8. The force given to one or more syllables of a word. 

9. The primary. 

10. Emphasis, slur, inflection, modulation, monotone, 
personation, and pauses. 

IT. The force given to one or more words of a sentence. 

12. It is that smooth, gHding, subdued movement of 
the voice used in parenthetic clauses, words contrasted or 
repeated, and in explanation. 

1 3. By italics, small capitals, and CAPITALS. 

14. \\Tien words and phrases are important in meaning, 
or when they point out a difference ; when emphatic words 
are repeated, or when a succession of important words or 
phrases occur. 

15. There are two kinds: absolute and antithetic. 



READING. 177 

1 6. It is used to designate the important words of a 
sentence, without any direct reference to other words. 

17 It is founded on the contrast of one word or clause 
with another. 

18. Three: the rising inflection, falHng inflection, and 
circumflex. 

19. A union of the rising and falling inflections, begin- 
ning with the one and ending with the other. 

20. A sameness of tone. 

21. It is generally used when the sense is incomplete; 
in questions which may be answered by yes or no; when 
a word or sentence is repeated as a kind of interrogatory 
exclamation; usua,iiy in negative sentences; and in the 
last but one of a passage. 

22. When the sense is incomplete, when language de- 
mands strong emphasis, in exclamations, and in questions 
which cannot be answered by yes or no. 

23. In the language of irony, sarcasm, and contrast. 

24. Modulation is the variation of the voice made in 
reading and speaking, and is divided into pitch, force, 
quality, and rate. 

25. Pitch is the degree of elevation of the voice, and 
is divided into high, moderate, and low. High pitch is 
that which rises above the usual speaking key, and is used 
in expressing joyous and elevated feelings. Moderate 
pitch is that which is heard in common conversation, and 
is used in expressing ordinary thought and moderate emo- 
tion. Low pitch is that which falls below the usual speak- 
ing key, and is employed in expressing emotions of sub- 
limity, awe, and reverence. 

26. Force is the volume, or loudness of voice, and is 
divided into loud, moderate and gentle. Loud force in 
expressing violent passions and vehement emotions. Mod- 
erate force is a medium loudness of voice, and is employed 

in narrative, description, and ordinary assertion. Gentle 

12 



178 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

or subdued force is employed to express fear, caution, 
secrecy, solemnity, and tender emotions. 

27. Rate is the speed, and is divided into quick, moder- 
ate, and slow. Quick rate is used to express joy, mirth, 
violent anger, and sudden fear. Moderate rate is similar 
to moderate force. Slow rate is used to express grandeur, 
vastness, pathos, horror, and consternation. 

28. Quality has reference to the kinds of sound uttered, 
and is divided into the pure tone, orotund, aspirate, gut- 
teral, and trembling. 

29. A clear, smooth, flowing sound, with moderate 
pitch. 

30. It I; the pure tone deepened, enlarged; and intensi- 
fied, and is adapted to the expression of the sublime and 
pathetic emotions. 

31. It is an expulsion of the breath, the words being 
spoken in a whisper. 

32. The guttural is deep undertone, expressing hatred, 
contempt, ioathmg. 

^^. The trembling is a constant waver of the voice, 
used to express an intense degree of suppressed excite- 
ment, or to represent the tones of enfeebled old a^e. 

34. Changes of the voice necessary to represent two 
or more persons speaking. 

35. Suspensions of the voice in reading or speaking. 
^6. Grammatical pauses are indicated by the punctua- 
tion marks. 

37. They are suspensions of the voice which the sense 
requires when a grammatical pause is not admissible. 

38. Prolongation of the voice at the end of a word 
without making an actual pause. 

39. Force and rate. 

40. To read slowly, mind the pauses, give the proper 
inflections, speak plainly, and read as if talking. 



READING. 179 

41. Enunciation is the utterance of words; pronuncia- 
tion the mode of utterance. 

42. The pure tone. 

43. General usage. 

44. It sometimes changes the falUng to the rising in- 
flection. 

45. It is a fall of the voice very similar to the falling 
inflection. 

46. Prose pays no attention to the melodious arrange- 
ment of its words, while poetry is written with regard to 
the rhythm and feet of each line. 

47. Something abruptly introduced into a sentence for 
the purpose of mcdifymg, explaining, or adding to the 
leading proposition, and should be read in a lower voice. 

■iS. Accent. 



QUESTIONS 

ON 

ORTHOGRAPHY. 



1. What is orthography? 

2. Detine orthoepy. 

3- "What is Phonolog}'? 

4. What is a letter? 

5. What are elementary sounds? 

6. How many elementary sounds in the English lan- 
guage? How divided? 

7. How are these sounds produced? 

8. What are the organs of speech? 

9. How is voice produced? 

10. What is the larynx? 

11. How are the letters divided? 

12. What are vowels? Consonants? 

13. Hot\^ are the consonants divided? 

14. What is a mute? Name them. 

15. What is a semivowel? Name them. 

16. What divisions are formed from the semivowels? 

17. What are the subvocals? Which of the elementary 
sounds are represented by them ? 

18. What are aspirates? WTiat sounds do they rep- 
resent? 

19. Name the combinations of the consonants? 

20. In the formation of the consonant sounds,' how 
many classes are given them? 

21. How are the labials formed? Name them. 



ORTHOGRAPHY. 181 

2 2. How are the dentals made? Name them. 

23. What are the Unguals? How niany? 

24. How many palatals, and how made? 

25. Why is the letter /i not included in these divisions? 

26. What are cognates? 

27. How do we analyze words? 

28. How is t/i aspirate distinguished from M sub- 
vocal ? 

[The following table exhibits the properties of the consonants and 
should be committed to memory for use in analyzing words.] 
^ is a consonant, mute, labial, subvocal. 
d is Si consonant, mute, lingual, subvocal. 
/ is a consonant, semivowel, labial, aspirate. 
g hard is a consonant, mute, palatal, subvocal. 
^ is a consonant, semivowel, aspirate. 
J is a consonant, semivowel, dental, subvocal. 
k^ g, and c hard, consonant, mute, palatal, aspirate, 
/ is a consonant, semivowel, lingual, subvocal. 
w is a consonant, semivowel, labial, subvocal. 
;2 is a consonant, semivowel, lingual, subvocal. 
/ is a consonant, mute, labial, aspirate, 
r is a consonant, semivowel, lingual, subvocal. 
s and c soft, consonant, semivowel, dental, aspirate. 
/■ is a consonant, mute, lingual, aspirate, 
z/ is a consonant, semivowel, labial, subvocal. 
w is a consonant, semivowel, labial, subvocal. 
^y is a consonant, semivowel, lingual, subvocal. 
^ is a consonant, semivowel, dental, subvocal. 
th is a consonant, semivowel, lingual, aspirate. 
th is a consonant, semivowel, lingual, subvocal. 
4:h is a consonant, semivowel, dental, aspirate. 
sh is a consonant, semivowel, dental, aspirate. 
zh is a consonant, semivowel, dental, subvocal. 
7ah is a consonant, semivowel, labial, aspirate. 
ng is a consonant, semivowel, palatal, subvocal. 



182 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

[In analyzing words, the properties of the letters given in the table 
above, can always be applied to the same letter, in whatever word it 
may be found, except silent and substituted letters.] 

[The following is an approved plan for analyzing the letters of any 
word:] 

Shrine — Monosyllable, 
sh — cons., semi., den., aspr., antecedent to its vowel L 
r — cons., semi., ling., sbv., antecedent to its vowel i. 
i — vowel, long sound. 

n — cons., semi., ling., sbv., consequent to its vowel L 
e — vowel, silent. 

Veil — Monosyllable. 
V — cons., semi., lab., sbv., antecedent to its digraph ei. 
ei — digraph, substitute for long a. 
\ — cons., semi., ling., sbv., consequent to its digraph ei. 

Phrensy — Dissyllable. 
ph — subs, for/, cons., semi., lab., aspr., antecedent to its 

vowel e. 
r — cons., semi., ling., sbv., antecedent to its vowel e. 
e — vowel, short sound. 

n — cons.., semi., ling., sbv., consequent to its vowel e. 
s — subs, for z. cons., semi., dent., sbv., antecedent to its 

vowel y. 
y — vow^el, substitute for ?, short sound. 

Machine — Dissyllable. 
m — cons., semi., lab., sbv., antecedent to its vowel a. 
a — vowel, long sound. 
ch — subs, for J-/?, cons., semi., den., aspr., antecedent to 

its vowel i. 
i — vowel, subs, for e, long sound. 
n — cons., semi., ling., sbv., consequent to its vowel i. 
e — vowel, silent. 

Echo — Dissyllable. 
e — vowel, short sound. 
ch — subs, for k, cons., mute., pal., aspr., consequent to its 

vowel e. 
o — vowel, long sound. 



ORTHOGRAPHY. 183 

Rose — Monosyllable. 
r — cons., semi., ling., sbv., antecedent to its vowel o. 
o — vowel, long sound. 

s — cons., semi., dent., aspr., consequent to its vowel t/. 
e — vowel, silent. 

Republican, polysyllable, 
r — cons., semi., ling., sbv., antecedent to its vowel e^ 
e — vowel, long sound. 

p — cons., mute., labial, aspr., antecedent to its vowel u, 
u — vowel, short sound. 

b — cons., mute, labial, sbv., consequent to its vowel u. 
1 — cons., semi., ling,, sbv., antecedent to its vowel /.. 
i — vowel, short sound. 
c — subs, for k, cons., mpte, pal., aspr., antecedent to its 

vowel a. 
a — vowel, short sound, 
n — cons., semi., ling., sbv., consequent to its vowel a. 

The plan of the above example should be carefully exam- 
ined, and the table on page i8i should be studied so thor- 
oughly, that the properties of all the consonants can be 
given without any hesitation. A little practice is required* 
after which any word can be analyzed readily. 

The following are test words for analyzmg: People, 
guard, jewel, avoirdupois, due, grammar, contradictory, 
nephew, phosphorus, arduous, was, alien, quartz, centur/, 
lungs, wrangle, ascension, special, free, buy, ride, chuck, 
debt, sovereign, rhetoric, rhinoceros, column, calf, isle, 
knife, weight, neigh, daisy. 

P^or further practice let the student take any exercise in 
the spelling book, or any sentence which he may see or 
think of. 

29. How are the elementary sounds divided? 

30. How many sounds have each of the vowels? 

31. What is a diphthong? 

32. How many diphthongs are there. 



184 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

;^^. How many sounds are represented by these diph- 
thongs? 

34. What IS a digraph? Triphthong.'* • 

35. When are w and 7 vowels? 
;^6. What is a syllable? 

37. Wliat is a word? 

^S, What are the words of one, two, three, four or more 
syllables called? 

39. What is essential in every syllable? 

40. By what is the principal sound in every syllable 
produced? 

41. To what does every consonant belong? 

42. When is a consonant antecedent or consequent to 
a vowel? 

43. What is syllabication? 

44. What is the guide for arranging words into sylla- 
bles? 

45. How may words be divided at the end of the lines? 

46. Why are words divided into syllables? 

47. When is the hyphen used? 

48. When two vowels come together, how are they dis- 
posed of in syllabication? 

49. When IS one letter a substitute for another? 

50. What properties do a substituted letter assume? 

51. Which letters have no substitutes? 

The following table contains a list of the substitutes of 
the elementary sounds : 

A long has two substitutes : ei and ey^ as in weight and 
they. 

A short has no substitutes. 

A medial h^is one substitute; e as in there. 

A fiat has no substitutes. 

A broad \i2iS one substitute; as in for. 

E long has one substitute ; i as in machine. 

E short has two substitutes ; a and w, as in says and bury. 



ORTHOGRAPHY. 185 

I long has one substitute ; 7 long as in rhyme. 
I short has four substitutes; y, e, u, and <?, dis'm hymn, 
England, busy, and women. 

O long has two substitutes ; eau and ew, as in beat^ and 

Se7C'. 

O short has one substitute ; a as in what. 

O slender has no substitutes. 

U long has one substitute ; etv, as in new. 

U short hdiS three substitutes; e, i, and 0, as in her, stir^ 
and son. 

U medial '^d^s one substitute, o, as in ivolf and 7^^^^/. 

/^ has two substitutes ; ph and gh, as in philosophy and 
rough. 

G has part of a substitute ; as x in ^jcz'j-^. 

yhas two substitutes besides^ soft; dt and d, as in j^/- 
^/?(?r and verdure. 

^has two substitutes besides c hard a.nd half of x; ch 
ana gh, as echo and lough. 

S has two substitutes ; r ^t?/? z, as in center and quartz. 

Z'has one substitute; ^^/ final, after any aspirate except 
/, as in mixed. 

Fhas one substitute ;/ in the word of. 

/"Fhas one substitute; u, as m quake. 

Fhas one substitute; z, as m. alien. 

Z has three substitutes ; s, c, and x, as in a/^zjr, suffice, and 

C^ has two substitutes; ti and /, di?> in question and nature. 

5// has six substitutes ; ce, ci, si, ti, ch, and s, as in ocean, 
social, mansion, nation, chaise, and sugar. 

Zh is represented by si, zi, and z and j" before ?/, as in 
fusion, glazier, azure, r azure, 

Ng has one substitute ; n generally before the palatals, 
as in thank, uncle, finger, conquer, etc. 

Students should become familiar with the table above, for 



186 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

in it is a compilation of usefui information m regard to the 
power of letters. 

52. When is i a consonant? 



Is u ever a consonant? 

What is the use of silent letters? 

Which letters are never silent? 

Which letters have no sound of their own? 



RULES FOR SILENT LETTERS. 

A rule for silent letters is formed when a letter is always, 
or usually, silent in similar situations. 
57. When is (? final silent? 



58 
59 
60 
61 
62 

63 
64 

65 
66 

6: 
68 
69 
70 

71 

72, 

73' 
74 
75 
76 

77 
78 
79 



"What would be the result if ^ final was not silent? 

When is d silent? 

When is c silent? 

When is d silent? 

When is g silent? 

When is /i silent? 

When is ^ silent? 

When is / silent? 

When is 71 silent? 

When is/ silent? 

When is / silent? 

When is w silent? 

When is g/t silent? 

In what words is c/i silent? 

In what words is s silent? 

Is ?n ever silent? 

In how many ways are words designated? 

What is a simple word? Compound? 

What is a primitive word? 

What is a derivative word? 

Whcit is a prefix? Sufiix? Root? 

Under what circumstances is a word primitive 



which is formed by the addition of prefixes or suffixes? 



I 



ORTHOGRAPHY. 187 

The following is a plan of giving the full analysis of a 
word: 

Antidote — Simple, derivative word, from dote^ the 
primitive part, meaning given ; a?itj, a suffix, signifying 
against; a?itidote, what is given against poison; dis- 
syllable, accent on the first syllable. 
a — vowel, short sound. 

n— cons., semi., ling., sbv., consequent to its vowel a. 
t — cons., mute., ling., aspr., antecedent to its vowel i' 
i — vowel, short sound. 4 

d — cons., mute., lab., sbv., antecedent to its vowel 0. 
o — vowel, long sound. 

t — cons., mute., ling., aspr., consequent to its vowel 0. 
e — vowel, silent. 

For exercise the following words should be analyzed in full r 
Counterpoise, absolve, expand, syllable, intrude, trans- 
gress, enterj)rise, coerce, connect, ignore, contradict, 
supervene, walking, actor, homicide, parricide, infanticide, 
matricide, fratricide, regicide, suicide, centennial, octagon, 
hexagon, polygon, democracy, hippodrome, horticulture, 
homogeneous, microscope, telescope, orthography, geo- 
graphy, biography, geology, hydrophobia, carnivorous, tele- 
graph, cyclopedia, stereotype. 



ANS^VERS 

TO 

Questions on Orthography < 



1. It treats of correct spelling, and the nature and 
power of letters. 

2. The art of a correct pronunciation of words 

3. The science of uttering the elementary sounds. 

4. A character used to represent an elementary sound. 

5. Distinct sounds, from which all of the words of our 
language are formed. 

6. Forty-one*. They are divided into three classes : 
vowels, subvocals, and aspirates. 

7. By the organs of speech, with the breath. 

8. The principal ones are the lips, teeth, tongue and 
palate. 

9. By the action of the breath on the larynx. 

10. The upper part of the windpipe or trachea, which 
modulates the voice in speaking and singing. 

11. Into vowels and consonants. 

12. Vowels are letters that denote pure tones; conso- 
nants are letters that cannot be fully uttered without the 
aid of a vowel sound. 

13. They have three divisions formed from the whole: 
as single letters and combinations; mutes and semi-vowels; 
subvocals and aspirates. 

♦Some authors give 43, some 38, and divide them into tonics, sub- 
.stances, and atonies. 



ORTHOGRAPHY. 189 

14. A letter, which admits of no escape of breath, 
while the organs of speech are in contact. The mutes are 
b, p, d. /, /C, c and g hard. 

15. A letter, wnich in pronouncing, admits of an escape 
of breath. The semi-vowels are all the consonants except 
the mutes.* 

16. Four of the semivowels, /, w, n, r, are called 
liquids, because of their soft sound, which easily unites 
with the sounds of other letters ; two of them, m and n, and 
one of the combmations, 7ig, are called nasals; s and z are 
called sibilants, or hissing letters. These properties called 
liquids, nasals and sibilants, are not essential in analyzing 
words. 

1 7. Those consonants which produce an undertone of 
voice when their sounds are uttered. The subvocals are 
^, d, g, /, /. w, ?i, r, V, IV, y, z, th, zh, and 7ig. 

18. The aspirates are mere whispers made by the or- 
gans of speech and breath, and are c, /, h, k, p, s, t, x, thy 
ch, sh, and wh. 

19. They are th aspirate, th subvocal, ch, sh, zh, wh^ 
and ng. 

20. Four: labials, dentals, Unguals, and palatals. 

21. They are made by the lips, and are b, f, in, p. v, w, 
and wh. The lips are assisted by the teeth in making the 
sounds of/ and :'. 

22. They are made through the teeth, and are /, s, z, 
ch. sh, zh, and c and g soft. 

23. They are made by the tongue, and are d, I, n, r, i, 
y, fh aspirate, and th subvocal. 

24. They are made by the palate, and are k, q, x, ng, 
and c and g hard. 

25. As the sound is lormed by emitting the breath sud- 

*The difference between the mutes and semi-vowels, is, that the 
organs of speech are more closely united in pronouncing the mutes 
than the semi-vowels. 



190 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

denly with all the organs open, it does not properly belong 
to these divisions, as the organs of speech are not brought 
into action. 

26. Letters whose elements are produced by the same 
organs in a similar manner, as / and v. The aspirates 
(except h) are all cognates of some of the subvocals. 

27. Take each letter separately, state whether it is a 
vowel or consonant, if a vowel, what sound, if a consonant, 
give its divisions. 

28. To distinguish th subvocal from th aspirate, a dash 
is placed beneath the subvocal. 

29. There are sixteen vowel sounds, hfteen subvocals, 
and ten aspir?tes. 

30. A has .^ve •. long, short, medial, fiat, and broad, as \\\ 
ale, at, air, art, all. 

E has two : long and short, as in cat, ebb. 

/has two: long and short, as in ice, it. 

O has three : long, short, and slender, as in old, 7iot, do. 

t^has three: long, short and medial, as in due, up, pull. 

Ou and ow have one and the same sound, as in out, 
cow. 

Oi and oy have one and the same sound, as in oil, joy. 
The diphthongs oi or oy are not purely distinct vowel 
sounds, as they represent two sounds in connection, broad 
a and short i. 

31. A union of t\Vo vowel sounds in the same syllable. 

32. Four: ou, ow, oi, oy. 

2^2)' Two: ou and oiv represent the same sound, and are 
called inseparable diphthongs, because they cannot be sep- 
arated into two distinct vowel sounds; oi and oy represent 
one sound, and are called separable diphthongs, because their 
sounds can be separated into broad a and short i. 

To test the separable diphthongs spell by sound the words 
oil and boy, using broad a and short i in each, and pro- 
nounce in quick succession. 



ORTHOGRAPHY. 19i 

34. A digraph is the union of two vowels in the same 
syllable, one of which is silent. A triphthong is the union 
of three vowels in the same syllable, two of which are silent 

35. When they represent the sounds of u and i. 
Some authors justly question whether w is ever a vowel. 

It cannot form a syllable, either alone or in connectioh 
■with consonants ; v.iiich all the other vowels will do. There- 
fore, as it requires the aid of a vowel letter to express a 
perfect svHable it cannot be a perfect vowel. 

36. A letter or combination of letters, uttered by one 
emission of the voice. 

37. A syllable or combination of syllables representing 
some thought or idea. 

:i^Z. Monosyllables, dissyllables, trisyllables, and poly^ 
syllables. 

39. A vowel. 

40. By the vowel, except in unaccented syllables with 
e as the vowel sound. 

This may be observed by the careless manner in vvhich 
many pupils spell such words as table, label, center^ &c. In 
these words the vowel is not as distinct as the consonant 
sounds. 

41. Unless it is silent, every consonant in a word be^ 
longs to some vowel or diphthong. 

42. When it precedes the vowel in the same syllable, it 
is antecedent to it ; when it follows in the same syllable, it 
is consequent to it. 

43. Dividing vrords into syllables. 

44. They must be arranged exactly as they are heard 
in correct pronunciation. 

45. Between the syllables. 

46. To assist in the pronunciation of words. 

4 7. Between compound words when first formed or when 
little used; between syllables at the end of lines; 
and between syllables for the purpose ot instruction. 



I9i^ THE QUESTION BOOK. 

48. Unless it should be a diphthong, two syllables must 
be formed, or they may be used together with one vowel 
silent. 

49. When it has the sound that another letter usually 
^represents. 

50. Those of the letter which it represents. 

51. B, d, g, h, /, 7?i, n,J>, r, th, and wh. 

52. When it begins a syllable and is immediately fol- 
lowed by a vowel sound ; as in alien. 

53. When it is preceded by g or s. and immediately fol- 
lowed by a vowel sound, it is a consonant and a substitute 
for w; as in ^.Linguage. 

54. To modify the sounds of other letters. 

55. FJ, q, r,x, 7', z. 

56. C, X, and q. 

57. When another vowel precedes it in the same sylla- 
ble ; as in ?nade, grape., ice. bride. 

58. Two syllables would be formed for one. 

59. Before / or after m in the same syllable; as in comb, 
/omd, debt., subtle. 

60. Before /& in the same syllable; as in back., rack., luck. 
It is also silent in czar., indict., muscle^ victuals, and a few 
others. 

61. Before g in the same syllable; as in bridge, pledge. 

62. Before m or ;/ in the same syllable; as in phlegm., 
gnat, malign, design. 

63. After g or r in the same syllable ; as in ghost, rhyme, 
rheiwiatism; when it is final, following a vowel ; as in oh, ah, 
Jehovah; when it is initial it is silent in a few words; as in 
herb, heir, honest, hour; in asthma, phthisic, isthmus, Thomas, 
Thames, it follows / and is silent. 

64. Before n in the same syllable ; as in knife, knee. 

65. After a when followed by/, ;;/, k, or 7/, in the same 
syllable (except valve); as in folks, half, palm, stalk, salve. 
Z is also silent in could, would, and should. 



ORTHOGRAPHY. 193 

66. After / and vi ; as in kiln, solemn. 

67. When it is initial and before n^ j-, or /; as in psalm, 
pneumonia, psalter. 

()Z. Before ch in the same syllable; as in notch, latch. 
It is also silent in Christmas, eclat, mortgage, and a few 
others. 

69. Before r in the same syllable; as in wrap, wreck. 
In whole, sword, whoop, answer and two it is silent. 

70. After i in the same syllable; as in fright, neigh; 
after au and ou; as in aught, ought, bought, slaughter, and 
through. 

71. In yacht, schism, and drachm. 

72. In corps, isle, island, puisne, viscount, and Belles- 
lettres. 

73. In the word /mnemonic or //mnemonics. 

74. In two ways: first, as simple or compound; second, 
as primitive or derivative. 

75. One that is not composed of two oi more whole 
words ; a compound word is composed of two or more sim- 
ple ones. 

76. One that is derived from no other word. 

77. One formed from a primitive by means of prefixes 
or suffixes. 

78. A letter or letters joined to the beginning of a word 
is called a prefix; when added to the end of a word, a suffix; 
and the root is the chief word without prefix or suffix. 

79. Whenever the meaning of the word is radically 
changed by the addition of prefixes or suffixes; as in re- 
proof, in which the meaning of neither re or proof is re- 
tained. 

In forming derivatives by means of suffixes, something 
more is required than merely to write the parts together as 
one word. Thus, if we desire to affix the suffix ed to the 
word suffer, we have only to unite, without change, th:. suf- 
fix with the radical ; as suffered. If we take prefer, a change 

13 



194 THE QUESTION BOOlv. 

must be made by doubling the final letter r, as preferred. 
This and other changes of like nature are made, for the 
most part, in strict accordance with known rules. These 
rules should be committed to memory by repeated illustra- 
tions in order to fully understand when and how to apply 
them. 



RULES FOR SPELLING. 

Rule L — The final e o^ a. radical word is rejected, when 
the suffix commences with a vowel, except words ending in 
^e or ge. Moving, salable, pleasure, peaceable, courageous. 

Rule II — The final ^ of a radical word is generally re- 
tained, when the suffix commences with a consonant; as 
hopeless, movement. 

In abridge, acknowledge, argue, awe, due, judge, lodge, 
true, and whole, silent e is not retained. 

Rule III. — Monosyllables and words accented on the 
last syllable, when they end with a single consonant, pre- 
ceded by a single vowel, double their final consonants be- 
fore a suffix that begins with a vowel ; as baggage, spotted, 
beginner. 

Rule IV. — The final consonant, when not preceded by 
a single vowel, or when the word is not accented on the 
last syllable, remains single upon the addition of a suffix; 
as, spoiling, suffered, toiling, visiting. 

Rule V. — The final y of a. radical word, when preceded 
by a consonant, is generally changed into i, upon the addi- 
tion of a suffix ; as happmess, trzal, stor/ed. In a few 
instances y is changed into e before ot^s and its compounds ; 
as, beauteous, beauteously. 

Rule VI. — The final i of a radical word, is omitted when 
the suffix begins with z; as, alkali, alkalize. 

Rule VII. — The final/ of a radical word, when preceded 



ORTHOGRAPHV. 195 

by a vowel, or when the suffix begins with i, remains un- 
changed; as, buyer, glorying. 

Rule VIII. — Words ending in/ or/^, commonly change 
/into V, when a suffix is added beginning with a vowel; as, 
wives, mischievous. 

Rule IX. — Words ending in le, preceded by a consonant, 
drop these letters upon receiving the suffix ly; as, ably, 
idly. 

Rule X. — Words ending in ble, before the suffixes ity and 

iiies^ take i between tne letters b and // as, ability, abilities. 

Rule XI. — Words ending in er or or, often drop the e or 

0, before a suffix commencing with a vowel - as victrix, 

wondrous. 

Rule XII. — Monosyllables ending in/ /, or s, preceded 
by a single vowel, double the final consonant ; as, staff, 
spell, mill — except if, of, as, gas, has, was, yes, is, his, this, 
us, thus. 

Rule XIII. — Words ending in any other consonants than 
/, /, or s, do not double the final letter — except add, odd, 
ebb, egg, inn, err, bimii, purr, butt, buzz, fuzz. 

The following is a list of prefixes, with their significations : 
A signifies, on, in, at, to, as, abroad, abed, avert. 
AB signifies from ; as, absolve, to free from. 
AD, AC, AF, AG, AL, AN, AP, AR, AT, signify to ; as, adjoin, 
to join to. 

Accredit, to give credit to. 
Affix, to fix to 
Agglutinate, sticking to. 
Allure, entice to. 
Annex, join to. 
Append, hang to. 
Arrange, range to. 
Attune, tune to. 
ALL, AL, signify wholly; as, all-just, wholly just. 
Already, wholly, or completely ready. 



196 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

All, when not separated from the radical by a hyphen^ 
rejects one /. 
ANTi, ANT, signify against; as, antipathy, afeehng against. 

Antarctic, opposite to the arctic. 
ANTE signifies before; as, antecedent, going before. 
BE signifies near; as, beside, near, or by the side of. 
Bi signifies two; as, bifold, two-fold. 
ciRCUM signifies around; as, circumnavigate, to sail 

around. 
CON, COM, CO, COL, COR, signify with; as conjoin, to join 
with. 

Commix, to mix with. 

Coequal, equal with. 

Collect, to place with or together. 

Correlative, relating with. 
CONTRA, COUNTER signify opposite ; as, 

Contradance, a dance opposite. 

Counterview, a view opposite. 
DE signifies from ; as, depart, to depart from. 
DEMI signifies half; as, demi-wolf, half-wolf 
DiA signifies through ; as diameter, the measure through, 
Di, Dis signify two ; as, 

Ditone, an interval of two tones. 

Dissyllable, a word of two syllables. 
Dis also signifies not or un ; as, dissimilar, not similar, 

disband, unband. 
E, EX, EC, EF, signify out; as, 

Emigrate, to move out. 

Export, to carry out of port. 

Eccentric, out of, or deviating from the center. 

Effluent, flowing out. 
EXTRA signifies beyond; as extravagant, going beyond. 
EQUi signifies equal ; as, equidistance, at an equal dis- 
tance. 



ORTHOGRAPHY. 197 

EN, EM, signify in ; as, 

Enclose, to close in. 

Embroil, to put in a broil or tumult. 
EU signifies well or agreeable; as, euphony, agreeable 

sound. 
HEX signifies six; as, hexangular, six-angles. 
HYPER signifies over; as, hypercritical, over-critical. 
IN, IM, IG, IL, IR, signify not or in; as, 

Incomplete, not complete. 

Imprudent, not prudent. 

Illegible, that can not be read. 

Ignoble, not noble. 

Irregular, not regular. 
INTRO signifies within ; as, introspection, looking within. 
INTER signifies between; as, intervene, to come between. 
JUXTA signifies next; as, juxtaposition, placed next. 
MAL signifies bad ; as, malpractice, bad practice. 
MIS signifies wrong ; as, misguide, to guide wrong. 
MONO signifies one; as, monosyllable, one syllable.. 
MULTI signifies many ; as, multiform, having many forms. 
NGN signifies not; as, non essential, not essential. 
OCT signifies eight, as, octangular, eight angled. 
OMNI signifies all; as, omnipotent, all powerful. 
OUT signifies beyond; as, outrun, to run beyond. 
OVER signifies above ; as, overshoot, to shoot over, 
ovi signifies an egg; as, oviform, egg-shaped. 
PER signifies by ; as, perchance, by chance. 
PERI signifies around ; as, perimeter, the measure around. 
PAR, PARA, signify from; as 

parody, an ode or song which is an alteration from 
another. , 

parasol, a small canopy to shield from the sun. 
PEN signifies almost ; as, peninsula, almost an island. 
PLENi signifies full ; as, plenipotent, full of power. 
POLY signifies many; as, pollysyllable, many syllables. 



198 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

POST signifies after; as, postpone, to place after or put off. 
PRE signifies before; as, prejudge, to judge beforehand. 
PRETER signifies beyond; preternatural, beyond the 

natural. 
PRO signifies for ; as, pronoun, for a noun. 
PROTO signifies first; as, protomartyr, the first martyr. 
QUAD signifies four; as, quadrangle, four angled. 
RE signifies again ; as, review, to view again. 
RECT, RECTI signify right or straight ; as 

rectangle, right angle, 

rectilinear, straight-lined. 
RETRO signifies back; as, retrograde, to go backwards. 
SEMI, DEMI, HEMi, signify half; as, 

semicircle, half a circle. 

demitone, half a tone. 

hemisphere, half a sphere. 
STEREO signifies solid; as stereotype, solid type. 
SUB, sue, SUF, SUG, SUP, suBTER, signify under; as, 

subcommittee, under committee. 

succeed, to follow after. 

sufiix, to fix after. 

suggest, to put under notice. 

suppress, to press under. 

subterfluous, flowing under. 
SUPER, SUR, signify over or more; as 

super human, more than human. 

surcharge, overcharge, 
sus signifies up ; as, sustain, to hold up. 
SE signifies apart ; as, secede, to go apart. 
SINE signifies without ; as, sine die, without a day. 
SYM signifies with; as sympathy, with feeling. 
TRANS signifies across; as, transatlantic, across the At- 
lantic. 
ULTRA signifies beyond; as, ultramontane, beyond the 

mountains. 



ORTHOGRAPHY. 199 

UN signifies not ; as, unwise, not wise. 

WITH signifies against; as, withstand, to stand against. 

The following table contains the simple suffixes with 
their definitions, and words to illustrate them. For want 
of space a full analysis of the words cannot be given, but 
the student can supply the want by giving a complete 
definition of the suffixes and primitive words combined. 

a. Ize, iize, ze, ise, se, ish, fy\ ify, en, f, ate, iate, uate, 
cate, icate, ite, signify to make, to give, to put upon or into ; 
as, civilize, stigmatize, glaze, criticise, cleanse, establish, sat- 
isfy, justify, soften, breathe, maturate, ampliate, actuate, 
implicate, duplicate, unite. 

b. Ing, afit, ent, ient, signify continuing to ; as, watering, 
dormant, pendent, sufficient. 

c. ed signifies did ; as, preferred, did prefer. 

d. Ate, ite,e?t, signify made, made of or like, possessed 
of; as, globate, erudite, silken. 

e. Ant, e72t, ate, ite, ast, ist, ado, trd, 07t, oso, ar, ary, 
iary, er, ee, eer, ier, or, ive, ster, net. yer, zen, isan, an, ian, 
tain, signify one, who, a person; as, 'j^ervant, president, col- 
legiate, favorite, encomiast, botanist, desperado, dotard, 
glutton, virtuoso, beggar, adversary, incendiary, payer, 
payee, charioteer, cannonier, executor, executive, teamster, 
partner, lawyer, citizen, artisan, veteran, grammarian, chief- 
tain. 

/. Ess, ix, ine, ago, signify a female ; as lioness, media- 
trix, heroine, virago. 

g. Ity, ety, ty, cy, ce, ice, ude, tude, itude, ness, t, th, 
mony, signify, the quality or state of being, the thing which 
or that which; as publicity, variety, novelty, privacy, opu- 
lence, justice, quietude, plenitude, exactitude, meekness, 
restraint, truth, sanctimony. 

//. Ion, ment, ameiit, iment, ure, tare, ature, iture^ al, 
ade, signify the act of; that which; as, erection, ejectment, 



200 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

armament, impediment, pressure, mixture, signature, expen- 
diture, refusal, cannonade. 

i. Alj eal, ial, ual, em, urn, iac, ic, tic, atic, etic, id, 
an, ean, tan, ane, ine. He, eth, th, ar, ary, iary, uary, signify 
pertaining, belonging, or relating to; as, central, corporeal, 
dictatorial, habitual, southern, taciturn, demoniac, patriotic, 
dyspeptic, emblematic, dietetic, stupid, Roman, marmo- 
rean, Newtonian, mundane, crystaline, infantile, fortieth, 
tenth, columnar, missionary, stipendiary, sumptuary. 

j. Ose, ous, eous, ious, uous, ceotis, aceoiis, aJieous, 
oneous, itious,fid, ey, y, signify lull of; abounding in; hav- 
ing the nature, or quality ot; as, verbose, mountainous, 
righteous, robustious, tempestuous, cetaceous, lardaceous, 
instantaneous, erroneous, cementitious, hopeful, clayey, 
juicy. 

k. Kin, ling, tile, cule, cle, icle, ock, et, let, aster, sig- 
nify little, small, minute, slight, petty, lambkin, kingling, 
globule, animalcule, tubercule, particle, hillock, feveret, 
ringlet, poetaster. 

/. Ics signifies the doctrine, art or science of; as, 
optics. 

m. Ism signifies that which is peculiar to ; a doctrine; 
a state, or condition; as, savageism, Calvinism. 

n, Er signifies more ; as, wiser, more wise. 

0. Est signifies most ; as, wisest, most wise. 

p. Do7n, ric, ate, hood, ship, age, cy, ry, signify the 
state, rank, office of; the territory or jurisdiction of; as, 
Popedom, bishopric, electorate, childhood, township, peer- 
age, captaincy, chieftainry. 

q. Y, ry, ary, ery, ory, signify the art, practice, or 
business of; the place where; as, gluttony, bigotry, statu- 
ary, cookery, armory. 



ORTHOGRAPHY. 201 



EXERCISES IN ABBREVIATIONS USED IN 
WRITING. 

WRITE OUT IN FULL. ABBREVIATE. 

A. A. S. Ill the year of our Lord. 

G. C B. Member of Congress. 

Id. i. e. Before Christ. 

C. P. S. Keeper of the Seal. 

Nom. No. Justice of the Peace. 

I. H. S. House of Representatives. 

A. B. or B. A , As if he would say. 

Col. Coll. Blessed Virgin. 

iVtin. Plen. In the same place. 

N. J. N. H. No one dissenting. 

Q. E. F. Which was to be demonstrated. 

Qr. Qt. A sufficient quantity. 

Rt. Rev. Right Honorable. 

S. A. R. R. For the time being. 

Sec. Leg. Doctor of Divinity. 

V. P. vs. Superintendent. 

Nov. N. S. New Testament. 

Do. or Ditto. A hundred weight. 

H. B. U. District of Columbia. 

M. B. M. D. Bachelor of Divinity. 

Acct. A. B. S. And so forth. 

E. J. e. g. See ; refer lo. 

U. T. Vt. United States Navy. 

C. S. A. Yd. The last, or last month. 

S. E. N. W. West Indies. I 

Zool. Pwt. By the hundre'd. 

N. T. N. Y. Attorney, 

111. Ind. Unknown. 

A. M. Md. Manuscripts. 



•202 



THE QUESTION BOOK. 



M. P. Neb. 
Co. Am. 
Com. Feb. 
Wm. Wt. 
Wis. Vt. 
O. S. Oct. 
P. O. Pop. 
U. S. A. Viz. 
P. pp. Oz. 
Va. V. Wed. 
N. E. Ky. Kans. 
Feb. Fahr. Cal. 
G. B. N. C. Neh. 
Tim. Sp. Sam. 
Rep. Rev. S. 
La. lbs. Fem. 
Id. i. e. Gen. 
Mt. N. A. Miss. 
Hhd. Hist. Gov. 
Hdkf. Cr. Dft. 
4 to. LLD. 8 vo. 
Sat. S. C. W. 
Inst. Int. lo. 
Dist. Diet. Cyc. 
Long. L. Lat. 
Minn. Mad. Masc. 
Gent. Fur. Ft. 
Jam. Inter. Dr. 
Coni. Agt. Al. 
E. Deut. Dea. 
Hon. Gr. U. S. 
Cor. Adj. Anon. 
Capt. Chron. C. 
N. Myth, Mo. 



Doctor of Laws. >.. 

Love of learning. 

Right Honorable. 

Old Testament. 

To wit ; namely. 

Postmaster; afternoon. 

Take notice. 

Rhode Island. 

Parliament. 

Gentlemen; Sirs. 

Fellow of the Royal Society. 

Professor, President. 

Texas, Territory. 

Postscript, Regiment. 

Mademoiselle, Major. 

Italy, Hundred, Dozen. 
Fellow of the Society of Arts. 
Assistant, Junior. 
Cash on delivery. / 

Thursday, Schooner. 

Volume, Philadelphia. 
Geology, IvOuisiana. 
Place of the Seal. 

Meridian, Thousand. 

Legislature, Lieutenant. 

Long Island, Matthew. 

Executor, Barrel, Adverb. 

Mistress, Servant, Democrat. 

Alderman, Amount, Editor. 

Esquire, Geometry, History. 

Constable, Constitution. 

Chapter, Capitals, Avenue. 

Mexico, Michigan, Minnesota. 

Memorandum, Maine. 



QUESTIONS 

ON 

Civil Government. 



1. Wliat is a constitution? 

2. What is a preamble? 

3. What are legislative powers, and in what are they 
vested? 

4. What is Congress? 

5. What is the Senate? House of Representatives? 

6. How are senators and representatives elected, and 
for how long a term of office? 

7. How old must a representative be, and how long a 
citizen of the United States? 

8. What is an elector? 

9. How are representatives apportioned among the 
states? 

10. What is census? How often taken? 

11. If vacancies happen in the representation of any- 
state, how is that vacancy filled? 

12. What are writs of election? 

13. What officers does the House of Representatives 
choose? 

14. What sole power has this branch of Congress? 

15. What is impeachment? 

16. Into how many classes are the senators divided? 

17. Who is president of the Senate? Can he vote? 

18. Should a vacancy occur in the Senate, what is to be 
done? 



204 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

19. How old must a senator be, and how long a citi- 
zen of the United States? 

20. Who becomes president of the Senate when the 
vice-president is absent? 

21. What sole power belongs to the Senate? 

22. How may the president of the United States be 
punished for crime in office? 

2;^. What judgment can the Senate declare against a 
convicted president? 

24. If an officer is removed from office by an impeach- 
ment trial, is he subject to the common law? 

25. What is a judgment? Indictment? 

26. What is an oath? An affirmation? 

27. What officers does the Senate choose? 

28. What is the meaning of pro tempore ? 

29. Who appoints the times, places, and manner of 
holding elections of senators and representatives? What 
may Congress do? 

30. If disputes arise in election returns, how are they 
to be decided? 

31. How many does it require to do business? What 
may a smaller number do? 

32. What power has each house over its members? 

33. Can either House adjourn at pleasure? 

34. Shall each House keep a journal of its proceedings? 

35. When shall the yeas and noes be entered on the 
journal? 

^6. When shall Congress assemble? Can it assemble 
at any other time? 

37. How do members receive compensation? 

38. Can a member be arrested while Congress is in 
session? 

39. For what shall they not be questioned in any other 
place ? 



CIVIL GOVERNMENT. 20& 

40. Can a person hold an office under the United States 
and be a member of Congress? 

41. Where shall bills for raising revenue originate? 

42. What is revenue? What is a bill? 

43. When does a bill become a law? 

44. What question does not require the sanction of the 
president? 

45. What are the powers of Congress r 

46. What is meant by high seas? By law of nations? 

47. What are letters of marque and reprisals? 

48. WTiat are duties, imports, and excises? 

49. What is the militia? 

50. Over what district may Congress exercise exclu- 
sive legislation? 

51. What are forts? magazines? arsenals? dockyards? 

52. What is the writ oi habeas corpus^ When can it be 
suspended? 

53. What is a bill of attainder? Is it allowed? 

54. What is an ex post facto law? 

55. Can a tax or duty be laid on articles exported from 
any state? 

56. "WTiat is prohibited in regard to nobility and the 
receiving of presents? 

57. Can any state enter into any treaty, alliance, or 
confederation? 

58. Can a state engage in war? 

59. What are the states forbidden to do in regard to 
imposts or duties on imports or exports? 

60. In whom is the executive power of the United 
States vested? 

61. AVho are eligible to this office? 

62. How are the President and Vice-President elected? 

63. Supposing the House of Representatives fail to 
elect a President whenever the right of choice shall devolve 
upon them, who shall act as President? 



506 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

64. What may Congress determine in regard to the 
time of choosing the electors? 

6S' When does the Vice-President act as the chief 
magistrate? 
• 66. How is the President compensated for his services? 

67. What oath must he take before he enters upon the 
execution of his office? 

68. Who is commander-in-chief of the army and navy? 

69. What offence is he not permitted to pardon? 

70. Does he have a right to make treaties, appoint em- 
bassadors, judges of the Supreme Court, and officers of the 
United States? 

71. If a vacancy occur, during a recess of Congress 
how is it filled? 

72. What is the President's message. 

73. For what crimes can the President, Vice-President, 
and all civil officers of the United States be impeached? 

74. What is treason? Bribery? 

75. In what is the judicial power of the United States 
vested? 

76. How long do the judges of the Supreme Court hold 
office? 

77. To what cases does their power extend? 

78. In what cases has the Supreme Court original juris- 
diction? 

79. Where shall a criminal be tried? 

80. If the crime is not committed ui the United States, 
where must the trial be held? 

81. What crimes are not tried by jury? 

82. What power declares the punishment of treason? 
How shall a person be convicted? 

83. What is meant by, "but no attainder of treason shall 
work corruption of blood or forfeiture, except during the 
life of the person attained?" 

84 What faith and credit shall be given each state? 



CIVIL GOVERNMENT. 207 

85. Can a person charged with crime be taken from an 
other state? 

86. How are new states admitted into the Union? 
87= How can new states be formed? 

88. What power has Congress in regard to the territory 
and other property belonging to the United States ? 

89. What shall the United States guarantee to every 
State in the Union? 

90. What is the supreme law of the land? Wlio are 
bound by oath to support it? 

91. Is a religious test required as a qualification to any 
office or public trust? 

92. How may the constitution be amended? 

93. How many amendments to the constitution? When 
were the first ten adopted? 

94. What did Congress grant in the first amendment to 
the constitution? 

95. What privilege was given the states in the second 
amendment? 

96. What is the law respecting the quartering of soldiers 
in any house in the time of peace? 

97. What rights are secured to the people in the fourth 
amendment? 

98. Can a person be twice put in jeopardy of life? 

99. Can a person be compelled to be a witness againsi 
himself ? 

100. AA'hat is the law respecting the taking of i)rivate 
property? 

10 1. In the sixth amendment, what right shall the ac- 
cused enjoy in all criminal prosecutions? 

102. When shall the right of trial by jury be preserved? 

103. What shall not be required, nor imposed, no*r m- 
flicted, in the eighth amendment? 

104. In the tenth amendment, what powers are re- 
served to the states respectively, or to the people? 



208 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

105. W^iat is the thirteenth amendment? 

106. In the fourteenth amendment, who is forbidden 
from holding certain offices? How may the disabiUty be 
f emoved ? 

107. What is said of the pubHc debt? What shall be 
field as illegal and void? 

108. Wliat is the fourteenth amendment? 



ANSWERS 



TO 



Questions on Ciyil Goyernment. 



1. The established form of government in a state, 
kingdom or country. 

2. A formal and explanatory introduction. 

3. The right to make and enforce laws, and are vested 
in a Congress of the United States. 

4. An assemblage especially applied to the two houses 
of legislative power in the United States. 

5. The Senate is the upper house of a legislature, or 
Congress. The House of Representatives is the lower 
branch of a Legislature, or Congress. 

6. Senators are elected by the legislatures of the states 
for a term of six years, each state being entitled to two ; 
representatives are elected by the people for a term of two 
years, each state being represented according to its popu- 
lation. 

7. Twenty-five years, and seven years a citizen 

8. One entitled to vote. 

9. According to the population of the states. 

10. An official enumeration of the people, with the 
statement of their property, pursuits, age, etc. It is to be 
taken once in ten years, which forms a new basis of appor- 
tioning the number of representatives to the several states. 

11. By the executive authority of the state. 

12. A writing issued to an officer or officers to give 
notice of some election to be held. 

14 



^10 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

13. The speaker, chief clerk, and sergeant-at-arms. 

14. The sole power of impeachment. 

15. An accusation or charge brought against a public 
officer for misconduct in office. 

16. Three : one class being elected every two years. 

1 7. The vice-president of the United States, and is en- 
titled to the casting vote. 

18. The executive of the state may make a temporary 
appointment, until the next meeting of the legislature. 

19. Thirty years of age, and nine years a citizen. 

20. The Senate elects on^ pro tem. 

21. The sole power to try all impeachments. 

22. He shall be impeached by the House of Represen- 
tatives, and tried b} the Senate, sitting for that purpose, on 
oath or affirmation, and the Chief Justice shall preside. 
The conviction shall be by the concurrence of two-thirds 
of the members present. 

23. It shall not extend further than to removal from 
office, and disqualification to hold and enjoy any office of 
honor, trust, or profit under the United States. 

24. He is liable and subject to indictment, trial, judg- 
ment, and punishment, according to law. 

25. Judgment is the sentence pronounced by the judge 
or court by which the person is tried. Indictment is* a writ- 
ten accusation of crime made by a grand jury. 

26. An oath is a solenjn declaration, made with an ap- 
peal to God for the truth of what is affirmed. An affirma- 
tion is a solemn declaration, made by one who is unwilling 
to take an oath. 

27. They choose all of their officers except the presi- 
dent of the Senate, but when absent or exercising the office 
of president of the United States, one shall be chosen pro 
tempore. 

28. For the time being. 

29. It is prescribed in each state by the Legislature 



CIVIL GOVERNMENT. 211 

thereof; but Congress may at any time by law make or 
alter such regulations, except as to the places choosing sen- 
ators. 

30. Each House shall be the judge of the elections, re- 
turns, and qualifications of its own members. 

31. A majority; but a smaller number may compel the 
attendance of absent members, in such a manner and un- 
der such penalties as each House may provide. 

32. It may punish its members for disorderly beha- 
vior, and with the concurrence of two-thirds, expel a mem- 
ber. 

^;^. Not for more than three days, without the consent 
of the other House. 

34. It shall, and print the same, unless secresy is re- 
quired. 

35. When one-fifth of those present shall require it. 

^6. The first Monday in December; but it maybe con- 
vened by the president, when necessary, or Congress may 
adjourn from time to time. 

37. By law; and are paid out of the treasury of the 
United States. 

38. Only for felony, treason, or breach of the peace. 
For any speech or debate in Congress. 
He cannot. 

In the House of Representatives. 
Revenue is the income of government, arising from 

iaxes, duties, etc. 

A bill is a formal writing presented to the Legislature 
for enactment. 

43. By passing both Houses of Congress, and receiv- 
ing the sanction of the president ; but if returned within ten 
days, Sundays excepted, with his objections, it does not 
become a law, unless reconsidered and passed by a two- 
thirds vote of both Houses. 

44. The question of adjournment, except in cases 



39 
40 

41 
42 



212 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

of disagreement between the two Houses with respect to 
the time of adjournment, when the President can adjourn 
them to such a time as he shall think proper. 

45. Section 8. The Congress shall have power to lay 
and collect taxes, duties, imposts, and excises, to pay the 
debts and provide for the common defense and general 
welfare of the United States; but all duties, imposts, and 
excises shall be uniform throughout the United States ; to 
borrow money on the credit of the United States ; to regu- 
late commerce with foreign nations, and among the several 
states, and with the Indian tribes ; to estabKsh a uniform 
rule of naturalization, and uniform laws on the subject of 
bankruptcies throughout the United States; to coin money, 
regulate the value thereof, and of foreign coin, and fix the 
standard of weights and measures; to provide for the pun- 
ishment of counterfeiting the securities and current coin ol 
the United States; to establish post-offices and post-roads; 
to promo4:e the progress of science and the useful arts, by 
securing for limited times to authors and inventors the ex- 
clusive right to their respective writings and discoveries; 
to constitute tribunals inferior to the Supreme Court; to 
define and punish piracies and felonies committed on the 
high seas, and offences against the law of nations ; to declare 
war, grant letters of marque and reprisal, and make rules 
concerning captures on land and water; to raise and sup- 
port armies, but no appropriation of money to that use 
shall be made for a longer term than two years ; to provide 
and maintain a navy ; to make rules for the government and 
regulation of the land and naval forces ; to provide for calling 
forth the militia to execute the laws of the Union, suppress in- 
surrections, and repel invasions; to provide for organizing, 
arming, and disciplining the militia, and for governing such 
part of them as may be employed in the service of the 
United States, reserving to the states respectively, the ap- 
pointment of the officers, and the authority of training the 



CIVIL GOVERNMENT. 213 

militia according to the discipline prescribed by Congress; 
to exercise exclusive legislation in all cases whatsoever, 
over such district (not exceeding ten miles square) as may, 
by cession of particular states, and the acceptance of Con- 
gress, become the seat of government of the United States, 
and exercise like authority over all places purchased by 
the consent of the Legislature of the state in which the 
same shall be, for the erection of forts, magazines, arsenals, 
dockyards, and other needful buildings ; — and to make all 
laws which shall be necessary and proper for carrying into 
execution the foregoing powers, and all others vested by 
this Constitution in the government of the United States, 
or any department or officer thereof 

46. The law of nations, the accepted or universal 
laws of all nations. 

47. Written authority from government to seize the 
property of an enemy, especially vessels and cargoes. 

48. Duty, a tax levied on imports. Imports, goods 
brought from other countries. Excise, a tax on anything 
made, used, or sold. 

49. The citizens of a state liable to military duty en- 
rolled for service. 

50. The District of Columbia. 

51. Fort, a place of defense. Magazine, a store 
where ammunition is kept. Arsenal, a repository for arms 
and mihtary stores. Dockyard, a place for containing all 
kinds of naval stores and timber. 

52. A writ for delivering a person from false imprison- 
ment, and can only be suspended in cases of treason, or 
when the public safety requires it. 

53. A special act of the Legislature inflicting capital 
punishment upon persons supposed to be guilty of high 
crimes, without the process of law. It is not allowed by 
the constitution of the United States. 



214 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

54. A law making an act criminal which was not st> 
when done. It is not allowed. 

55. It cannot. 

56. No title of nobility shall be granted by the United 
States;' and no person holding an office of profit or trust 
under them, shall, without the consent of Congress, accept 
of any present, emolument, office, or title of any kind 
whatever, from any king, prince, or foreign state. 

57. It cannot. 

58. Not unless in imminent danger from invasion. 

59. No state shall, without the consent of Congress, lay 
any imposts or duties on imports or exports, except what may 
be absolutely necessary for executing its inspection laws. 

60. In a president. 

6t. Any citizen born in the United States, thirty-five 
years of age, and fourteen years a resident. 

62. By electors chosen by the people. 

The electors shall meet in their respective states and 
vote by distinct ballots for President and Vice-President. 
These votes are sealed and transmitted to the seat of gov- 
ernment of the United States, directed to the President of 
the Senate. The President of the Senate shall, in the pres- 
ence of the Senate and House of Representatives, open 
all the certificates, and the votes shall then be counted ; 
the person having the greatest number of votes for Presi- 
dent shall be President, if such number be a majority of the 
whole number of electors appointed ; and if no person 
have such majority, then from the persons having the high- 
est numbers, not exceeding three on the list of those 
voted for as President, the House of Representatives shall 
choose immediately, by ballot, the President. 

The person having the greatest number of votes as Vice- 
President, shall be the Vice-President, if such number be a 
majority of the whole number of electors appointed, and if 



CIVIL GOVERNMENT. 215 

no person have a majority, then from the two highest num- 
bers on the list, the Senate shall choose the Vice-President. 
6$. The Vice-President shall act as President, in the 
case of the death or other constitutional disability of the 
President. 

64. Congress may determine the time of choosing the 
electors, and the day on which they shall give their vote; 
which day shall be the same throughout the United States. 

65. In case of the removal of the President from office, 
or of his death, resignation, or inability to discharge the 
powers and duties of the said office. 

66. The President shall, at stated time, rqceive for his 
services a compensation which shall neither be increased 
or diminished during the period for which he shall have 
been elected, and he shall not receive within that period 
any other emolument from the United States, or any of 
them. 

67. "I do solemnly swear (or affirm) that I will faith- 
fully execute the office of President of the United States, 
and will, to the best of my ability preserve, protect, an<i 
defend the Constitution of the United States. " 

68. The president. 

69. Cases of impeachment. 

70. He has the right with the advice and consent a^ 
the Senate to make treaties, provided tsvo-thirds of the 
senators present concur, and with the advice and consent 
the Senate he shall appoint embassadors, ministers, judges, 
and officers of the United States, and all appointments 
which shall be established by law. 

71. By an appointment by the President. 

72. An article directed to Congress, stating the condi- 
tion of the country, and proposing such measures as he may 
judge necessary and expedient. 

73. For treason, bribery, and other high crimes and 
misdemeanors. 



216 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

74. Treason against the United States shall consist only 
in levying war against them, or in adhering to their ene- 
mies, giving them aid and comfort. 

Bribery is giving money or some other consideration to 
procure desired legislation, a judicial decision, or other 
official action. 

75. In one Supreme Court and such inferior courts as 
Congress may from time to time establish. 

76. During good behavior, or life. 

77. In all cases arising under the Constitution, the laws 
of the United States, and cases that cannot be settled in 
the Supreme Court of any state. 

78. In all cases affecting embassadors, other public min- 
isters and consuls, and those in which a state shall be a 
party. In other cases the Supreme Court shall have ap- 
pellate jurisdiction, or jurisdiction by an appeal from lower 
courts. 

79. In the state where the crime is committed. 

80. At such a place or places as Congress may by law 
have directed. 

81. Crimes subject to impeachment. 

82. Congress. No person shall be convicted of treason 
unless on the testimony of two witnesses to the same overt 
act, or on confession in open court. 

83. That no posterity or person shall be denied any 
rights because of the punishment or conviction of another. 

84. Full faith and credit shall be given in each state to 
the public acts, records, and judicial proceedings of every 
other state. 

85. On demand of the executive authority of the state 
where the crime was committed. 

86. By consent of Congress. 

87. From territories having 30,000 inhabitants, or from 
States or parts of states with the consent of the states con- 
cerned. 



CIVIL GOVERNMENT. 217 

88. Congress shall have power to dispose of and make 
all needful rules and regulations respecting it. 

89. A republican form of government and protection. 

90. The constitution and laws of the United States. 
All government officers and representatives are bound by 
oath to support it. 

91. No religious test shall ever be required as a qualifi- 
cation to any office or public trust under the United States. 

92. By two-thirds vote of both houses of Congress, or 
by the action of the legislatures of two-thirds of the states, 
ratified in either case by three-fourths of all the states. 

93. Fifteen; the first ten were adopted at the first ses- 
sion of Congress. 

94. Freedom of religion, of speech, of the press, the 
right of the people peaceably to assemble, and to petition 
to the government for a redress of grievances. 

95. The right of the people to keep and bear arms. 

96. No soldier shall, in the time of peace, be quartered 
in any house without the consent of the owner, nor in time 
of war, but in a manner to be prescribed by law. 

97. The right of the people to be secure in their per- 
sons, houses, papers, and effects, against unreasonable 
searches and seizures. 

98. Nor shall any person be subject for the same 
offense to be twice put in jeopardy of life or limb. 

99. He cannot. 

100. If taken for public use, he shall have just com- 
pensation. 

loi. A speedy and public trial, by an impartial jury; to 
be confronted with the witnesses against him ; to have com- 
pulsory process for obtaining witnesses in his favor, and to 
have the assistance of counsel for his defence. 

102. In suits at common law, where the value in con- 
troversy shall exceed twenty dollars. 

103. Excessive bail shall not be required, nor exces- 



218 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

sive fines imposed, nor cruel and unusual punishment in- 
flicted. 

104. The powers not delegated to the United States by 
the Constitution, nor prohibited by it to the states, are re- 
served to the states respectively, or to the people. 

105. Neither slavery nor involuntary servitude, except 
as a punishment for crime, whereof the party shall have 
been duly convicted, shall exist within the United States, 
or any place subject to their jurisdiction. 

106. Persons who have held office under the United 
States, or of any state, and shall have been engaged in in- 
surrection, or rebellion against the same, or given aid or 
comfort to the enemies thereof. Congress may, by a vote 
of two-thirds of each house, remove such disability. 

107. The validity of the public debt of the United 
States, authorized by law, shall not be questioned. Any 
debt or obligation incurred in aid of insurrection or rebel- 
lion against the United States, or any claim for the loss or 
emancipation of any slave, shall be held illegal and void. 

108. The right of the citizens of the United States to 
vote shall not be denied or abriged by the United States 
or any state on account of race, color, or previous condi- 
tion of servitude. 



QUESTIONS 



ON 



PHYSIOLOGY AND ANATOMY. 



1. What is Physiology? 

2. What is Anatomy? What is Hygiene? 

3. "What law is impressed on all animal beings? 

4. What is the difference between food and living flesh? 

5. What organs constitute the digestive apparatus? 

6. What difference in the teeth of the carnivorous and 
herbivorous animals? 

7. How many teeth has man, and how divided? 

8. Of what are teeth composed? 

9. How are the teeth set in the jaw? 

10. What are salivary glands? WTiat is their function? 

11. Where are the salivary glands situated? 

12. Describe the pharynx, or second chamber of the 
mouth. 

13. What is the epiglottis? 

14. Describe the oesophagus. 

15. How does food find its way to the stomach? 

16. Describe the stomach. 

17. By what is the food dissolved in the stomach? 

18. Describe the process of digestion in the stomach. 

19. Of what is gastric juice composed? 

20. What is hunger? 

21. Wiat is the relative position of the stomach, lungs, 
liy^if' and diaphragm ? 



'220 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

2 2. To what substance is all food reduced in the 
stomach? 

23. Does the stomach digest fatty articles of food? 

24. What is the temperature of the stomach? 

25. Can food be digested artificially? 

26. What is the pyloric valve? 

2 7. How long does it take our chief articles of food to 
digest? 

28. What is the first work of the stomach in digestion? 

29. Intj^ what organ does the chyme pass from the 
stomach? 

30. Describe the intestinal canal. 

31. What is the pancreas? 

32. What is the office of the pancreas? 

33. What are the lacteal absorbments? 

34. What is the lacteal duct? 

35. What is called the lacteal system? 

^6. How is the digested food disposed of ? 

37. What is chyle? 

^S. When is a new supply of nutriment needed? 

39. Will the stomach bear sudden changes in the time 
of eating? 

40. When does the body sustain labor and exposure 
best? 

41. Why do growing persons, or convalescents require 
^lore food than adults or persons in health? 

42. What is the common error in regard to eating? 

43. When any organ of the body is in action, what 
^hanges occur .^ 

44. What is the office of the liver? 

45. Where is the bile emptied? 

46. Where is the spleen? 

47. What is the office of the spleen? 

48. What is fatigue? 

49. What is rest? 



PHYSIOLOGY AND AxVATOMY. 221 

50. What terms are applied to the difference in the 
temperament of men? 

51. Describe the nervous temperament. 

52. Describe the sanguine temperament. 

53. Describe the biUous temperament. 

54. Describe the lymphatic temperament. 

55. How does childhood differ from old age? 

56. Does this difference lequire a modification of diet? 

57. What two things are to be considered in all kinds 
of food? 

58. WTiat are the natural effects of stimulation? 

59. What is the effect of alcohol? 

60. What becomes of the chyle ? 

61. What is the apparatus of the circulation of the 
blood ? 

62. Describe the heart. 

6^. What is the beating of the heart? 

64. What are the valves of the heart? 

65. How do these valves act? 

66. How many sets of blood-vessels? 

67. Describe the arteries. 

68. Describe the veins. 

69. Describe the capillaries. 

70. What is the difference between the pulmonary and 
systemic circulation? 

71. Give the circulation of the blood. 

72. "What is the aorta? 

73. Where are the carotids? 

74. Where are the subclavians? \ 

75. What arteries supply the stomach ^vith blood? 

76. How is the liver supplied? 

77. How are the kidneys supplied? 

78. How is the spleen supplied? 

79. How is the intestinal canal supplied? 

80. How is the heart supplied ? 



222 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

8 1. What are the chief divisions of the aorta? 

82. What is the vena cava? 

S;^. What are tlie names of the larger branches of the 
vena cavas? 

84. How are the arteries or veins arranged in respect 
to each other? 

85. How does the blood pass through the heart? 

S6. How do the pulmonary arteries and pulmonar}' 
veins differ? 

87. Where are the largest arteries situated? 

88. Where are the largest veins situated? 

89. What prevents the blood in the veins from flowing: 
backwards? 

90. How does arterial blood differ from venous? 

91. What action has the lungs upon the blood? 

92. What causes the blood to circulate in the veins? 

93. How much blood in a man of average size? 

94. In what time does it circulate through the system? 

95. What circumstances will affect the rate of circula- 
tion? 

96. How do mental states affect the circulation? 

97. Where is the living flesh made? 

98. What materials of the body are obtained from the 
blood? 

99. For what purpose is the circulation of the blood? 

100. What law must be observed, in regard to eating, 
if health is preserved? 

10 1. How are the wasted particles of the body dis- 
posed of? 

102. What elements are selected by the nutritive or- 
gans to form fat? 

103. What elements are required to form hair? 

104. What to form muscle? 

105. Describe the lungs. 

106. Describe the air-cells. 



PHYSIOLOGY AND ANATOMY. 233 

icy. What is the organ of voice? How is voice pro- 
duced? 

To8. Describe the spine. 

109. Describe a vertebra. 

no. What is the pelvis? 

111. What is the sternum? 

112. What is the coccyx? 

113. Describe the ribs. 

114. Describe the skull. 

115. What are the bones of the arm and forearm? 

116. What are the bones of the wrist? 

117. What are the bones of the hands? 

118. Name the bones of the lower extremities. 

119. How many different kinds of joints? 

120. How are the joints held together? 

121. Where is the clavicle? 

122. Where is the scapula? 

123. What peculiarity about the joints of the neck? 

124. How is the femur joined to the pelvis? 

125. What peculiarity about the elbow and wrist joints? 

126. Describe the hip joint. 

127. Describe the shoulder joint. 

128. How many bones in the human body? 

129. Of what is a bone made? 

130. What is the structure of a bone? 

131. Where are the synoval membranes situated? 

132. What is the function of the synoval membrane? 

133. When is a joint said to be sprained? 

134. What is a muscle? 

135. How many kinds of muscles. 

136. What is the use of muscles? 

137. How many muscles? 

138. How are the muscles under the control of the 
will? 

139. Is the heart a muscle? Voluntary or organic? 



224 THE (QUESTION BOOK, 

140. How do we breathe? 

141. Describe the diaphragm. 

142. Explain the process of inspiration. 

143. Explain the process of expiration. 

144. What is coughing? 

145. What is sneezing? 

146. What is the effect of breathing the same air sev- 
eral times? 

147. In how many ways is the air unfit for respiration? 

148. How much fresh air ought to be supplied to each 
person per minute? 

149. How much air will the lungs hold? 

150. What effect has an ill-ventilated school-room upon 
children? 

151. What is the average number of respirations per 
minute? ♦ 

152. What animals are most active? What most 
sluggish? 

153. How does consumption waste the flesh and 
strength ? 

154. Why does sleep sometimes fail to refresh? 
155- What is carbonic acid? 

156. What is a common source of danger from carbonic 
acid? 

157. How does drowning produce death ? 

158. What necessity is imposed on all animals? 

159. What reciprocal offices do animals and vegetables 
perform ? 

160. What is the temperature of the human body? 

161. What is the origin of heat in living bodies? 

162. Into what classes are animals divided in relation 
to heat ? 

163. What prevents an increase of temperature in the 
body? 

1 64. What is insensible perspiration ? 



PHYSIOLOGY AND ANATOMY. 225 

165. What is sensible perspiration? 

166. Which protects from cold best, alcohol or food? 

167. Which warms most, flesh or bread? 

168. Why is more fat required for food in a cold climate 
than in a warm ? 

169. Describe the skin. 

170. What is the cuticle? 

171. What part of the blood flows through the skin? 

172. Describe the hair. 

1 73. Describe the nails. 

174. Where is the seat of color in the skin? 

175. ^\^lat proportion of the waste of the body passes 
through the skin? 

1 76. "What connection exists between the internal or- 
gans and the skin ? 

177. What is the office of the skin? 

1 78. Name those organs which carry off waste matter 
from the body. 

179. Name those organs which bring fresh material to 
the body. 

180. Describe the minute structure of the perspiratory 
organs. 

t8i. Of what does the nervous system consist? 

182. Describe the general outline of the brain. 

183. How is the brain protected? 

184. "WTiat large nervous trunks have their origin in the 
brain ? 

185. What is the spinal cord, and its position? 

186. How many kinds of nerves? 

187. What three things are necessary for sensation? 

188. Is the action of the different organs modified by 
the nerves? 

189. Do the arteries have nerves? 

190. If the nerve which governs the action of the heart 
should be severed, what would the heart do? 

15 



226 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

191. What is day-dreaming? 

192. Describe the eye. 

193. What is the sclerotic coat? Cornea? 

194. What is the choroid coat? 

195. Where is the retina? Its office? 

196. Where is the iris? Its office? 

197. Describe the lids. 

198. Where is the fluid prepared which moistens the 
eyes? 

199. What are the lachrymal glands? What is the 
nasal duct? 

200. What moves the eye? 

201. Describe the optic nerve. 

202. How is vision produced? 

203. How does the eye change as one grows old? 

204. What is the difference between a short-sighted man 
and one who is long-sighted? 

205. Why are some persons cross-eyed? 

206. What does the organ of hearing include? 

207. Describe the external ear. 

208. Describe the internal ear. 

209. What is the eustachian tube? 

210. How is sound produced? 



AN S^VE R S 

TO 

Questions on Physiology. 



1. The science of the organic functions of animals or 
plants. 

2. The science of the structure of animal bodies. 

3. That branch of medicine which treats of the preser- 
vation of health. 

4. Food is the material we eat, changed by the action 
of the system into living flesh. 

5. The mouth, pharynx, oesophagus, stomach, pancreas 
and intestinal canal. 

6. The carnivorous have sharp front teeth, and long, 
sharp and pointed canine teeth, and grinders with high 
and sharpened points. The herbivorous have short, blunt, 
and strong front teeth; small canine teeth; but their 
molars are very large broad and flat, with slightly raised 
lines on their surface. 

7. Sixteen in each jaw: four incisors in the center; one 
canine next to the incisors, on each side; then two bicus- 
pids, and three molars. 

8. They are composed of soft bone within, but are 
covered on the outside with an enamel of very hard tex- 
ture, which admits of an exquisitely fine polish. 

9. With long fangs, so they are not easily started from 
their places. 

10. They are glands which empty their fluids into the 



228 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

mouth. Their function is to secrete fluid which moistens the 
food during mastication, and assists, in a measure, in diges- 
tion. 

11. The two larger ones, situated between the ear and 
upi>er part of the jaw, and are called parotid glands. Two 
smaller ones situated about half way between the symphe- 
sis, or center, are called submaxillary. Smaller ones still, 
underneath the tongue, are called sublingual. 

12. It is separated from the mouth by the palate. Four 
passages open out of it : one leads forward to the mouth ; 
a second, upward to the nose ; a third, downward to the 
lungs ; and a fourth, backward to the stomach. 

13. A small valve placed over the mouth of the trachea, 
admitting air, but excluding all foreign substances. 

14. It is a soft muscular tube, extending from the 
pharynx to the stomach, and is about nine inches in length, 
and some less than one inch in diameter. It is composed 
principally of two muscular coats; the fibers of one run 
lengthwise of the tube, and the fibers of the other passing- 
around it in a circular manner. 

15. Upon being forced back in the mouth to the pnar- 
ynx it causes, by its presence, the muscles of the pharynx 
to contract upon it. This is the act of s>vallowing, and is 
beyond the control of the w.ill. The circular fibers of the 
muscles of the oesophagus seize upon the morsel of food, 
and contracting, force it downward until it reaches the 
stomach. 

16. It is an oval-shaped sac, situated below the dia- 
phragm on the same plane with the liver, and lies mostly 
on the left side of the spine. It has two openings ; an up- 
per, or cardiac orifice, where the oesophagus enters ; and a 
lower or pyloric orifice, which enters into the duodenum. 
It is composed of three coats : an outer, or serous coat, 
which is the same as that which lines the whole abdomen ; 
a middle, or muscular coat composed of two layers of 



PHYSIOLOGV AND ANATOMY. 229 

fibers, longitudinal and circular, the contraction of which 
move the food about the stomach during digestion ; and an 
inner, or mucous coat, containing the gastric tubules, which 
secrete the gastric juice. 

17. A powerful fluid called the gastric juice. 

18. The presence of food in the stomach causes the 
gastric juice to be thrown out. The muscles of the stom- 
ach move the food about, which causes the gastric juice to 
be thoroughly intermingled with it. The gastric juice re- 
duces the food to a pulpy mass, which occurs usually, in 
three cr four hours, and is then passed out of the stomach 
at the pyloric orifice. 

19. It is composed of an acid, supposed to be lactic 
or hydrochloric acid, and an organic substance called pep- 
sine. 

20. A sensition of want of more nutriment in the body, 
and is caused by the action of the blood on the terminal 
branches of the nerves in the mucous coat of the stomach. 

21. The lungs lie within the walls of the thorax, sep- 
arated from the abdomen by a broad muscle, the diaphragm. 
Under the right lung, below the diaphragm, lies the liver; 
and to the left is the stomach. 

22. A pulpy substance, called chyme. 

23. It does not ; they are digested by the pancreatic 
and intestinal juices. 

24. About 100^ F. 

25. It can. If food be thoroughly mixed with hydro- 
hloric acid and pepsine, and kept at an equal temperature 
of 100°, it will be reduced in a few hours to a homoge- 
neous mass somewhat resembling chyme. 

26. It is no valve, but simply a narrowing or contrac- 
tion of the pyloric end of the stomach. 



230 



THE QUESTION BOOK. 



27. Articles. 



Preparation. 



Time. 



Hrs. Min. 



Apples, hard, sour. ... 
Apples, sweet, mellow. 

Barley 

Beef, fresh, rare , 

Beef, steak 

Bread, wheat, fresh... 

Cake, sponge 

Cheese, old 

Codfish, salt, dry 

Ducks, wild 

Eggs, fresh 

Eggs, fresh 

Eggs, fresh, whipped. . 

Milk, new 

Mutton, fresh 

Oysters, fresh 

Oysters, fresh 

Pigs* feet, soused . . . . 
Pork, fat and lean . . . . 

Pork, salted 

Potatoes, Irish 

Potatoes, Irish 

Rice. . 

Sausage 

Soup, barley 

Soup, oyster 

Tripe, soused. 

Trout, fresh , 

Veal, fresh 

Venison, steak 



Raw. 


2 


SO 


Raw. 


I 


30 


Boiled. 


2 




Roasted. 


s 


. . 


Fried. 


4 




Baked. 


3 


30 


Baked. 


2 


30 


Raw. 


S 


30 


Boiled 


2 




Roasted. 


4 


30 


Boiled, har*^. 


3 


30 


Roasted. 


2 


20 


Raw. 


I 


30 


Raw. 


2 


15 


Roasted. 


s 


IS 


Raw. 


3 




Stewed. 


3 


30 


Boiled. 


I 




Roasted. 


^ 


IS 


Raw. 


3 




Boiled. 


3 


30 


Roasted. 


i 2 


30 


Boiled. 


1 I 




Broiled. 


1 3 


20 


Boiled. 




30 


Boiled. 


3 


30 


Boiled. 


I 




Fried. 


I 


30 


Fried. 


4 


30 


Broiled. 


I 


35 



28. To get rid of the greater part of the fluid which has 
been swallowed with the food. 

29. Into the duodenum. 

30. It is composed of three coats, arranged in a man- 
ner similar to the stomach, and for similar purposes. The 
mucous coat secretes the intestinal juice, which aids diges- 
tion. It is divided into the large and small intestines; the 
small intestine is sub-divided into the duodenum, jejunum, 
and ileum ; between the ileum and the large intestine is a 
a perfect valve, which allows nothing to pass back that 
has once entered the large intestine from the ikum. 



PHYSIOLOGY AND ANATOMY. 231 

31. A long, narrow gland, situated immediately below 
and behind the stomach. 

32. It secretes the pancreatic juice, which is emptied 
into the duodenum, and digests the fatty parts of food. 

;^^. Numberless minute tubules in the intestinal mucous 
membrane, which take up by absorption the nutriments, 
and convey it to the blood. These tubules join together, 
forming other tubules, which again join, and continue to do 
so until all are united in the thoracic duct. 

34. The duct into which all the lacteal absorbents empty, 
and is sometimes called the thoracic duct. It passes up- 
ward along the spine, and empties into the left subclavian 
vein. 

35. The lacteal absorbents, the tubes which they form 
by joining together, and the lacteal duct, — all together 
form the lacteal system. 

36. In the duodenum the digested food is divided into 
two kinds : that which is to enter the blood vessels, and 
the waste. 

37. Food reduced to a whitish colored fluid, and ready 
to be absorbed by the lacteals. 

;^S. When the lacteal absorbents have consumed the 
chyle and carried it to the veins, and the blood can no 
longer meet the demands of the wasting flesh. 

39. Not without some complaint. One's appetite re- 
turns at established periods; then his stomach craves food, 
and the gastric juice is ready to flow and dissolve it. 

40. When it is best nourished. 

41. In order to meet the new conditions, and supply 
the new wants of the system. 

42. That to please the palate, food that is not easily 
digested is eaten, and more than the system requires. 

43. The nervous force of the part is increased, and the 
circulation of the blood quickened, to supply the waste 
and support its powers. 



232 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

44. To form the bile, the elements of which are sep- 
arated from the blood. 

45. It is emptied through a duct into the duodenum, 
and serves to keep the intestinal contents in a healthy con- 
dition. 

46. On the left side of the spine. 

47. It is a ductless gland; and its office is not for a 
certainty known. 

48. A waste of the particles of the system, by exercise 
greater than the new materials supplied by the blood. 

49. The restoration of the materials wasted by fatigue. 

50. The general classes are the nervous, sanguine, bil- 
ious, and lymphatic temperaments. 

51. Those in whom the nervous system predominates, 
who are easily elated or depressed, whose mental actions 
are performed with rapidity. 

52. Those in whom the circulatory system predomin- 
ates, who are strong, but at the same time active, who are 
bold and resolute, and always hopeful. 

53. Those in whom the physical system predominates, 
who are strong in mind and body, but not quick, who are 
calm, steady, and persevering. 

54. Those in whom the lymphatic system predomin- 
ates, who are indisposed to exertion and unexcitable. 

55. In childhood the blood flows rapidly, the muscles 
are easily stimulated to action, the nervous system is irri- 
table, and the feelings and passions are readily quickened. 
In old age, all the powers, feelings and passions are in an 
opposite direction. 

56. It does. The elastic period requires a mild and 
soothing diet, while the inactive period needs more stimu- 
lating food. 

57. First — The digestibility. Second — The quantity 
of nutriment contained in them. 

58. When any part of the body is rubbed with pepper, 



PHYSIOLOGY AND ANATOMY. 233 

mustard, or spirits, it creates an irritation; the blood flows 
to the place more abundantly ; there is greater action and 
quicker life ; but these effects soon cease, and then the 
skin is pale, the circulation is more languid, for unusual 
action of the muscles causes fatigue. 

59. It is quick in action, both in excitement and ex- 
haustion. To a healthy stomach it must be injurious, foi 
it gives only temporary strength ; it only quickens the ac- 
tion and expenditure of power already existing, leaving the 
stomach to fall below its natural standard. 

60. It is taken up by the lacteal absorbents, carried 
through the lacteal tubes, to the thoracic duct, and from 
that emptied into the left subclavian vein near the heart. 

61. The heart, arteries, capillaries, and veins. 

62. It is a hollow, muscular organ of a conical form, 
placed between the lungs, lying more in the left than right 
cavity of the chest. It is about five inches in length, three 
inches and a half in breadth, and two inches and a half in 
thickness; and weighs from eight to twelve ounces. It is 
divided by a septum into two lateral halves ; and a trans- 
verse construction divides each half into two cavities, the 
upper cavity on each side being called the auricle, and the 
lower the ventricle. 

63. When the heart contracts, to send the bl®od out, 
the apex is thrown forward and strikes against the ribs of 
the left side, near the breast bone, where the beating is 
very easily felt. 

64. In the passage-ways of the heart valves are placed, 
which open to allow the blood to pass downward, but they 
close, and prevent its passing upward. 

65. They act on the same principle as the valve in the 
common pump-box. 

66. Three : The arteries, veins and capillaries. 

67. They are tubular vessels, which serve to convey the 
blood fiom both ventricles of the heart to every part of 



234 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

the boay. They are composed of three coats: internal, 
middle, and external. The middle coat consists of muscu- 
lar and elastic fibers principally, which make the larger 
arteries very elastic. The arteries are supplied with nutri- 
ent arteries and nerves. 

68. The veins return the blood from the capillaries ta 
the heart, communicating very freely with one another. 

69. They are minute terminal branches of the arteries^ 
and pervade ne-arly every tissue of the body in a vast net- 
work. 

70. In the pulmonary circulation the blood is conveyed 
to the lungs to be purified, and then brought back to the 
heart; in the systemic circulation the blood is carried to 
every part of the system, and returned by the veins to the 
heart. 

71. By a contraction of the heart the blood is forced 
from the left ventricle through the aortic valve? into the 
aorta, and through all the arteries of the body, to the upper 
and lower extremities, and the internal organs. From 
these various points it enters the capillaries, where all the 
changes in the system are ])roduced : and is then taken up 
by the veins, and returned as venous blood to the right 
auricle of the heart. From the right auricle it passes through 
a valvular constriction into the right ventricle ; from the 
right ventricle it is forced through valves into the pulmon- 
ary arteries, which carry it to the lungs; and from the 
lungs returned again to the heart through the pulmonary 
veins, entering the left auricle of the heart, and passing to 
the left ventricle, the point of commencement. 

72. The largest artery in the systennc circulation. It 
passes upward from the heart at first, describes a curve, 
and goes downward, passing through the diaphragm, and 
along the spinal column. The curved i>ortion is called 
the arch of the aorta; between the arch and the diaphragm 



PHVSIULUGY AND ANATOMY. 236- 

it is called the thoracic aorta; below the diaphragm, the 
abdominal aorta. 

73. The carotids are arteries carrying blood upwards 
along the neck; the left carotid arises from the arch of the 
aorta; the right from the arteria innominata, a large vessel 
springing from the aorta. 

74. The subclavians carry blood to the arms ; the letl 
arises from the arch of the aorta; the right from the arteria 
nominata. 

75. The gastric artery, arising from the coelic, which 
arises from the abdominal aorta; also, a branch from the 
splenic artery, and one from the hepatic. 

76. The liver is supplied by the hepatic artery, a branch 
of the coelic axis. 

77. The kidneys are supplied by the renal arteries. 

78. By the splenic artery, the third branch of the coelic 
axis. 

79. By the superior and inferior messenteric arteries. 

80. By the coronary arteries, small branches from the 
aorta. 

81. The subclavian, carotid, coelic, hepatic, renal, 
splenic, and where the aorta branches off to go to the ex- 
tremities it is then called (the two branches that pass 
through the groins) the inguinal arteries, and wliere they 
enter the thighs the femoral arteries. 

S2. There are two vessels by this name : one called the 
superior, and the other the inferior vena cava. The 
superior vena cava is formed by the junction of the two in- 
nominate veins, which in turn are formed from the sub- 
clavian and jugular veins. The inferior vena cava is 
formed from the junction of the two iliac veins, which are 
supplied by the femoral and other veins. Both vessels 
empty into the right auricle of the heart. 

S^. The jugular, subclavian, and inguinal veins. 

84. The arteries begin at the heart, and end in all the 



"236 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

parts of the body, in minute tubes. The veins, on the 
contrary, begin in the flesh of all the parts of the body at 
the connecting link (the capillaries), and end in one large 
trunk, the vena cava, at the heart. 

85. By the contraction of the heart, which forces the 
blood from one chamber to another; first, from the right 
auricle to the right ventricle, then to the lungs, and back 
to the heart, passing through the left auricle and left ven- 
tricle. 

86. The pulmonary arteries convey venous blood from 
the heart to the lungs, where it is purified, and then re- 
turned to the heart by the pulmonary veins as arterial 
blood. 

87. They are placed deeply within the flesh, where 
they are protected from injury. Some of them approach 
the surface, and their pulsations can be felt at the wrist, at 
the sides of the neck and on the temple. 

8S. Their great trunks are placed near the great arteries, 
but being less liable to injury, their branches are situated 
nearer to, and more of them on, the surface, than the ar- 
terial branches. 

89. Valves placed at proper intervals on the inner coat 
of the veins. The long veins are the best supplied; some 
veins have no valves. 

90. Venous blood is of a dark purple color, loaded 
with the waste particles of the system. The arterial blood 
is of a bright scarlet color, purified of all waste matter, rich 
in oxygen and nutricious elements 

91. It purifies the venous blood by means of the air in the 
lungs, which gives up its oxygen, and absorbs the carbon 
and other impurities. 

92. The action of the heart, which is like a pump; for 
when the arterial blood is forced out, it leaves a vacuum 
for the venous blood to flow in ; also the pressure of the 



PHYSIOLOGY AND ANATOMY. 237 

muscles on the veins by contraction; and perhaps a power 
from behind, or capillary force, in the capillaries. 

93. It is estimated to be twenty-eight pounds. 

94. The left ventricle of the heart, in a man of average 
size, will contain about two ounces. Every time the heart 
beats, this cavity is filled and emptied. In ordinary health 
the heart will beat about seventy-two times in a minute; 
therefore, in three minutes, an amount of blood equal to 
the whole, will pass through the heart, or system. 

95. The heart will beat faster when we are standing, 
than when we are sitting, and faster when sitting than when 
lying down. The pulsation is more rapid in the 
morning than in the evening. All exercise increases the 
force of the circulation. 

96. When the mind is excited with anger, hope, cheer- 
fulness and love, the blood flows more freely, and he is 
capable of greater exertions. The depressing passions 
have the opposite effect. 

97. In the capillaries. 

98. All the tissues of the body, — the bone, muscle, 
brain, skin, fat, the hair and nails, the tears, saliva, and 
the perspiration. 

99. To carry nutrition to the body, and absorb the 
dead particles of the flesh. 

100. When exercise is light, eat but little, and at no 
time eat to excess. 

10 1. They are thrown out of the system by the lungs, 
by the skin, by the kidneys, and by the liver and intestines. 

102. Seventy-nine parts of carbon, i imparts of hydro- 
gen, and 9^ parts of oxygen. 

103. Fifty parts of carbon, 6 of hydrogen, 1 7 of nitro- 
gen, and 26 parts oxygen and sulphur. 

104. Fifty-one parts of carbon, 7 of hydrogen, 15 of 
nitrogen, 2 1 of oxygen, and 4 parts of other matters. 

105. The lungs are placed, one in each of the lateral 



238 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

cavities of the chest, separated from each other by the 
heart; and are conical in shape. The right lung is 
larger than the other, and has three lobes ; the left lung has 
two. The weight of both lungs is about forty-two ounces ; 
the color, in young persons, is of a pinkish white, but mot- 
tled with dark spots as age advances. The substance of 
the lungs is of a light, spongy texture. Passing through it 
in every direction from the trachea are numerous tubes, 
•called bronchial tubes, growing smaller as they subdivide. 
Each tube ends in a minute cell, or vesicle, the air-cell. 

1 06. The air tubes commence at the back part of the 
mouth and nostrils with a single cylinder, which leads 
through the neck to the chest; but in the lungs they are 
divided and subdivided into smaller and smaller tubes, and 
at the minute termination of these tubes are found the air- 
cells. These cells are separated from the myriads of min- 
ute arteries only by an exceedingly thin membrane, so thin 
that gases can pass through it, and the blooa itself is 
.almost in contact with the air, whereby it becomes purified 
and in condition to nourish the system. 

107. The larynx is the organ of voice, and is the upper 
part of the trachea, where small cords, called vocal cords, 
stretch across it. Voice is produced by the air rushing 
over the vocal cords. 

108. The spinal column is composed of twenty-fout 
vertebrae — the sacrum and the coccyx; and is a little over 
two feet in length. The vertebrae are separated from one 
another by a thick piece of elastic cartilage, which saves 
the body from jars. Twelve of the vertebrae in the thoracic 
region support the twelve. ribs on each side. 

109. It is somewhat circular and flattened on the sides, 
with tooth-like projections, which match one with another. 
They each have spinous processes extending backward. 
Through the center of each vertebrae the spinal cord passes. 

no. It i-s a bony cavity at the lower part of the spine, 



PHYSIOLOGY AND ANATOMY. 239 

composed of the sacrum, coccyx, and the two innominate 
bones, or hip bones. 

111. A flat, sword-shaped bone, consisting of three 
pieces, which forms the front part of the thorax, and sup- 
ports the ribs by means of their cartilages. 

112. A small bone at the lower extremity of the sac- 
rum. 

113. The ribs are curved, and join the spine behind, 
and the sternum in front. The lower five are called false 
ribs, because their connection with the sternum is not so 
close as that of the others. 

114. The skull is divided into the cranium and face; 
the cranium is composed of eight bones, the face of four- 
teen. 

115. The humerus of the arm, and the radius and ulna 
of the forearm. 

116. In the wrist are eight small bones arranged in two 
layers. 

117. In the hands are five metacarpal bones and four- 
teen phlanges. 

I [8. In the thigh, the femur; in the leg, the tibia and 
fibula; in the ankle, seven small bones; in the foot, five 
metacarpal bones and fourteen phlanges; also, the patella, 
or knee-pan. 

119. Four: the hinge joint, as in the elbow; the ball 
and sock joint, as in the shoulder and thigh; a combination 
of the hinge joint with a rotary movement, as in the neck; 
and a joint with a sliding movement, as between the clavi- 
cle and sternum. 

120. They are held together by ligaments. 

121. It is the collar bone, extending between the ster- 
num and shoulders. 

122. The scapula is a broad, flat, triangular bone, called 
the shoulder-blade , it forms part of the shoulder joint. 

123. Between the head and the first vertebra is a 



240 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

hinge joint; and between the first and second vertebra is- 
a joint with a rotary movement, formed by a tooth-like 
projection from the second vertebra, which serves as an 
axis for the first to play upon. These two joints combined 
gives the various movements to the head. 

124. By a ball and socket joint. 

125. That a rotary movement is given to the hand by 
the radius rotating in a fibrous socket at the elbow, and 
corresponding movement at the wrist between the ulna and 
hand. 

126. The femur, or thigh bone, has almost a globular 
head at its up])er extremity, which is fitted into a very deep 
socket in the side bone of the pelvis. The socket is called 
the acetabulum. 

127. The head of the bone of the upper arm is less 
than half a ball, and is fitted into a very shallow socket in 
the upper corner of the scai)ula or shoulder-blade. 

128. Two hundred and four, besides the teeth and the 
patellse, or knee-caps. 

129. Of animal and earthy matter: two-thirds earthy 
and one-third animal. The earthy matter is principally 
carbonate and phosphate of lime. 

130. Bone is made of two kinds of tissue: a dense,, 
hard tissue, like ivory, which is on the outside and forms 
the shell; and a porous or cancellated tissue, always found 
on the inside of the bone. 

131. In joints. 

132. To secret a liquid which lubricates the joint. 

133. When, by an accident, a ligament or some fibers 
of a ligament are torn or much stretched. 

134. The active organs of locomotion. They are 
formed of bundles of reddish fibres endowed with the prop- 
erty of contractility. 

135. Two: those under control of the will, called the 



i^m'SIOLOGY AND ANATOMY. 241 

muscles of animal life ; and those over which the will has 
no control, called muscles of organic life. 

136. To produce all the motions of the body. 

137. About 527; the number varies. 

138. Through the nervous system. Every muscle of 
animal life is supplied with nerves through which the mind 
operates. 

139. It is a muscle of organic life. 

140. Principally by the aid of the diaphragm, which 
contracting, produces a vacum in the lungs, and air rushes 
in to fill the space. 

141. It is a flat muscle, and is a flexible partition that 
divides the chest from the abdomen, and separates the res- 
piratory from the digestive organs. Its edges are attached 
to the back-bone, to the lower edge of the lower ribs, to 
the breast-bone, and to the lower part of the chest. It 
forms an arch, upon the upper surface of which the lungs 
rest; and in the hollow below, the liver and stomach. 
When the diaphragm is at rest its upper point reaches as high 
as the fourth rib ; but when it is in action it is drawn down 
to below the seventh rib. 

142. The muscles on the sides of the chest raise the 
ribs and extend their circle forward and outward. The 
diaphragm draws down its arch and thus enlarges the chest, 
and the lungs having room for expansion, the air is pressed 
into them to fill the vacuum left by the enlarging chest. 
This is the mechanical part of the process of inspiration. 

143. After the chest is thus sufficiently expanded, the 
muscles of the ribs and the diaphragm relax and lose their 
firmness. Then the action of other muscles carries the 
ribs downward; and at the same time, the muscles that 
cover the abdomen press upon its contents, and force them 
against the diaphragm. This yields to the pressure and 
rises upward and presses upon the lungs, which retreat be- 



242 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

fore it, and the air is expelled. This is the process of ex- 
piration. 

144. A spasmodic action of the muscles of expiration 
forcing the air out violently through the mouth. 

145. It is the same action as coughing, only the mouth 
is closed, and the air rushes through the nose. 

146. It poisons the system, the expired air being loaded 
with waste matter and carbonic acid. 

147. Three: by being deprived of oxygen; by being 
loaded with carbonic acid; by being filled with waste mat- 
ter from the lungs, skin, etc., or other poisonous materials. 

148. About four cubic feet. 

149. About 384 cubic inches. 

150. They grow dull and sleepy from the action of the 
poisonous matter in the air. 

151. Eighteen. 

152. Those which breathe most are the most vigorous, 
/ively, and active, while those which breathe least are the 
most sluggish, stupid and feeble. 

153. In this disease the lungs are more or less filled 
with tubercles and abscesses ; the air-vessels are, to some 
extent, closed, so that the air cannot penetrate them and 
reach the blood, to purify it ; therefore, for want of pure 
blood, the system is not well nourished, the muscles grow 
thin and weak, and the body gradually wastes away. 

154. For want of sufficient air. 

155. This gas is known by many as damps ^ dead air, 
and is often found in wells and vats. It is heavier than 
air, and, therefore, falls to the bottom of a vessel or room, 
like water. 

156. A pan of coals is sometimes left burning in a bed- 
room which has no fire-place, while some one sleeps on the 
bed. The gas given out falls to the floor, and fills the bot- 
tom of the room, rising as fast as it is produced, until, like 



PHYSIOLOGY AND ANATOMY. 243 

water, it reaches the sleeper's head, and suffocation is the 
result. 

157. It produces death, not, as is commonly supposed, 
by filling the lungs with water, but because the water pre- 
vents the access of air to the respiratory organs, and the 
sufferer, dies from suffocation. 

158. The necessity of good air, though in an unequal 
degree. Yet every animal, the highest and the lowest, the 
man and the worm, must sustain life by their breath. 

159. The animal uses oxygen and gives out carbonic 
acid; while, on the other hand, the plant uses carbonic 
acid, and gives out oxygen. 

160. 98^ to 100^, F. 

1 6 1. The carbon of the food and the oxygen of the 
air. These two unite and produce heat similar to the way 
in which heat is produced by sensible combustion. 

162. Into two grand classes : the warm-blooded, and in- 
cludes man, birds, quadrupeds, &c. Their heat is ever of 
the same degree. The other class is called cold-blooded, 
and includes snakes, oysters, fishes, worms, toads, turtles, 
&c. Their heat is but little higher than that of the medium 
in which they live. 

16;^. Perspiration. 

164. That moisture which is absorbed by the air as fast 
as formed. 

165. When the moisture is exuded too fast to be imme- 
diately absorbed, and is left in small drops upon the skin. 

166. Alcohol stimulates the stomach, and excites the 
nervous system. It supplies to the flame carbon and 
hydrogen; but these soon burn out, and the body is after- 
ward cooler than it otherwise would have been. Food, 
alone, can sustain a permanent fire. 

167. Flesh, containing more carbon and hydrogen, sup- 
plies more fuel to the fire than vegetable matter. 



244 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

1 68. Because it supplies more carbon, and gives more 
heat. 

169. It is composed of two layers; the derma, or tme 
skin, and the epidermis, or cuticle. On the surface of the 
former are the sensitive papillae; and within or beneath, 
it are the sweat glands, hair follicles and sebaceous glands. 
This layer is a dense and thick membrane, and composed 
of firm and strong fibers, and is almost filled with minute 
blood vessels. 

170. The cuticle, or scarf skin, is a thin layer for the 
purpose of protecting the derma. 

171. A large proportion. 

172. It is an outgrowth from the skin. It has a root 
which is bulbous ; and a shaft which is hollow. The hollow 
ceases near the point. 

173. The nails are also outgrowths from the skin. 
They are flattened, elastic structures of a horny nature, and 
are firmly connected with the cutis. 

1 74. In the pigment cells, or the rete mucosum, which 
are situated in the innermost and last formed layer of the 
cuticle. The contents of these cells give the different 
shades to tjie various races of mankind. 

175. About five-eighths. 

1 76. A most intimate connection. As the blood finds 
its \vuy freely through it, it serves to relieve internal organs 
when the circulation is disturbed. 

177. It protects the body; it regulates the heat of the 
body by means of its sweat-follicles ; and it throws out much 
waste matter. 

178. The skin, lungs, kidneys, liver, and intestines. 

179. The stomach and intestines particularly; and 
sometimes the skin. The lungs bring oxygen. 

180. The perspired fluid is formed by the inner skin 
and conveyed to the surface, through minute tubes which 
are attached to the glands. There are three thousand five 



PHYSIOLOGY AND ANATOMY. 245 

hundred and twenty-eight of these Httle tubes on each 
square inch in the palm of the hand, and twenty-eight 
hundred on each square inch throughout the whole body, 
making seven millions of perspiratory tubes on a man of 
average size. 

1 8 1. The brain, spinal cord, and the nerves. 

182. It is divided into two principal parts, the cerebrum 
and cerebellum. The first is divid-ed by a deep fissure into 
two lateral halves, called hemispheres. The under part of 
the cerebellum is divided in the same way. The cerebrum 
is much the larger part of the brain, and occupies the an- 
terior portion of the skull. Its surface is indented with nu- 
merous convolutions. The outer portion, of grey color, is 
called the cortical substance. The inner portion, of like 
color, is called the medullary substance. The cerebrum is 
separated from the cerebellum by a strong fibrous tissue. 

183. By three membranes which cover it. The inner 
and middle of these membranes are very delicate, and give 
the brain a soft cushion to lie between it and its bony en- 
closure. The outer membrane is thick and very strong, 
and would hold the brain in its position, even when re- 
moved from the skull. 

184. The olfactory nerve, the optic, the facial and au- 
ditory, the pneumogastric, and others, nine in all. Some 
authors divide the seventh and eighth pair, and make three 
more nerves. 

185. It extends from the brain, through the whole 
length of the spinal column. It gives off thirty pairs of 
nerves, which divide and subdivide until they reach every 
part of the body. 

186. Two: motor and sensory. 

187. The nerves upon which the impression is made, 
the trunk which conveys the impression, and the brain 
which receives it and perceives it. 



246 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

1 88. They are. The amount of blood they receive is 
regulated by the nerves. 

189. They do. 

190. The heart would cease beating. 

191. Drawing beautiful imaginations of the future, where 
all things which are unpleasant and disagreeable are ex- 
cluded; where wealth, honor, fame, love, and pleasure are 
begging at the dreamer's feet. It is but one delightful 
revery, wli^re all is beautiful and satisfactory. It is more 
commonly known as "building air-castles." 

192. It is placed in a deep, bony socket. It contains 
two humors : the aqueous humor, a transparent fluid in the 
anterior portion of the eye ; and the vitreous humor, trans- 
parent and jelly-like, in the posterior portion, and forms 
the greater part of the eye. Between these two humors is 
the chrystalline lens, a double convex lens. 

193. It is a dense fibrous coat, covering the whole eye 
except in front, in which the cornea is placed, a transpar 
ent and strong tissue. 

194. It is the middle coat, and contains a black pig- 
ment, which absorbs such rays of light as are not needed 
for vision. 

195. A delicate nervous membrane, lining the inner 
surface of the choroid coat. The images of external ob- 
jects are received upon it. Behind, it is continuous with 
the optic nerve. 

196. It is a thin, circular-shaped curtain suspended be- 
hind the cornea, in the aqueous humor, and connected at 
its circumference with the choroid coat. A small opening 
in its center admits the rays of light, and is called the 
pupil. 

197. They are composed of cartilages adapted to the 
shape of the eye, the skin without, and the lining mem- 
brane within. One circular muscle surrounds the open 
part of the eye, and closes the lids when it contracts. An- 



PHYSIOLOGY AND ANATOMY. 247 

Other muscle, attached to the upper eyeUd by one end, and 
to the bone of the socket by the other, opens the eye. 

198. In the hning membrane of the Hds. 

199. The lachrymal glands secrete the tears, and are in 
the upper and outer part of the orbit. The tears clean 
the eye of any particles of foreign matter; and upon reach- 
ing the inner corner of the eye pass into the lachrymal 
canal and nasal duct into the nose. The nasal duct is a 
membranous canal, about three quarters of an inch in 
length, extending from the inner corner of the eye into the 
nose. 

200. The eye is rolled by a set of muscles peculiar to 
itself. These are attached by one end to the bony socket, 
and by the other to the eyeball. By their contractions 
they roll the eye in every direction; and, by their co-opera- 
tion, both eyes are directed to a single object. 

201. It passes from the base of the brain forward 
through the socket and into the eyeball. After passing the 
outer and middle coats, it is spread out on their inner sur- 
face, and forms the retina, which receives the rays of light. 

202. The light is reflected from objects, and passes 
through the transparent cornea and the pupil into the ball. 
The humors and the lens refract these rays, and give them 
such a direction that they fall upon the retina, where they 
form the image of the object. This impression is carried 
along the optic nerve to the brain, and there perception 
takes place and the object is seen. 

203. The lens loses its convexity in some degree, and 
the rays of light are not concentrated at short distances 
upon the retina; the person becomes far-sighted. 

204. In one who is near-sighted the lenses are too con- 
vex; in one who is long-sighted the lenses are not convex 
enough. 

205. Because the muscles that govern the movement of 



^S THE QUESTION BOOK. 

the eyeball do not act in harmony; one muscle is more 
powerful than another, and draws the eye to one side. 

206. The external ear, the internal ear, and the passage 
between them. 

207. It is composed principally of stiff cartilage; and 
its shape is that which is best adapted to catch sounds, and 
transmit them to the internal ear. The canal leading in- 
wards is about an inch in length j and is covered with hair 
and wax to project it from insects. A thin membrane, the 
covering of the drum of the ear, is stretched across the 
the canal, and separates it from the internal ear. 

208. It consists of a cavity filled with air behind the 
membrane of the drum, and three small bones, which reach 
from the membrane to the labyrinth, where the auditory 
nerve is spread out in numerous filaments to receive im- 
pressions of sound. 

209. A canal passing from the internal ear to the back 
part of the mouth, and serves as vent to the air in the 
drum of the ear. 

210. The pulsations of air pass along the external 
canal, cause the membrane of the drum to vibrate, which 
transmits the vibrations by the air and three small bones 
to the labyrinth, where in some unexplained manner, the 
filaments of the auditory nerve receive the impression, 
which is conveved to the brain, and we hear. 



QUESTIONS 



ON 



Physical Geography. 



1. MHiat is Physical Geography? 

2. What are some of the proofs of the rotundity of the 
earth? 

3. What conclusively proves the annual revolution of 
the earth? 

4. In what condition was the earth supposed to be in 
a remote period of its existence? 

5. What are the proofs of this molten condition of the 
earth. 

6. How did the earth become solid? 

7. What is the thickness of the earth's crust? 

8. What is a simple substance? 

9. How many elements have been discovered? 

10. How many elements mainly compose the crust of 
the earth? 

11. Whatis oxygen? Silicon? Carbon? Hydrogen? 
Sodium? Chlorine? Sulphur? Potassium? Calcium? 
Magnesium? Aluminum? 

12. How are rocks classified? 

13. What are stratified rocks? 

14. How are these rocks formed into layers? 

15. How did water originate on the earth's surface? 

16. What are igneous rocks? 

17. What are metamorphic rocks? 

18. What are fossils? 



250 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

19. What are fossiliferous rocks? Nonfossiliferous? 

20. Into how many ages does geology divide the globe? 

21. What is the Azoic Age? The Silurian Age? De- 
vonian Age? Carboniferous Age? Reptilian Age? Mam- 
malian Age? Age of Man? 

22. By what agencies are the changes of the earth's 
crust produced at the present time. 

23. How does the atmosphere produce a change? 

24. How does the water produce a change? 

25. What is erosion? 

26. Where is the greatest example of erosion. 

27. WTiat are the changes which are produced by the 
action of the heated interior? 

28. Where are there illustrations of the slowly progress- 
ing change? 

29. What will eventually be the condition of the earth's 
surface ? 

30. What proportion of the whole volume of the globe 
is water? 

31. What is the position of the continents? 

32. Irbow are islands divided? 

^^. What are continental islands? 

34. Give illustrations of continental islands. 

35. What are oceanic islands? 

36. What is coral? Where found? 

37. Into how many classes are coral formations divided? 

38. What are fringing reefs? 

39. What are barrier reefs? Encircling reefs? 

40. W^hat are atolls, or coral islands? 

41. What is a lagoon? 

42. What is the theory of the circular formation of 
atolls? 

43. Into how many great classes may we divide the 
surface of the earth? 



PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 251 

44. "WTiere is found the highest elevation of the earth? 
The lowtist depression ? 

45 What is trend? 

46. AVhat elevation is given as necessary to become 
table-lands? 

47. Where are the great plateaus of the world? 

48. Where are the great low plains of the world? 

49. Into how many classes are mountains divided? 

50. What is a longitudinal valley? A transverse valley? 

51. How many mountain systems in America? 

52. What is the extent of the Rocky system? 

53. Describe the Alleghany system. 

54. Describe the plateau of North America. How 
may this region be divided? 

55. How may the plateaus of South America be 
divided ? 

56. Describe the plateau of the Andes. 

5 7. Into what divisions are the plateaus of Asia divided ? 

58. What does the central table-land of Asia embrace? 

59. What table-lands does Southern Asia embrace? 

60. What are the known table-lands of Africa? 

61. Describe the principal plateau of Europe. 

62. Where is the great plain of North America? 

6;^. What does the great plain of South America com^ 

prise? How is it divided? 

a. WTiat are Ua?ios^ seh-as, pampas, and wastes? 

b. What are steppes, heaths, lands, and where found? 

c. What is a plain? Plateau, or table-land? 

64. What is the boundary of the great plain of the 
Eastern Continent? 

65. What are some of the chief points in the physical 
geography of Siberia? 

66. What are the principal known plains of Africa? 
a. Describe the Desert of Sahara. 



252 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

67 Of what is the interior of Australia supposed to 
consist? 

6S. What resemblance between North and South 
America ? 

69. From what do volcanic phenomena result? How 
are these phenomena divided? 

70. How are volcanoes classified? 

71. What are intermittent volcanoes? 

a. What is the crater of a volcano? Lava? 

72. Where is the largest known crater in the world? 

73. Into what classes are volcanoes divided? 

74. What is the central? The Uneal? 

75. WTiere are volcanoes most numerous? 

76. How many volcanoes have been enumerated? 

77. WTiat are some of the volcanic phenomena? 

78. WTiat are mud volcanoes? Where found? 

79. What are fields of fire? Where found? 

80. WTiat are earthquakes, and where confined? 
Si. What are the movements of earthquakes? 
82. What is the theory of earthquakes? 

-83. What is the dynamic force of earthquakes? 

84. What is the duration? 

85. Of what does hydrography treat? 

86 What are springs, and how may they be classified? 

87. What are perennial springs? Intermittent? Peri- 
odical? 

88. How are springs produced? 

89. What are artesian wells? 

90. What is a bifurcation? 

91. Into what classes are rivers divided? Describe 
them. 

a, WTiatis the basin of a river? A watershed? 

92. On what does the amount of water in a basin de- 
pend? 



PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 253 

93. Into what divisions may the United States be di- 
vided with reference to its drainage? 

94. What are the divisions of Europe ? 

95. What is a singular fact in regard to the watershed 
of Europe which separates the three systems of drainage? 

96. Where do the largest streams of Africa flow? Of 
Asia? 

97. Why do larger streams flow into the Atlantic than 
into the Pacific? 

98. How are lakes divided? Describe each class. 

99. What name is given to lakes without an outlet? 

100. Where are the principal steppe lakes? 

10 1. Describe the Caspian Sea. 

102. Describe the most extensive lake region of the 
globe. 

103. What is said of the Great Lakes? How large 
are they? 

104. Describe the lake regions of Europe. 

105. What are the Tundras? 

106. What is the color of the ocean? Depth? Trans- 
parency? 

107. Which is heavier, fresh or sea-water? At what 
temperature will sea-water freeze? 

108. What causes the i)hosphorescence of the sea? 

109. How many, and where are the great mediter- 
ranean seas? 

a. What is a mediterranean sea? 
no. Name the principal border seas. What separates 
these seas from the ocean? 

a. What are the three distinct movements of the 



ocean 



b. What are tides? Neap tides? Springtides? 

c. What are the chief causes of the tides? 

d. WTiat are waves? Breakers? How high da 
waves roll? 



254 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

111. To what depth is the sea agitated by waves? 

112. What is the height of tides? 

113. Describe the great tidal wave. 

114. What are ocean currents? How are they di- 
vided? 

115. What are temporary currents? 

116. What are periodical currents? 

117. What are constant currents? 

118. What is a counter current? Where are they 
found? 

119. Of what does meteorology treat? 

120. What is the composition of air? 

121. What is temperature^ 

122. On what does the temperature of a place depend? 

123. What is the depth of the limit of invariable tem- 
perature in the several zones? 

124. What is the depth of the limit of invariable tem- 
perature in the ocean? 

125. What is the mean temperature of a place? 

126. Does the mean temperature of a place vary one 
year with another? 

127. What are isothermal lines? 

128. Into how many zones of climate may the surface 
of the earth be divided by the isothermal lines? 

129. What is wind? How produced? 

130. To what region must we look for the cause of th;= 
circulation of the winds of the globe? 

131. Explain the circulation of the atmosphere. 

132. What are trade winds? 

133. Why do these currents become distinct winds at 
30° of latitude? 

134. In what direction do the trade-winds blow? Why? 

135. How many wind z'ones are there? 

136. Where is the zone oi calms? 

137. Where are the sub-tropical zones? 



PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 255 

138. Where are the zones of variable winds? 

139. What are monsoons? 

140. Where are the principal monsoop regions? 

141. Describe the monsoons of the Indian Ocean. 

142. What is the cause of the monsoons of the Carib- 
bean Sea? 

143. What are the "Northers" of Texas and Mexico? 

144. What are la?id and sea-breezes? 

145. Wliere are the Etesian winds? To what do they^- 
owe their origin? 

146. What are the most noted hot winds, and where do 
they prevail? 

147. What are the most noted cold winds, and where 
do they prevail? 

148. What are whirlwinds? Waterspouts? 

149. How are the tropical storms variously named? 

150. Where are the three principal hurricane regions? 

151. What is the nature of tornadoes? 

152. What, is dew, hoar-frost, fogs, clouds, rain, and 
snow? 

153. How is hail formed? 

154. Into what classes are clouds divided? Describe 
each class. 

155. How may the surface of the earth be divided in 
reference to the quantity of rain that falls ? 

156. Where are the regions of periodical rains? 

157. Describe the zone o( calms. 

158. Describe the zones of the trade-winds. 

159. What are the characteristics of the sub-tropicall 
zones? 

160. "WTiere are the regions of frequent rains? 

161. Where are the rainless regions? 

162^ Why are the Pacihc shores of Peru and Bolivia 
rainless? 



256 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

163. Wliat would be the condition of South America,, 
providing the Andes were on the Atlantic coast? 

164. Why is the Pacific shore of Mexico rainless? 

165. Where is the largest rainless district of the globe? 
vVhy are these regions rainless? 

166. What is the cause of barrenness of the desert of 
jGobi? 

167. Where does the greatest amount of rain fall? 
t68. W^hat particular place has the greatest annual 

rain fall on the globe? 

a. What is a climate? 

169. What circumstances affect the climate of a place? 

170. What are the two chief classes of climate? De- 
scribe them. 

171. What effect nas the soil on the climate of a 
country? 

172. Why does California have but little rain between 
May and November? 

173. What is organic life? 

1 74. Under what three divisions is this department con- 
sidered? 

175. What is botanical geography? 

1 76. W^hat is indispensable to the existence of vegetable 
life? 

177. WTiat four regions are destitute of vegetation in 
consequence of the want of moisture? 

178. Into what two great classes are vegetable forms 
divided? 

179. What plants are flowerless? 

180.^ How are flowering plants divided? 

t8i. Describe the endogenous. The exogenous. 

182. About how many distinct plant species are there? 

183. Which are the simplest forms of the plant species? 

184. Where are the lichens, algcTe, and mosses found? 

185. Which are the most stately of all vegetable forms? 



PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 257 

i86. What are the principal food-plants of the torrid 
and hot zones? 

187. What are bananas, bread-fruit, dates, cocoanuts, 
yams, cassava, and sago? 

188. What are the principal food-plants of the warm 
and temperate zones? 

189. What plants are the most valuable for furnishing 
clothing? 

190. What spices are in common use in the various 
countries of the globe? 

191. What are the principal narcotics used in the differ 
ent parts of the globe? 

192. What is opium, betel, haschish? 

193. What is zoological geography? 

194. How have the animals upon the globe been classi- 
fied? 

195. What are vertebrates? How have they been 
divided? 

196. What are mollusks? Articulates? Radiates? 

1 97. What is the mammalia? 

198. How have the mammalia been classified? 

199. Of what does ethnology treat? 



17 



AN S\VE R S 



TO 



Questions on Pliysical Geography. 



1. That science which treats of the natural divisions of 
water, the atmosphere, and all organic life. 

2. The masts of ships coming into a harbor are seen 
before the hull, and the shadow of the earth on the moon 
is always circular. 

3. The seasons. 

4. In a state of igneous fluidity. All the elements of 
the earth were one molten mass, surrounded by a thick at- 
mosphere, charged with vapors and gases. 

5. A direct proof is the ball-like form of the earth, 
which, but for its plastic condition, would not have been. 
Astronomy furnishes us with examples of like condition. 
Our sun is even now in a state of intense ignition, and the 
stars of the hrmament are burning suns. The moon was 
once a fiery ball, but is now cooled, and covei'ed with ex- 
tinct craters. 

6. In the course of countless ages the earth lost heat 
and cooled sufficiently to form a solid crust, while the in- 
terior, even now, is liquid lava, gradually losing its temper- 
ature, which in time will cause a solid earth. 

7. It is variously estimated at from fifty to one nunared 
miles. At the depth of 60 feet, water obtains its greatest 
degree of cold; at 2,200 feet the temperature rises to 
ninety degrees Fahrenheit; at 8,000 feet water would boil, 



PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 259 

and as the temperature increases regularly from the surface 
downward, at a depth of twenty-eight miles iron would 
melt. 

8. An element that cannot be separated into other 
component parts. 

9. Sixty-three, and of these only fourteen have been 
found in a pure state, as gold, silver, copper, platinum. 

10. Twelve: oxygen, silicon, aluminum, magnesium, 
calcium, potassium, sodium, iron, carbon, sulphur, hydro- 
gen, chlorine. 

1 1. Oxygen is a gas, and a constituent of all rocks, 
and composes about one-half by weight, of the earth's crust. 

Silicon is the element next in abundance ; combined with 
oxygen it forms silica or quartz, sandstone, and ordinary 
sand. 

Carbon is an element, which combined with oxygen, 
enters largely into the composition of various rocks. Char- 
coal and diamonds are pure carbon. 

Hydrogen is a gas, and combined with 'oxygen, consti- 
tutes water. 

Sodium is a metal, and with oxygen forms soda. It is 
the basis of salt. 

Chlorine with sodium forms common salt. 

Sulphur is a simple mineral substance, and united with 
■oxygen and lime makes gypsum. 

Potassium is a metal which, combined with oxygen, forms 
potash. 

Calcium is a metal, which with oxygen forms common 
quicklime, and with carbon, limestone. 

Magnesium is also a metal, which combined with oxygen 
forms magnesia. 

Aluminum is a white metal, and with oxygen forms alu- 
mina, the basis of clay. 

12. As stratified and unstratified, the unstratified being 
divided into igneous and metamorphic. 



260 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

13. Those which are made up of a series of lasers, as 
sandstone, slate-rock, limestone. 

14. By the waters of the globe removing materials 
from one place and depositing them in another as stratified 
sediment. 

15. When the surface of the earth had become cooled, 
or fallen below the boiling point of water (212° Fahren- 
heit), the vapors of the atmosphere were condensed and 
gathered as water in the depressions of the earth. 

16. Those which, instead of being a sedimentary de- 
posit, were forced in a melted condition from the burning 
depths below. 

17. These rocks were at first stratified, but by the 
igneous lava breaking forth and flowing near them, a sub- 
terranean heat was produced, thus destroying the sedimen- 
tary or stratified condition. 

18. Petrified remains of animals or plants that lie im- 
bedded in the rock formations of the earth's crust. 

19. Stratified rocks that contain fossils. Nonfossilifer- 
ous rocks are those without fossils, or igneous rocks. 

20. Into seven: The Azoic Age, the Silurian Age, 
Devonian Age, Carboniferous Age, Reptilian Age, Mam- 
malian Age, and the Age of Man. 

21. The Azoic Age is the earliest, and includes the 
time from the first forming of a solid crust to the appear- 
ance of animal life. Rocks of this age contain no animal 
fossils. 

The Silurian Age succeeded the Azoic, and tlie rocks 
abound in fossils of the simplest animals and plants. 
Star-shaped animals and animals that consist of joints or 
segments, as worms, make their first appearance on the 
earth ; but the moUusks, animals like our oyster, predom- 
inate. 

The Devonian Age, or Age of Fishes, succeeds the 
Silurian. Rocks of this age contain fossils of higher and 



PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 261 

more developed animals and plants than those of the pre- 
ceding age. Of fishes, the shark and gar-fish predominate. 

The Carboniferous Age was the age of vegetation. Great 
forests and jungles covered the land, from the poles to the 
equator. It was a period of unceasing change. Destruc- 
tive floods undermined the dense vegetation, which fell, 
layer upon layer, gradually changing into vast coal-fields 
under the pressure of the waters. 

The Reptilian Age is remarkable as the era of the cul- 
mination of reptiles and mollusks. Among the former 
were the gigantic ichthyosaurus^ a marine animal with the 
teeth and head of a crocodile, and from ten to thirty feet 
long; t\iQ plesiosaurus^ a huge reptile with the head and 
neck of a snake, and the pterodactyl, a flying reptile. 

In the Mammalian Age many of the lower animals and 
vegetable forms become extinct, and more perfect ones 
appear. The gar-fishes give place to the salmon, perch, 
and herring; the cycads among plants, to the oaks, willows, 
and palms. Animals of great size tread the earth, which 
are now known only by their remains. 

The Age of Man is the present era. The animal ele- 
ment is no longer dormant. The majority of the large 
beasts, that during the preceding era were the chief deni- 
zens of the world, have become extinct, and made room 
for smaller but higher creatures. Man, as the most highly 
organized being, appears latest upon the earth, which has, 
by means of successive changes in the past, arrived at that 
stage of development which renders it a fit dwelling-place 
for him. The earth, in this last stage, has reached a state 
of comparative stability. Changes take place, but they 
are less sweeping and less violent than those of the pre- 
ceding ages. 

2 2. By the atmosphere, the water, ana Dy the action of 
the heated interior. 

2^. The moisture in the atmosphere crumbles the exposed 



262 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

rock-surfaces, and the dusty fragments are drifted by the 
wind, and in the course of time, deep deposits of it are 
formed. 

24. Rivers and creeks are everywhere at work gradually 
moving the whole surface of continents towards the oceans. 
Rivers also produce important changes by erosion. 

25. Rivers wearing out deep channels in their courses. 

26. The Canon of the Colorado River, which is a nar- 
row chasm three hundred miles long, and with perpendic- 
ular walls of rock, from three thousand to six thousand feet 
in height, worn by the flowing river. 

27. Changes of level, which are slowly progressing by 
the century, or suddenly by the action of volcanoes and 
earthquakes. 

28. The northern part of the Scandinavian peninsula is 
slowly rising at the rate of four feet in a century, while the 
southern part, and Holland and Denmark, are gradually 
subsiding. It is by this subsidence that the greater part of 
Holland and Denmark is below the level of the sea, and 
should the dykes which protect these countries become 
broken, great inundation would follow. 

29. When the interior of the earth has cooled beyond 
the power to react and disturb its surface, the leveling of 
continents by the elements of nature will begin to be ap- 
parent. By the washings of rain the surface of the country 
is slowly moving to the bottom of oceans; by the action of 
the moist atmosphere rocks crumble to dust and are borne 
away. Though the process of decomposition is slow, yet 
the all-devouring element of time will tear down the moun- 
tains of earth and fill up the valleys of the seas, until land 
shall disappear, and the earth shall be one wide expanse of 
ocean. 

30. About one-five-hundred-and-thirtieth part of the 
whole volume of the globe, or if the earth were a perfect 



PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 263 

sphere, without elevations and depressions, the volume 
of water would l)e about 10,000 feet in thickness. 

31. They lie with their masses about the Arctic and 
Atlantic Oceans, and narrow as they extend southward. 

32. Into two classes: continental and oceanic. 

^:^. Those that lie near continents, and appear, by their 
position, to be detached portions. 

34. The West Indies, Bahamas, Aleutian, Japan East 
Indies, and many others. 

35. Such as lie far removed from any continent. Nearly 
all of the islands of the Pacific Ocean belong to this class. 

^6. It is the limy secretion or deposit of small marine 
animals that lie together in vast numbers. It is found in 
tropical seas, or where the temperature of the water is not 
below sixty-eight degrees (Fahrenheit). 

37. Four: fringing reefs, barrier reefs, encircling reefs, 
and atolls, or coral islands. 

38. Tines or ribbons of coral near the shores. 

39. They lie parallel to the shore, but are separated 
from it by a channel of water of considerable depth and 
varying greatly in width. The grandest example of coral 
formation known is the Great Australian barrier reef Ex- 
ternally it rises, with little inclination, from a fathomless 
ocean — stretches upwards of 1,000 miles along the north- 
east shore — varies in breadth from two hundred yards to a 
mile, and in distance from the shore from twenty to seventy 
miles. There are many openings through the reef, by 
which vessels enter the interior ocean, which is everywhere 
safely navigable. An encircling reef is a barrier reef which 
encloses one or more islands. 

40. They consist of a low, narrow rim of reef surround- 
ing a lagoon. 

41. The vacant place enclosed by atolls or coral 
islands. 

42. It is based uuon a regular and gridual subsidence 



264 THE QUESTION l>OOK.. 

of the bed of the ocean. A fringing reef is first formed 
near the shore of an island, which becomes an encircling 
reef, and as the ocean bed subsides, the coral deposits still 
continue to grow upward until by the subsidence the in- 
terior island disap}>ears, and the atoll alone remains. 

43. Into three classes : mountains, table-lands or plat- 
eaus, and low^lands. 

44. The Himalayas are the highest elevations, rising 
29,000 feet above the level of the sea. The lowest de- 
pression is the Dead Sea, in Palestine, which lies 1,300 
feet below the level of the ocean. 

45. The direction of a mountain chain. 

46. Above an elevation of 1,000 feet. Low plains are 
below 1,000 feet. 

47. 

Mean elevation in feet. 

The Plateau of Thibet 14,000 

The Bolivian Plateau, in the Andes ". 13,000 

Plateau of Anahuac, in Mexico 8,000 

Arabian Plateau 7,000 to 8,000 

Colorado Plateau 7,000 

The Great Basin 4,000 to 5,000 

The Sahara 2,000 to 3,000 

Southern Africa 3,000 to 5,000 

Central Asiatic Plateau 2,000 to 4,000 

48. In the Western Continent there is the Mississippi 
Plain, the Arctic Plain, Atlantic Coast Plain, Llanos of the 
Orinoco, Selvas of the Amazon, and the Pampas of the La 
Plata. In Euroi)e there is the Great Central Germanic 
Plain. In Asia, there is the Siberian Plain, the Plain of 
Turkistan, the Chinese Plain, and the Mesopotamian Plain. 
Africa has no great low plains. 

49. Into three : those rising to an elevation of 20,000 
feet or upwards; those between 10,000 and 20,000 feet, 
and those between 2,000 and 10,000 feet. 



PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 265 

50. Longitudinal valleys are those which separate 
parallel ridges of mountain chains, and extend in the same 
■direction. Transverse valleys cut the ridges at right angles, 
and extend in an opposite direction. 

51. Six: the Rocky Mountains, Californian, Allegha- 
nian, Andean, Parime, and Brazilian. 

52. This system^ including the Californian system, 
occupies the whole western part of the continent, ext^end- 
ing from the Isthmus of Panama to the Arctic Ocean, a 
distance of 5,700 miles. 

53. It extends in a southwesterly direction from the 
shores of the Gulf of St. Lawrence to the northern part 
of Georgia and Alabama. This system consists of many 
parallel chains, varying in height from 1,000 to 3,000 feet, 
enclosing fertile valleys. 

54. It extends from the 50th parallel of north latitude, 
between the Rocky Mountains and the coast range of the 
Pacific, through the Central part of Mexico to the Isthmus 
of Panama, and may be divided into the Great Basin of 
Utah, the Great Mexican Plateau, and the table-lands of 
Central America. 

55. The Great Plateau of the Andes; the elevated 
plains of Quito, Bogota, and Popayan ; and the table-land 
of Brazil. 

56. It is an extensive tract of lofty table-land, stretch- 
ing along the top of the Andes between the parallels of 
15° and 3*^ south latitude, with an elevation of nearly 13,- 
000 feet. 

57. They are divided into Central, Southern and South- 
western Asia. 

58. The great desert of Gobi, and the table-land of 
Thibet. 

59. Those of Hindostan, Iran, Asia Minor, and Arabia. 

60. Those of Abyssinia and South Atrica. 

61. It is the Spanisli peninsula, the whole central part 



266 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

of which consists of a series of lofty plains, divided from 
each other by parallel mountain chains. This plateau 
comprises 93,000 square miles, or nearly one-half of the 
peninsula. 

62. It extends from the Arctic Ocean to the Gulf of 
Mexico, and from the Rocky Mountains to the Alleghanies, 
and is divided about midway into a northern and southern 
slope. 

63. The entire peninsula east of the Andes, except the 
mountain systems and the Brazilian table-land, and is di- 
vided into the llanos, selvas, pampas, and wastes of Pata- 
gonia. 

64. It extends from the Bay of Biscay and the North 
Sea, to Behring Strait. 

65. It contains a great plain, extending from the foot 
of the Ural Mountains to the Pacific Ocean, and from the 
Alti Mountains to the Arctic Ocean. This plain, near the 
Arctic, is a barren and desolate region, and the cold is so 
intense that the spongy soil is perpetually frozen to the 
depth of several hundred feet. Near the Irtysh river, the 
soil is rich and pasturage good, but there are few inhab- 
itants. 

66. Sahara, the plains of Egypt, Central Africa, and the 
region of Zambezi. 

67. Of vast, barren plains. 

68. Each have a predominant mountain system in the 
west, two secondary systems in the east, and vast, low 
plains intervening. 

69. From the reaction of the heated interior upon the 
solid crust. These phenomena are divided into three 
classes : volcanoes, earthquakes, and a rising or subsidence 
of portions of the earth's surface. 

70. As active, intermittent, and extinct. 

71. Those having periods of rest. 

72. It is that of Kilauea on the island of Hawaii^ 



PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 267 

4,270 feet high. This crater is over three miles long and 
one mile wide, and from 600 to 1,000 feet deep. Large 
pools of boiling lava may be seen from the brink. 

73. Two : the central and lineal systems. 

74. The central, consists of several vents grouped to- 
gether, one of which usually serves as a common point of 
eniption. The lineal, consists of several vents extending 
in one direction, at no great distance from each other, 
forming, as it were, chimneys along an extended fissure. 

75. On the islands and shores of the Pacific Ocean. 

76. Humboldt has enumerated 225 still in action, and. 
the number of extinct volcanoes is much greater. 

77. Geysers, mud volcanoes, and fields of fire. 

78. Miniature volcanoes, \vhich emit steam and mud 
but never molten rocks. They are found in large num- 
bers in Sicily, and on the shores of the Caspian Sea, near 
the base of the Caucasus Mountains. 

79. Regions where columns of fire break forth from the 
ground. These fires are classed with volcanic phenomena, 
although they may have their origin from the connection 
of the internal heat with large quantities of gases which, 
accumulate in the crevices of rocks and burst forth in 
flames. They are found to the greatest extent west of the 
Caspian Sea. 

80. Convulsions of the earth, and are most common in 
volcanic districts. 

81. Horizontal, vertical, and rotary. 

82. That the convulsions are the results of the heated 
interior seeking vent, and may be caused by the collection 
of steam and gases, or, like congealed water, the crust of 
the earth may contain the property of expanding during its 
process of cooling, thus forming a pressure which is re- 
sisted by violent agitations to obtain relief. The move- 
ments of earthquakes appear to be on the principle that 
waves recede when any substance is thrown into the water; 



268 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

thus, when convulsions occur great waves of the fluid in- 
terior recede, by which the crust is uplifted and more or 
less violently shaken. 

S;^. They vary according to their power. The terrible 
earthquake of Lisbon, November ist, 1755, in which 60,- 
000 persons lost their lives, disturbed an area of 7,500,000 
square miles, or, as the earth's crust is about twenty-five 
miles in thickness, 187,500,000 cubic miles of matter were 
moved. 

84. Some of the most destructive lasted but a few sec- 
onds. That of I Jsbon produced its terrible effects in less 
than five minutes. 

85. The waters upon the earth. 

86. Fountains of waters which flow from reservoirs un- 
derneath the ground, and are classified as perennial or 
<X)nstant, intermitting, and periodical. 

87. Perennial springs are those which contiTiue to flow 
at all seasons. Intermittent are those that alternately flow 
and stop. Periodical depend upon the prevailing charac- 
ter of the seasons. 

88. They depend upon the peculiar arrangement of the 
pervious and impervious stratification. The water pene- 
trates the pervious stratum and sinks to the impervious, 
•where, if the stratification is tilted, the water will follow 
this layer until an outlet is found. Should the pervious 
stratum lie between two convex layers of impervious mat- 
ter, springs could be obtained at any place where the 
height is less than the highest points of the pervious stra- 
tum, by breaking through, whereby the water would raise 
to the surface and flow. 

89. Artificial springs formed by boring to the pervious 
stratum, as explained above. 

90. When a river is so situated that it may divide and 
iiow to two distinct river basins. The best known exam- 
ple is the Cassiquiare river, in Venezuela, which connects 



PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 269 

through its bifurcation the river systems of the Amazon 
and Orinoco rivers. 

91. Into oceanic and continental The oceanic are 
those that flow into the ocean, and are divided into five 
classes, one for each ocean. The continental are those 
which never reach the ocean. 

92. Upon the extent of the territory which it drains; 
the rains; the physical features of the country — a well- 
wooded country impeding evaporation ; and the climate. 

93. The St. Lawrence basin, Atlantic slope, Missis- 
sippi valley, Texas slope, Pacific slope, inland basin of 
Utah, and the Red River basin. 

94. There are three classes: the Atlantic basin, the 
Arctic slope, and the inland basin of the Caspian Sea. 

95. They are entirely within the low plains of Russia. 

96. Into the Atlantic Ocean. 

97. The position of the several grand divisions partially 
enclose, and slope to the Atlantic, while mountain chains 
which form the divides between the river basins of these 
oceans are near the shores of the Pacific. 

98. Into four classes: first, those which receive no 
streams and have no outlets; second, those which receive 
no streams, but have an outlet; third, those which receive 
streams, but have no outlet; fourth, those which both re- 
ceive and discharge streams. 

99. Steppe lakes. 

100. Great Salt Lake of the United States, L?vke 
Titicaca of South America, the Caspian Sea, Lake Tchad 
and Nagami of Africa, and numerous smaller ones through* 
out Central Asia. 

loi. It is over 176,000 square miles in extent, and 
2,957 feet deep; its surface lies eighty-four feet below the 
level of the ocean, and is slowly diminishing in size. 
Several large rivers flow into it. 

102. This region is in North America, and sweeps ip 



270 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

the shape of a broad belt around Hudson Bay, from Lab- 
rador to the shores of die Arctic Ocean. The lakes of 
Canada, those in the New England States, New York, 
Minnesota, the great northern lakes, and the many lakes 
in the great northern plain east of the Rocky Mountains, 
belong to this region. 

103. These lakes have been estimated to contain one- 
half of all the fresh water of the globe. Lake Superior 
contains about 32,000 square miles; Lake Michigan about 
22,400; Lake Huron, 21,000; Lake Erie, 10,815; Lake 
Ontario, 6,300. 

104. In Europe there are two lake regions. The one 
surrounds the Baltic Sea and its branches. To it belong 
the countless lakes of Finland, the great Ladogo and 
Onega lakes of Russia, the numerous small lakes in North- 
ern Germany, and those of Denmark and Sweden. The 
other lake region is that of the Alps, containing 426 lakes^ 
the largest of which lie along the base of this mountain 
system. 

105. They are the most extensive swamps on the globe^ 
and belong to Northern Russia and Siberia. These 
swamps are frozen to a great depth, and thawing during the 
summer months at the surface only : are covered with a 
dense covering of mosses. 

106. The color is generally a deep, bluish green, which 
becomes clearer near the coast. The depth depends upon 
the formation of the bottom, which, like the land, is diver- 
sified by mountains and valleys, high and low plains. The 
greatest depth in the region of the Atlantic Telegraph 
Cable is about 12,700 feet; in the South Atlantic, 25,000; 
in the Pacific, over 43,000 feet. The clearness and trans- 
parency vary in different localities. In the Arctic Ocean 
shells and animals are distinguished at a depth of 500 feet; 
around the Lesser Antilles objects are distinctly seen 150 



PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 271 

feet below the surface. Sea-water, in general, is more 
transparent than fresh water. 

107. By the presence of mineral substances, chiefly 
salt, sea-water becomes heavier. Fresh water congeals at 
32° Fahrenheit, sea-water at 2 8^4°. 

io8. It is due to myriads of minute animalcules which 
inhabit the water. 

109. There are four: The Gulf of Mexico, Hudson 
Bay, Mediterranean Sea, and the Baltic Sea, with the gulfs 
of Bothnia and Finland. 

no. Carribbean Sea, Gulf of St. Lawrence, North 
Sea, Behring Sea, Sea of Okhotsk, and the Japan, Yellow, 
and China seas. 

111. Experiments show an agitation from 450 to 620 
feet. 

112. The great tidal-wave rises less than three feet in 
mid-ocean, but when it strikes against the shores of conti- 
nents its altitude is much greater, varying according to the 
formation of the inlets, sometimes rising as high as seventy 
feet. 

113. This vast tidal swell or wave, probably originates 
southeast of Australia, and, like other waves, it is not an 
onward flow of water, except over shoals and near the land. 
The reason assigned for giving this point as the place of 
commencement, is, the position of the continents. Beyond 
this commencement extends the great ocean, which con- 
sists of the Antarctic, Pacific, and Indian Oceans. Over 
this vast water-area the flood-tide journeys westward around 
the earth, sweeping up against the iVfrican and Asiatic 
coasts into the Atlantic Ocean, and around Cape Horn in- 
to the Pacific Ocean. 

114. They are like vast rivers, transporting its waters 
from one part to another, and are caused by the heat of 
the sun, rotation of the earth, the saltness of the sea, by 



272 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

winds, tides, and melting ice. They are divided into con- 
stant, periodical and temporary. 

115. Those which continue for a limited time, and are 
caused by tides, melting ice, or gales of considerable dura- 
tion. 

116. Such as flow at regular intervals, and are occa- 
sioned by tides, and by periodical Avinds called monsoons. 

117. Those which flow throughout the entire year in the 
same direction, and have their origin in permanent causes. 
There are two kinds : polar currents, flowing from the poles 
to the equator, and equatorial currents flowing from east to 
west near the equator. The origin of constant currents may 
depend upon the rotation of the earth and enormous evapo- 
ration in the equatorial regions. B}^ the evaporation cur- 
rents are formed from beyond the equator to supply the 
loss, and by the rotation of the earth from west to east, the 
waters at the equator, where the velocity of the earth is 
greatest, are inclined to flow or slide to the west, which 
produce currents in an opposite direction from the motion 
of the earth. 

118. A stream which runs by the side of, or beneath 
another current, and in an opposite direction. 

119. Of the atmosphere, temperature, winds, and 
moisture (dews, fogs, rain, snow, and hail). 

120. It is composed of three gases, in the following 
proportion: Nitrogen, 76.84; Oxygen, 23.1; Carbonic 
Acid, 0.06. 

121. The quantity of sensible heat which a body 
possesses, as indicated by a thermometer. 

122. The direction and amount of the sun's rays, its 
vicinity to the sea, the prevailing winds to which it is ex- 
posed, and its elevation above the sea. 

123. In the tropical zone the limit is but one foot from 
the surface ; in the temperate zone it is from sixty to sev- 
enty feet; and in the frigid zone it is about fifty. 



PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 273 

124. In the tropical zone, it is, ])robably, about 7,200 
feet ; sixty degrees north and fifty-six degrees south lati- 
tude, it reaches the surface, and in seventy degrees about 
4,500 feet. 

125. The average amount of heat a place receives dur- 
ing the year. 

126. The variation is but little. The variable produce 
of our harvests is owing more to the change in the distribu- 
tion of heat through the different months, than to any differ- 
ence in the annual supply. 

127. Lines which are drawn through all places, which 
have nearly the same mean annual temperature. 

128. Six: the torrid, hot, w^arm, temperate, cold, and 
frigid. 

129. Air in motion. It is produced by the different 
amount of heat which the atmosphere receives in different 
localities. 

130. To the equatorial regions. 

131. Within the tropical regions the air is heated. It 
expands, becomes lighter, and rises. From both sides the 
colder air rushes in to restore the disturbed equilibrium, 
thus producing two lateral currents^ one from the north, 
the other froDi the south. But the air drawn by these cur- 
rents must be restored, else there would be an accumula- 
tion of atmosphere in these regions. This is effected by 
the ascending current, which, on reaching a certain eleva- 
tion is pressed outward, forming two return currents, one 
flowing to the north, the other to the south. It is by these 
currents, one asce?idhig curre?i/, two lateral polar cw'rents, 
and two returning equatorial currents^ that the general cir- 
culation is effected. 

132 They are the lateral polar currents, although the 
name is generally applied, only to that part of the currents 
between the equator and 30^ of latitude, where they be- 
come distinct surface winds. 



274 THE QUESTION BOOK.. 

133. The equatorial currents, which in the tropics flow 
high above the polar currents, become chilled in their tran- 
sit through the upper regions of the atmosphere, and have 
a tendency to descend, and intermingle with the polar cur- 
rents, which replace each other successively, thus prevent- 
ing constant currents above that latitude. 

134. They are northeast winds in the northern hemis- 
phere, and southeast winds in the southern hemisphere. The 
direction is due to the rotation of the earth, the velocity of 
the surface of the earth being greater as the polar currents: 
approach the equator, which cannot acquire, suddenly, the 
same velocity, and the earth moves under it, and the trades, 
in the northern hemisphere, by this reason blow from the 
northeast, instead of coming directly from the north. By a 
similar reason the equatorial currents flow in an opposite 
direction. As these currents commence to flow from the 
equator, they acquire the equatorial velocity, which can- 
not, suddenly, conform with the decreased velocity of the 
earth's surface as they approach the poles, but unlike the 
trades, which lag behind, they have acquired a velocity and 
flow beyond the meridian from which they started. 

135. Seven: the zone of cahns, the two zones of the 
trade-winds, the two subtropical zones, and the two zones 
of the variable winds. 

136. It extends from i^° to 11° north latitude. This 
place has the greatest mean annual temperature, conse- 
quently it is where the trade-winds cease, or rather, where 
they rise and flow back again as equatorial currents, thus 
producmg a series of calms. 

137. Those belts which lie between the summer and 
winter limits of the trade-zones. The trades prevail here 
during the summer, but in winter they recede, and the vari- 
able winds prevail. 

138. They extend from the limits of the sub-tropical 
zones to the poles 



PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 275 

139. Trade winds whose direction has been modified 
by the unequal heating of the land and sea. The name 
was originally restricted to periodical winds which blow in 
the Indian Ocean, blowing part of the year in one direc- 
tion, and part in the opposite. 

140. In the Indian Ocean, along the coast of Guinea, 
and in the Caribbean Sea and Gulf of Mexico. 

141. During the cooler months of the year, the mon- 
soons are the regular northeast trade-winds, but as the sun 
crosses the equator, and the continent of Asia becomes 
intensely heated, an ascending current results, and the 
trades are deflected and rush to the continent to restore 
the equilibrium, thus turning the trades in almost an oppo- 
site direction. A similar deviation i? also produced south 
of the equator when Australia becomes heated. 

142. The northeastern trades are deflected by the over- 
heated Mississippi valley, and like the trades of the Indian 
Ocean, they are bent to supply the demand on the conti- 
nent. 

143. Violent winds which sweep over the prairies of 
Texas and plains of Mexico. They prevail from October 
to March, and are considered as winter monsoons. 

144. Those winds which blow in summer from the sea to 
the land during the greater part of the day, and from the land 
to the sea at night ; they are caused by the different tem- 
perature of the land and water, the land being warmer 
than the water in the day, and colder at night. 

145. They are periodicals which blow on the Mediter- 
ranean Sea in summer, and owe their origin to the Sahara 
desert. 

146. The simoon, khamsin, harmattan, sirocco, and 
the solano. The simoon prevail on the deserts of Arabia, 
Nubia, Persia, and Syria; the khamsin blow in Egypt, but 
are not so oppressive as the simoon ; the sirocco is a well- 



276 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

known hot wind of Greece and Italy, and the solano of 
Spain, which owe their origin to the vicinity of the Sahara. 

147. The pamperos and bora. The pamperos are cold 
southwest winds which originate among the snows of the 
Andes, and sweep with great violence over the level pam- 
pas of South America. The bora is a northeast wind, com- 
mon on the eastern shores of the Gulf of Venice. 

148. A whirlwind is the meeting of two winds at an 
angle. Waterspouts are whirlings occurring on the sea or 
on lakes. They first appear in the form of an inverted cone 
attached to a dark cloud. The cone swings backward and 
forward, and gradually approaches the water, which be- 
comes violently agitated. The whirling eddy draws up 
masses of spray, which unite with the descending cone. 
When fully formed, they appear as tall pillars of cloud of 
sombre grey, stretching from the ?ea to the sky, whirling 
around an axis. They continue but for a short time, 
when the column breaks, and rain often descends from the 
cloud above. The drops of water forming this rain are 
never salt, as would be the case were they carried up from 
the ocean. They must, therefore, have been derived from 
the clouds, as in ordinary rain. 

149. As hurricanes, typhoons, cyclones, and tornadoes. 

150. In the West Indies, Indian Ocean, and the Chinese 
Sea. The wind revolves. 

151. They differ from the other tropical storms merely 
in their extent and duration. Their extent is quite limited, 
and their duration at any one place is seldom more than a 
few seconds. 

152. Dew is moisture collected on substances during 
the night. Hoar-frost is frozen dew. Fogs are masses of 
vapor resting on or near the surface of the earth. Clouds 
are masses of visible vapor, differing in no respect from 
fogs, except in position. Rain is water, which, originally 
taken up m the atmosphere in the form of vapor, is re- 



PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 277 

turned to the earth in drops. Snow is the frozen vapor of 
the atmosphere. 

153. As they are composed of alternate layers of snow 
and ice, it is supposed that the wind revolves around a 
horizontal axis, by means of which the moisture of the air 
is successively carried into warm and cold clouds. In the 
cold clouds the particles of snow are collected, and by the 
whirl are carried into rain clouds, where they receive a 
coating of water, which when returned to the cold cloud 
becomes ice. In this manner the hailstones grow rapidly 
in size, and are finally hurled to the ground. 

154. The cirrus, cumulus, stratus, and nimbus. The 
cirrus occupy the highest position in the atmosphere, and 
resemble a lock of hair, being composed of parallel streaks. 
The cumulus resemble a mountain of snow, and are most 
common in summer. The stratus consist of horizontal 
bands near the surface of the earth, and belong to the 
night. The nimbus is the rain-cloud, and much more 
dense than the others, although the others may be changed 
to the nimbus. 

155. Into rainless regions, regions of periodical rains, 
and regions of frequent rains. 

156. In the zone of calms, the zone of trade-winds, and 
the sub-tropical zones. 

157. In this zone it rains daily. The ascending cur- 
rent, hot and highly saturated, is cooled when it reaches 
greater elevations. In the afternoon, usually, a ring of 
clouds appear, and, accompanied by thunder and lightning, 
torrents of rain descend. 

158. These zones are characterized by almost constant 
serenity, and a deep-azure sky. But as the sun stands over 
the zenith during a part of the summer in these zones, it 
carries with it the calms and rains of the first zone. Hence 
the serenity of the trade-zones is interrupted by a brief 
rainy season during summer, while the winters are dry. 



278 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

159. They are characterized by dry summers and rainy 
winters. This is due to the trades which prevail there dup 
ing the summer, and absorb rather than bring moisture. 
During the winter tlie variable winds prevail, and bring the 
irregular rains of the temperate regions. A large portion 
of the United States lies within this zone, and would have 
dry summers if it were not for the monsoons occasionally 
blowing from the Mexican Gulf far inland, and bringing 
thunder storms. 

160. A part of the temperate zone and the frigid. 

161. They lie almost entirely within the zones of the 
trade-winds. 

162. The trade-winds coming across the entire conti- 
nent, are intercepted by the Andes Mountains, and are 
forced to ascend their slopes, where they meet the cold 
air, which condenses their vapor, and the rain flows down 
the eastern slopes. The wind passes over the crest and 
reaches the western slopes dry and vaporless. 

163. The greater part would be a barren desert. 

164. The trade-wind is here deprived of its vapor by 
the Plateau of Anahuac. 

165. The Great Desert, Arabia and Persia. The trades 
prevail here, but have lost their moisture on the passage 
across the mountains and plateaus of High Asia. 

166. It is found to be in the Himalayas, which intercept 
the prevailing southwest winds, and deprive them of almost 
all their moisture. 

167. In the tropics of the New World. Thisamountis 
about 115 inches, while in the tro])ics of the Old World the 
fall is about 77 inches. In the temperate parts of the Old 
World, 34 inches fall; in the New World 35 inches. 

168. On the Khasia Hills, in Farther India, which face 
the Bay of Bengal and receive winds heavily laden with 
vapor on their passage over the Indian Ocean. The an- 
nual fall is about 50 feet. 



PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY. 279 

169. Tho latitude of a place; its height above the level 
of the sea; the position and direction of the mountain 
chains; its distance from the sea; the slope of the country; 
the character of the soil; the degree of cultivation and 
density of population ; and the quantity of rain that falls. 

1 70. Oceanic and continental. Those regions which 
are open to the influence of the ocean are moist and mild, 
while those which are removed from the influence are com- 
monly dry and suffer to great excesses of heat and cold. 

171. A country covered with a barren, sandy soil is 
subject to great and rapid changes in its temperature, 
owing to the readiness with which it receives and parts with 
heat, while marshy lands, or lands covered with forests or 
vegetation, are more salubrious. 

172. It is owing to the eastern or trade-winds which 
prevail, they having been deprived of moisture by crossing 
the continent and meeting the Rocky and Sierra Nevada 
Mountains. The westerly winds prevail from December 
to May, which produces the rainy season. 

173. It is that department of Physical Geography 
which treats of all vegetable and animal life. 

174. Botanical (xcography, Zoological Geography, and 
Ethnography. 

175. Botanical Geography treats of the different divis- 
ions of the vegetable kingdom and their geographical dis- 
tribution. 

176. Moisture, in the form of rain or dew. 

177. The deserts of Gobi and Arabian in Asia, the 
Sahara in Africa, and the Atacama on the western slope of 
the Andes. 

1 78. Into the cryptogamous (flowerless), and the phen- 
ogamous (flowering). 

T 79. The mosses, lichens, fungi, ferns, and sea weeds. 
1 80. Into two classes : the endogenous and the exoge- 
nous. 



280 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

i8i. The endogenous are those plants which increase 
from within, as grasses, sugar-cane, corn, etc. The exo- 
genous are those which increase by coatings from without, 
as the trees of the forest, etc. 

182. It is estimated that there are about 250,000 dis- 
tinct plant species upon the earth. Less than half of these 
have been described by botanists. 

183. The lichens, alg^, and mosses. 

184. Lichens cover the rocks in tropical deserts and in 
the regions of ice or snow. They are the most widely dis- 
tributed class of plants. Alg^ are sea and fresh water 
weeds, of the most varying forms and colors. wSome attain 
an enormous size. One species, growing in the Straits of 
Magellan and near the Falkland Islands, is often 400 feet 
long. Mosses are also found in all zones, wherever mois- 
ture is abundant. In our forests they are quite common. 

185. The palms. The tall and slender shaft rears on 
high its crown of shining, fan-like leaves. Some are nearly 
200 feet high. They require a mean annual temperature 
of 78° to 82°, Fahrenheit, and occur, therefore, chiefly in 
the hottest parts of the tropical zone. 

186. Rice, bananas, bread-fruit, dates, cocoanuts, yams, 
cassava and sago. 

187. Bananas are the fruits of tropical plants. This 
plant rises 15 or 20 feet high, with leaves six feet long and 
a foot broad. The fruit is four or five inches long, and an 
inch or more in diameter. They grow in large bunches, 
weighing a dozen pounds or more. Bread-fruit is produced 
by the bread-fruit tree, which grows in the isles of the Pa- 
cific Ocean, of the size of the common apple tree. The 
fruit is of a round or oval shape, as large as a small loaf of 
bread, which is eaten as food. Dates are a delicious fruit, 
produced by the date-palm of Asia and Africa. Cocoanuts 
are the fruits of the cocoa tree. These nuts hang in clus- 
ters of a dozen each, on the top of the tree, and are bound 



189 

190 
191 
192 



PHYSICAL GKOGRAPHY. 281 

together by tough, stringy filaments. Yams are roots re- 
sembling the potato, and are cultivated in a similar man- 
ner. Cassava is a kind of bread made from the roots of 
the cassada plant. Sago is obtained from the pith of sev- 
eral species of palm trees, which form entire forests in 
many of the Spice Islands. The pith is prepared into sago- 
meal by mixing it with water and straining. A tree com- 
anonly yields from 300 to 500 pounds. 

188. Wheat, potatoes, corn, rye, oats, and barley. 

Cotton, hemp, and flax. 

Pepper, cinnamon, cloves, nutmegs, and vanilla. 

Tobacco, opium, betel, and haschish. 

Opium is prepared from a specie of poppy, and 
is very extensively used in China and Turkey. The betel 
plant is a climbing shrub, which grows in Hindostan and 
the islands of the Indian Ocean. The leaves are used by 
the natives as tobacco. Haschish is a powerful narcotic, 
obtained from a specie of hemp-wort, and is used in India 
to produce intoxication. 

193. That department of physical geography which 
treats of the divisions of the animal kingdom and its 
geographical distribution. 

194. Into four classes: vertebrates, mollusks, articu- 
lates, and radiates. 

195. This division includes all animals which have an 
internal skeleton joined to the backbone. It comprises 
four classes: i. Mammalia; 2. Birds; 3. Reptiles; 4. 
Fishes. 

196. Mollusks are animals of soft texture, and have no 
skeleton ; as the oyster, snail, and mussel. Articulates are 
animals consisting of a number of joints or rings, soft or 
hard, supplymg the place of a skeleton; as the lobster, 
worms, spiders, and insects. Radiates are so called be- 
cause in many cases their organs are arranged like rays 



282 THE QUESTION KOOK. 

proceeding from a center. The coral and microscopic 
animals belong to this division. 

197. They are the most perfect of the animal creation. 
They differ greatly in appearance and habits, but corre- 
spond in the one particular of suckhng their young. They 
number about 3,000 species. 

198. Into eight classes: Quadrumana (four-handed), 
monkey, ape; carnivora (flesh-eaters), bear, cat, dog; 
Marsupialia (pouched), opossum, kangaroo; rodentia 
(gnawers), beaver, squirrel, rat; edentata (toothless)^ sloth, 
armadillo; pachydermata (thick-skinned), elephant, horse, 
hog; ruminantia (chewing the cud), camel, ox, sheep; 
marine mammalia, whale, dolphin, seal. 

199. It treats of the varieties of the human race, their 
physical and intellectual characteristics, and their geograph- 
ical distribution on the earth. 



QUESTIONS 

ON 

AV R I T I N G 



1. Define Writing. 

2. What are the principal subjects to which attention 
should be given in teaching or learning the art of writing ? 

3. How many kinds of positions are recommendable^ 
and what are they ? 

4. Describe the " left " position. 

5. Under what circumstances is the left position gen- 
erally used, and used with advantage ? 

6. Describe the " front " position. 

7. What particular advantage has the front position ? 

8. Describe the "right-oblique" position. 

9. Describe the "right" position. 

10. What special caution should be kept in view in each 
and all of the above-mentioned positions ? 

11. Describe the manner of holding the pen. 

12. What is meant by movement ? 

13. How many kinds of movements are usually em- 
ployed in writing, and what are they ? 

14. Give a description of each, and state under what 
circumstances employed. 

15. What is meant hy form ? 

16. In what manner does a careful study oi form aid in 
making a good penman ? 



284 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

17. What is a line? 

iS. How many kinds of lines are used in writing, and 
what are they? 

19. How many kinds of curves are used in writing, and 
•define each. 

20. Define horizontal, vertical and oblique lines. 

21. When are Imes parallel ? 

22. What is meant by "base" line? By head line? 
By top line ? 

23. What is an angle? 

24. How many kinds are used in writing? Define each. 

25. What is a degree ? 

26. What is meant by a slant of 52^? Of 30°? 

27. What is meant by main slant? Connecting slant? 

28. In how many ways are the strokes of the pen united 
in forming letters ? 

29. What is the unit for measuring the height of letters? 
The width? 

30. W^hat letters are but one space in height ? 

31. What is the height of r and j? 

32. A part of what other letter has a similar height? 

33. What is the height of /, d and/? 

34. How far do/ and q extend below the line? 

35. What letters extend two spaces below the line? 

36. What letters extend three spaces above the line ? 

37. What is meant by principles ? 

T^^. What is the object of the study and practice of 
principles, as such, when learning to write? 

39. In what other way may we assist the mind in obtain- 
ing a true idea or picture of the form of letters ? 

40. What is meant by the analysis of letters ? 

41. Where should we begin in forming the small letters? 
A^Tiere end? 



/ 



WRITING. 



285 



42. What capitals should be commenced three spaces. 
above the base line ? 

43. Which begin on the base line ? 

44. W^hich are commenced less than three spaces above 
the base line ? 

45. VV^hat is meant by spacing ? 

46. What space should be allowed between letters in a 
word ? 

47. To what distance is the connecting line carried in. 
writing letters with 3, dy g or q} 

48. When an oval is joined to a straight line, as in on,. 
from what points is the measurement taken ? 

49. When an oval is joined to an oval, as in 00, how is 
the measurement taken ? 

50. What space is allowed between capitals and first 
curve of small letter following it, where the capital does not 
join with the small letter ? 

51. What space is allowed between capitals used as 
initial letters ? 

52. What space is allowed between words? 

53. What space is allowed when following word begins 
with a capital ? 

54. When one word ends with a right curve and the 
next begins with a left, or vice versa, what space is left? 

55. What space is allowed between sentences? 

56. What space is allowed between figures ? 

57. What is meant by shading? 

58. What letters should not ordinarily be shaded ? 

59. Where should the shade occur in t and d ? 

60. How should / be shaded ? 

61. How should / be shaded? 

62. Where should the shade occur in b and // In k 
and k? 



286 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

6;^. When two or more letters requiring similar shading 
occur together, what rule should be observed ? 

64. What capital letters should be shaded on the first 
curve ? On the second curve ? 

65. Which should receive shade on the capital stem? 

66. What letters receive shading below the base line? 

67. What are figures ? 

68. How are figures formed? 

69. What is the height of figures as compared with 
letters ? 

70. On what slant are figures written ? 

71. How far do the figures 7 and 9 extend below the 
line? 

72. What is the width of the figures? 

73. Where is the stroke commenced in forming the 
figures ? 



ANSWERS 

TO 

Questions on "Writing. 



1. The art of expressing thought in legible characters; 
to "form for the conveyance of meaning." 

2. Position; manner of holding pen ; movement; form; 
rate ; spacing and shading. 

3. Four—" left," " front," " right-oblique," and " right." 

4. Sit, or stand, with the left side inclined toward the 
desk, the left arm lying on the book or paper, weight of 
body supported mainly by the left side, and right arm, as 
well as book or paper, at right-angles to the desk. 

5. When writing in large books, or when it is impossible 
or inconvenient to turn the paper obliquely. 

6. Sit, or stand, directly facing the desk, near it, but 
not leaning over it; the forearms both on the desk and 
nearly at right angles to each other, the left holding in place 
the book or paper, which should be inclined so that the 
lines meet the right fore arm at right-angles. 

7. The weight of the body is not thrown to either side 
(in any other it is thrown upon one side or the other) ; and 
hence this position is best adapted to resist fatigue of the 
bodily muscles. 

8. Sit, or stand, with right side inclined towards the 
desk, right forearm resting wholly on the desk, left partially, 
and the copy placed obliquely on the desk. The weight of 
the head and shoulders is thrown on the left side. 



288 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

9. Sit, or stand, with right side turned to the desk, but 
not in contact with it, the right forearm as well as the copy, 
being on the desk parallel with its edge ; copy held in place 
by the fingers of the left hand. 

10. Keep the body erect; by no means permit the head 
to drop forward over the paper. Teachers should exercise 
the greatest care in this respect over those placed in their 
charge. 

1 1 . There is considerable dispute in regard to this, but 
the manner most practiced by business men and taught in 
most of our commercial colleges is the one given by Mr. 
Spencer, viz : hold pen between first two fingers and thumb, 
the holder crossing the fore-finger in front of the knuckle- 
joint and the second fifiger at the root of the nail; the end 
of the thumb touching the holder opposite the lower joint 
of the first finger. The other fingers should separate from 
first two at the middle joint and curve so that the ends of 
the nails rest upon the paper. 

1 2. The proper motion of the muscles of the shoulder^ 
arm and hand in writing. 

13. Two : combined and whole-arm. 

14. The combined movement is the motion of the mus- 
cles cf the forearm and fingers together, resting upon the 
elbow and the nails of the third and fourth fingers ; used in 
ordinary writing. The whole-arm movement is a motion of 
the muscles of the whole arm and shoulder, resting upon 
the nails of the third and fourth fingers and upon the point 
of the pen; used in making large capitals, flourishes, and in 
blackboard exercise. The wrist-joint should in all cases be 
kept free. 

15. The exact shape and appearance of a character 
representing a thought preconceived in the mind. 

16. The mind directs the action of the muscles, and as 



WRITING. 289 

writing is a result of muscular action, the mind must have 
a clear, concise and ready conception of what it wishes the 
muscles to do, before the action can be realized. 

17. A point moving in any direction leaves a path called 
a line. 

18. Two, — straight and curved. A straight line is the 
path of a point moving in but one direction ; a curved line 
is the path of a point constantly changing its direction. 

19. Two, — right and left. A right curve bends to the 
right of a straight line connecting its extremities; while a 
left curve bends to the left. 

20. A line parallel to the horizon ; a line at right-angles 
to the horizon ; a line neither horizontal nor vertical. 

21. When they are equi-distant, with respect to each 
other, throughout their entire length. 

22. The line upon which the letter rests. The line, real 
or imaginary, that bounds the height of the small letters, or 
those but one space in height. The line that bounds the 
height of the extended letters, or those three spaces in 
height. 

23. The space between two lines meeting in a point. 

24. Two, — right and acute. A right angle is formed by 
a right line meeting another perpendicularly. An acute 
angle is one smaller than a right angle. 

25. A three hundred sixtieth part of the circumference 
of a circle. 

26. If from the centre of a circle a vertical and a hor- 
izontal line be drawn, meeting the circumference, and the 
smaller of the two arcs thus made be divided into ninety 
equal parts or degrees, a line drawn from a point on this 
arc 52° from where the arc meets the horizontal line, to the 
centre of the circle, is said to be on a slant of 52^. One 

19 



290 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

drawn similarly from a point 30° above the horizontal is 
said to have a slant of 30°. 

27. A slant of 52°, so called because the main or down- 
ward strokes of written letters have this slant. A slant of 
30°, so called because generally used in upward or connect- 
ing strokes. 

28. Three: by angular juncture, as in the upper part of 
small /; by short curves, as at the base of small /; and by 
oval turns, as in large O. 

29. The height of small /, commonly called a space. 
The horizontal distance between the two straight lines in 
the letter u. 

30. ^, ^, .?, i, Z/^, ;;, o^ //, v^ w and x. 

31. One and one-fourth spaces. 

32. The final part, or small oval of the letter k. 
-^2^- Two spaces. 

34. One and one-half spaces. 

2,6. b,f^ h^ k, /, and all the capitals. 

37. Lines of a certain and established form, by combi- 
nations of which all letters may be formed. 

38. I. By simplifying the forms of letters. 2. By teach- 
ing both mind and muscle this simplified form. 3. By 
giving a standard for uniformity. 4. By educating the 
taste to more pleasing proportions in the parts of letters. 

39. By analysis. 

40. To analyze a letter is to name the separate princi- 
ples employed in its construction, and to state their position 
and manner of connection. 

41. On the base line always. One space above the base 
line. 

42. A, E, M, N, O. Q. 



WRITING. 291 

43. C, G, H, I, J, K, L, M, N, Q, S, U, V, W, X, 
Y,Z. 

44. B, D, F, P, R, T, which begin two and one-half 
spaces above base Hne. D begins two spaces above. 

45. The proper distance left between letters, words or 
sentences. 

46. One and one-fourth spaces. 

47. Two spaces from the last straight line of the con- 
necting letter. Write the words, name^ cinque^ and notice 
the required distance from the bottom of the downward 
stroke of ;/ and the connecting point of a and q. 

48. From the middle of the oval to the straight line of 
the following letter. 

49. From the middle of first oval to the left side of 
second oval. 

50. One-fourth space, recrossing from base of capital. 

51. One space. 

52. Two spaces. 

53. The extreme left point of the capital should be one 
and one-half spaces from the last downward stroke of pre- 
ceding word. 

54. Between the straight lines, two and one-third spaces; 
between curves, one and one-third spaces ; between final 
downward stroke of first and beginning of curve for next 
word, one and one-half spaces. 

55. Three spaces. 

56. One-third of a space. 

57. A proper use of light and heavy strokes, the latter 
formed by^a gently-increasing pressure upon the points of 
the pen, being held and moved so that the pressure is con- 
stantly alike on both points, until the middle of the stroke 
desired to be shaded is reached, and then as gently release 
the pressure as it was increased until the stroke is complete. 



292 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

58. All the letters but one space in height except a^ 
which should receive a slight shade on first downward 
curve. 

59. The heaviest shade should be at the top of the last 
downward stroke. 

60. Shade should commence at base line and gradually 
increased to the end of the downward stroke. 

61. Only on that part of the downward stroke which is 
below the line. 

62. On the lower half of the first downward stroke. On 
last downward stroke only. 

63. The last should receive but half as much shade as 
the first one. 

64. A, C, D, E, O, Q, H, Z, Q, U, V, W, Y. 

(>S' A, B, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M, N, P, R, S, T. 
(id. /and/ only. 

67. Characters to represent numbers. 
6^. The same as letters, from a combination of straight 
and curved lines according to set principles. 

69. One and one-half spaces, except the 6, which is two 
spaces in height. 

70. A slant of 52°. 

71. One and one-half spaces. 

72. They a:^ all one space in width, measured at the 
widest part, excep the 1 and 0. The is but one space in 
width. 

73. At the upper c Iremity. 

[For a thorough understandii. • of the "principles" of writing, see any 
Spencerian copy book. Any system of principles is preferable to mere draw- 
ing. Our preference is for the Spencerian system, making all the letters of 
the alphabet, both small and capital, from the combination of seven primary 
principles. Unless those seven " principles '' are studied by the student,, 
the above questions will be almost useless for instruction.— Author.] 



QUESTIONS 



ON 



Parliamentary Rules. 



1. What are Parliamentary Rules? 

2. From what source did we derive these recognized 
rules ? 

3. Are these rules binding upon the people in their 
assemblies ? 

4. Are these changes often made? 

5. How is an assembly of the people called into an 
organized body ? 

^ Does this election of officers constitute the permanent 
organization of the assembly? 

7. How is the new organization usually taken up and 



acted upon ? 



8. Under such circumstances is it usual to proceed in 
the election of permanent officers in the same manner as 
adopted in the election of temporary ones? 

9. By what name is the presiding officer recognized? 

10. What name is applied to the recording officer? 

n. Who are entitled to participate in the proceedings of 
any assembly? 

12. How are these electors or representatives recognized 
as lawful members of any assembly? 

13. What are credentials ? How obtained? 



294 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

14. When are the credentials or certificates of member- 
ship examined and acted upon ? 

15. When rival claims are presented, how proceed? 

16. Do the contesting members have the privileges of 
other members during the discussion of rights? 

17. Does it become necessary that the president or clerk 
shall be a member of the assembly? 

18. In our numerous societies and associations, what 
offices are usually sustained ? 

19. When an assembly has rightfully appropriated a 
room or place for its session, how can it protect itself from 
disorderly or improper conduct of any member or any per- 
son not entitled to be therein? 

20. How is the judgment, opinion, sense or will of a 
deliberative assembly expressed? 

21. What is a quorum ? 

22. What number constitutes a quorum? 

23. What is the duty of the presiding officer in regard 
to a quorum? 

24. By what are the various organized assemblies of the 
people governed? 

25. How are changes made in the rules of any organ- 
ization. 

26. When adopted rules are disregarded or infringed 
upon, whose duty is it to take notice thereof? 

27. Suppose it is not the sentiment or wish of the assem- 
bly chat a particular rule be enforced? 

28. How avoid any future enforcement of distasteful 
rules ? 

29. In taking a vote on any question does it always 
require a majority to pass the question? 

30. What are the duties of the presiding officer? 



PARLIAMENTARY RULES. 295 

31. In the absence of the president and vice-president, 
whose duty is it to preside ? 

32. Does the officer-elect have the same power confer- 
red upon him as upon the regular officer? 

;^^. What is pro tempore? 

34. In addressing an assembly does the presiding officer 
rise? 

35. Wha^ is the duty of the recording officer? 

' 36. What position should the secretary or clerk assume 
while reading or calling the assembly? 

2y^. What are the rights and duties of members of any 
assembly ? 

38. In cases of irregular or disorderly conduct how pro- 
ceed? 

39. What punishment can be inflicted upon a member 
for wilfully violating the rules of the assembly ? 

40. Whenever a member desires to address the assembly, 
whether for debate or for the introduction of any commu- 
nication, how proceed ? 

41. When two or more persons rise at the same time, or 
nearly so, and desire to address the assembly, how shall the 
presiding officer decide who shall be first heard ? 

42. Should this decision be called in question by any 
member saying that in his opinion such a member is enti- 
ded to the floor, what must be done? 

43. What are communications? 

44. What are motions? Questions? 

45. How prepare a petition for presentation? 

46. What is the duty of a member presenting a petition? 

47. What deviation is usually practiced from this regular 
method of proceeding? 

48. When petitions, or other similar subjects are before 
the assembly for action, how are they usually disposed of? 



296 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

49. When any question is ordered to lie on the table, 
when does it again come before the assembly? 

50. Whenever a member introduces a proposition of his 
own for the consideration of the assembly, how obtain the 
action of the assembly ? 

51. As motions are usually made orally, what indulgence 
is extended to the mover by the presiding officer? 

52. When a motion is made and it receives no second, 
does it command any further attention of the assembly ? 

53. When is a motion in the possession of the assembly? 

54. After a motion has been stated by the presiding 
officer, can the mover withdraw it from the assembly ? 

55. What is the duty of the presiding officer in regard 
to stating a motion when called upon to do so by any mem- 
ber? 

56. When a motion is before the assembly, can another 
motion be made and acted upon ? 

57. Are members allowed to make remarks when there 
is no question before the house? 

58. When a proposition is made and the assembly is not 
willing to give it attention at that time, how dispose of the 
question ? 

59. When a motion is under debate, what questions can 
be received? 

60. What is \^iQ previous questmi? 

61. What are the objects of the mover to make a mo- 
tion for the previous question ? 

62. What is the result of an indefinite postponement? 

63. When should motions to postpone be made? 

64. What are motions to commit ? 

6^. What authority has the committee thus appointed? 
66. Can more than one committee be appointed to per- 
fect any proposition? 



PARLIAMENTARY RULES. 297 

67. What are motions to amend? 

68. What is the division of a question? 

69. When a motion is thus divided, what becomes of it? 

70. Are these divisions open to amendment? 

71. What must be the condition of a proposition to 
admit of a division? 

72. In legislative bodies propositions are known as 
fiU'mg bla?iks ; how are such propositions presented and how 
acted upon? 

"jT,. In JiUi)ig blanks in a motion, does it require sep- 
arate action for each blank filled, and are such motions 
amendments? 

74. What are the terms additioji^ separation and transpo- 
sition^ as they are used in legislative assemblies? 

75. After an amendment has been stated by the presid- 
ing officer, can the mover change this question ? 

76. When an amendment is proposed and the mover of 
the original question signifies his consent to it, what digres- 
sion is often practiced ? 

77. In how many ways is the form of a question affected 
by amendments? 

78. As all forms of amendments are subject to certain 
general rules, explain how these rules should be classified? 

79. What is the First Rule? Second Rule? Third 
Rule? Fourth Rule? Fifth Rule? 

80. In Rule Fifth, if the proposition is fit for rejection 
by the assembly, why not be suppressed by the presiding 
officer? 

Si. When an amendment is made by striking out a par- 
ticular paragraph or certain words, and the amendment is 
rejected, can it again be moved to strike out the same words 
or a part of them? 

82. When a question has been moved to amend, or an 



298 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

amendment to an amendment, how shall the presiding 
officer proceed in stating the question ? 

S;^. In the third form of amending by striking out and 
inserting, how proceed ? 

84. When a motion to strike out and insert is carried, 
what changes can be made ? 

85. What is the manner of stating a question which is 
required to be amended by striking out, or inserting, or 
striking out and inserting other words? 

86. Can an amendment be made which will destroy the 
entire original motion ? 

87. In deliberative assemblies, what motions can be 
made and take the place of a regular question ? 

8S. Is a motion for adjournment always in order? 

89. In order to entitle this motion to precedence over 
any before the assembly, how must it be given ? 

90. Can a motion to adjourn be amended ? 

91. When an assembly is adjourned without any partic- 
ular day or time, when does it assemble again ? 

92. When a question is interrupted by an adjournment 
and before any vote or question has been taken upon it, 
does it stand before the assembly at the next day of meet- 
ing? 

93. To what do the questions of privilege relate? 

94. What are the orders of the day? 

95. When does the question for the orders of the day 
arise ? 

96. When the orders of the day is decided in the affirm- 
ative, how proceed ? 

97. W^hat becomes of the original motion when inter- 
rupted by the orders of the day? 

98. If the question is decided in the negative, what busi- 
ness can the assembly act upon? 



PARLIAMENTARY RULES. 



599. 



99. If the business relating to the orders of the day is 
not disposed of on the day assigned, what becomes of it? 

100. What are incide?ital qnestio?is? 

1 01. How are incidental questions divided? 

102. What is the duty of the presiding officer in relation 
to qnestio7is of order? 

103. Can the presiding officer be questioned in regard 
to his decision of a breach of order or departure from rule ? 

104. What is appealing (vom the decision of the chair? 

105. When an appeal is made, how state it to the 
assembly ? 

106. What is the rule in regard to reading papers P 

107. When in the course of a debate, or other proceed- 
ing, the reading of a paper is called for and an objection is. 
made upon it, how proceed ? 

108. When a motion has been regularly made and 
stated, can it be withdrawn ? 

109. What is the suspension of a ride? 
In the suspension of a rule does a majority vote 

How treat an amendment of an amendment? 
What are subsidiary questions? 
How are the subsidiary motions classified? 
Which of the subsidiary questions admit of nO' 
amendment ? 

1 15. Why do these questions not admit of amendment? 

1 1 6. When is a motion to lay on the table used ? 

117. When a question is ordered to lie on the table, 
how and when can it be recalled? 

118. If the motion to lay on the table is decided in the 
negative, does it affect the business before the house? 

119. \^\\QVi\)ci^ previous question IS ri\QM^^^ can another 
motion be made to prevent its action ? 



no. 


decide ? 


III. 


112. 


113- 


114. 



^OO THE QUESTION BOOK. 

1 20. When the previous question is decided in the neg- 
ative, what becomes of the original motion ? 

121. How are questions for postponement considered? 

122. Can this question be amended? 

123. When the motion for an amendment to some 
•other day is rejected, how can a change of day be obtained ? 

124. If the motion for postponement is decided in the 
negative, what other means can be resorted to for suppress- 
ing it ? 

125. If a motion for commitment is decided in the 
.affirmative, can the previous question, or postponement, be 
then used? 

126. How may a motion to commit, or recommit, be 
amended ? 

127. What motion supersedes all the other subsidiary 
questions ? 

128. Of these subsidiary questions, what one can be 
.superseded by others ? 

1 29. By what reasoning are the motions for postpone- 
ment to a day certam and commitment allowed to super- 
sede a proposed amendment ? 

130. How should business be brought before an 
assembly ? 

131. When two or more subjects are placed on the 
table and no priority has been given to one over another, 
which should command the attention of the asseniLly first ? 

132. When any paper, which consists of several distinct 
propositions, is presented for the action of the assembly, 
how proceed in the most appropriate manner ? 

^33' Where a paper consists of a preamble or title, does 
it become proper to proceed first with the heading ? 

134. When a paper has been referred to a committee, 



PARLIAMENTARY RULES. 3OI 

and is reported back to the assembly, how is it taken up for 
consideration ? 

135. When the resolutions or articles of the committee 
have been thus agreed upon, how enter the final question, 
upon the records of the assembly ? 

136. When the paper referred to a committee is reported 
back in a new draft, which is often done when numerous 
changes are made, how is the new draft considered ? 

137. Give an example of how questions may grow out 
of one another, and in what order they may be decided. 

138. In a case like the preceding example we have six 
questions before the assembly at one time ; how dispose of 
them ? 

139. When is a proposition in order for any member to 
discuss it ? 

140. What abusive proceeding is sometimes allowed in 
the moving of subsidiary motions ? 

f4i. Under such circumstances, what is the duty of the 
presiding officer ? 

142. When a member has obtained the floor, what, 
right belongs to him ? 

143. Can he be interrupted in his speech by any other 
member rising and moving an adjournment, or for the 
orders of the day, or by making any other privileged 
motion ? 

144. When a member has the floor and calls are made 
for adjournment, or the orders of the day, or for the ques- 
tion, how are such calls to be considered? 

145. After a motion has been made, seconded and pro- 
posed, to whom is it customary to give the floor on open- 
ing the debate ? 

146. Has a member the right to discuss a subject before 
it is moved ? 



202 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

147. What is the duty of a person in speaking in regard 
to mentioning the name of a member then present ? 

148. When the presiding officer rises to speak, at the 
same time as another member, what shall be the duty of 
that member? 

149. How long is a member permitted to speak on any 
subject ? 

150. What are the rules in regard to speaking? 

151. Does the introduction of a subsidiary motion 
restrain debate on the general question ? 

152. When a member is called to order for departing 
from the subject under consideration, what privilege may be 
extended to him ? 

153. How many times can a member speak upon the 
same subject under debate? 

154. On what points may a member speak a second 
time in the same debate? 

155. What is the meaning of the phrase "to clear a 
matter of fact"? 

156. When a member wishes to make an explanation 
while another is speaking, and the speaker yields the floor 
for an explanation, does the speaker have the right to the 
floor after the explanation has been given ? 

157. What methods do assemblies adopt to prevent a 
continuation of lengthy and unprofitable debates ? 

1 58. When an assembly will not support the presiding 
officer' in his eftbrts to maintain order and decorum, what 
will he be justified in doing? 

I £59. When disorderly words are used in speaking, which 
are personally offensive or insulting to another, or to the 
assembly, how proceed to check its continuation ? 

160. If offensive words are not taken notice of at the 
time spoken, or immediately after the speaker has finished, 



PARLIAMENTARY RULES. 



303 



has any member the right to censure the member before the 
assembly ? 

161. What is the order ^ resolution^ or vote of the assem- 
bly ? 

162. In stating a question to an assembly, is it neces- 
sary for the presiding officer to give it in the precise form 
proposed ? 

163. In matters of trifling importance, such as receiving 
petitions and reports, withdrawing motions, reading papers, 
etc., what form is often used in disposing of them ? 

164. What is the form used by the presiding officer in 
putting a question to the assembly ? 

165. If the presiding officer is unable to decide the 
vote, or, after deciding according to his judgment, any 
member rises and says, I doubt the vote^ what must be done? 

166. If the assembly is equally divided on any ques- 
tion, how decide ? 

167. Is it the duty of the presiding officer to give the 
casting vote ? 

168. After the affirmative side of the question has been 
put and voting commenced, is it open to debate? 

169. What objects can be accomplished by an interrup- 
tion as above described ? 

170. When a question is taken by yeas and nays, the 
negative and affirmative taken at the same time, why can 
there be no opening of the debate as in other cases? 

171. When, during a division, objections arise concern- 
ing the right of any member to vote, how settle the objec- 
tion ? 

172. Suppose, in counting the assembly on a division, 
it appears that there is not a quorum present, what shall 
be done ? 

173. What is a motion for reconsideration ? 



304 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

174. Who has a right to make a motion to reconsider? 

175. Of what use are committees? 

176. What are the powers of a committee? 

177. What names are usually applied to the different 
committees ? 

1 78. In appointing a committee, how proceed? 

179. How select a committee by ballot? 

I So. How elect by nomination and vote? 

181. When a subject is referred to a committee, what 
custom is usually adopted in the selection of that commit- 
tee? 

182. What is the duty of the secretary in regard to com- 
mittees? 

183. Who is the chairman of a committee? 

184. When and where does a committee meet for the 
transaction of business? 

185. Can a committee transact business without the 
attendance of all the members? 

186. If a committee fails to meet at the particular time, 
as ordered by the assembly, what is the result ? 

187. If disorderly words are spoken in a committee, 
what is to be done? 

188. What is the difference of the actions of a commit- 
tee on a paper originating with, and one referred to them? 

189. If a committee is opposed to the whole paper 
referred to them, can they reject it? 

190. What should be the appearance of a paper originat- 
ting with a committee and reported to the assembly ? 

191. How should a committee treat a paper referred 
to it? 

192. When the committee has finished its work, what 
move is next in order? 



PARLIAMENTARY RULES. 



305 



193. When the report of a committee is to be made, 
how proceed ? 

194. If the report is deferred to some future time, what 
is the manner of then disposing of it? 

195. If the report is of a paper with amendments, how 
proceed ? 

196. Is a motion and vote necessary in accepting a 
report ? 

197. When a report is of considerable length, how is it 
usually presented to the members for their inspection ? 

198. ^Vhen is a committee dissolved? 

199. What is meant by recommitting a subject ? 

200. Does the action of a committee have any bearing 
upon a subject recommitted ? 

201. In how many forms may the report of- a committee 
be presented? 

202. W^hen the report of a committee is accepted, how 
is it regarded by the assembly ? 

203. Do the terms accepting 3.\\A adopting hdiWQ the same 
meaning? 

204. What is a committee of the whole P 

205. How resolve an assembly into a committee of the 
whole ? 

206. What number is required to constitute a quo' um ? 

207. If at any time the number present fail? oelow a 
quorum, what is the duty of the committee? 

208. Who acts as clerk in recording the business trans- 
acted by a committee of the whole ? 

209. How are the records of this committee kept? 

210. What is the difference between the proceedings of 
the assembly and the committee of the whole? 

211. How avoid an improper discussion, which in the 

assembly can be governed by the previous question ? 
20 



3o6 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

212. If the business of the committee is not concluded 
at the usual time for the assembly to adjourn, or if the com- 
mittee have other reasons for not continuing, how shall they 
proceed ? 

213. What is a sub-committee ? 

214. Is the formality of a motion and question ever 
dispensed with as to the time of receiving a report ? 

215. What especial duty should be imposed upon every 
presiding officer in the discharge of business ? 



ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS 

ON 

Parliamentary Rules. 



1. A recognized code of systematic regulations, by 
which the people may be assembled for deliberation, and 
governed accordingly. 

2. From the British Parliament. 

3. Not binding, although this universal custom becomes 
a general law, changed only when legislative bodies shall so 
specify. 

4. Not in the common assembling of the people. In 
the legislative branches of our government a different system 
of particular rules have been established, yet founded in 
and embracing all the essential rules of the common par- 
liamentary law. 

5. There being no organization, it is effected by some 
individual in the assembly requesting the meeting to come 
to order for the transaction of the business calling them 
together. He also requests that some person be nom- 
inated for presiding officer. Such nomination being made, 
he puts the question for a vote of the assembly. Should 
the nominee be rejected, other nominations are made, until 
a choice is effected, whereupon the officer elected takes the 
chair, and proceeds in the same manner to complete the 



308 THE QUESTION B(X)K. 

organization of the assembly, by choice of a secretary and 
such other officers, if any, as may be deemed necessary. 

6. It does not, although in all conventions and meetings 
where the people are called together for special purposes, 
no further organization is required; but should a permanency 
be desired, these officers are regarded as temporary, and to 
govern until a permanent organization is obtained and other 
officers elected to take their places. 

7. By referring it to a committee, who report such 
necessary articles for government as may have been sug- 
gested by the assembly, by individuals thereof, or upon their 
own judgment. Such report to be received or rejected, as 
the assembly deem proper. 

8. It is not. A committee is often selected, who, after 
consultation, recommend the election of certain individuals 
as qualified to fill the different offices required. 

9. In organized societies or legislative bodies, president 
or speaker; in political conventions, school meetings, or 
any of the numerous calls for an assembling of the people, 
chairman ; in secret societies, by whatever name adopted by 
that society. 

10. Secretary or clerk. 

11. When the assembling is a call for the whole people, 
all are entitled ; in political conventions or caucuses, those 
who are recognized as electors of that party; in school 
meetings, electors of that school district; in societies or 
associations, those who have been duly elected as members. 

12. Usually by a committee being appointed to examine 
the credentials presented by the different individuals who 
desire to take part in the assembly. 

13. A certificate of qualification. In the Congress of 
the United States, certificates of membership are given by 
the presiding officers of the states where each member is 



PARLIAMENTARY RULES. 



309 



•elected; in the legislatures of states, from the county or 
parish officers, where each member is elected ; in political 
conventions, from state or local authority, according to the 
call. 

14. The proper time for this investigation is after the 
temporary and before the permanent organization, by the 
committee appointed for that purpose. 

15. The committee report the claims, and such persons 
are entitled to a hearing, the matter being left with those 
whose rights of membership are not called in question, to 
decide. 

16. They do not. After being heard, it is their duty to 
withdraw, or if, by the courtesy of the assembly, they are 
permitted to remain, they have no right to further discuss 
or vote upon the subject. 

17. As these officers are to preside over and record the 
proceedings of an assembly, it does not become necessary 
that they shall, in all cases, become members of that assem- 
bly. In legislative bodies, the clerk is seldom, or never, 
a member, and in the senate of the United States, and most 
state senates, the president is not a member. 

18. President, vice-president, secretary and treasurer. 
To these may be added, one or more vice-presidents, one 
or more secretaries, and such other officers or committees as 
the association shall see fit to adopt. 

19. By employing sufficient force to remove such person 
or persons from the meeting. 

20. According to the nature of the subject, either by 
a resolution, order, or vote. When it commands, it is an 
order; the expression of opinions, by a resolution; the result 
of a question decided by the assembly, a vote. 

21. A sufficient number of members for the transaction 
of business. 



3IO THE QUESTION BOOK. 

22. Usually, in councils, legislative bodies or associa- 
tions, rules are established determining this point, but should 
there be no established rules, it requires a njajority of all 
members composing that association, society or assembly. 

23. He should not take the chair until he is satisfied a 
quorum is present ; and should, at any time in the course of 
the proceedings, notice be taken that a quorum is not pres- 
ent, it then becomes the duty of the presiding officer to 
count the members present, and should a quorum be want- 
ing, the assembly must be immediately adjourned. 

24. By a code of rules usually known as a constitution 
and by-laws. 

25. By a prescribed rule as given ; but when there is no 
prescribed rule, it becomes proper for the assembly to act 
at any time upon an amendment the same as in any ques- 
tion, but in the suspension of a rule there must be an 
unanimous consent. 

26. Any member has the right to report such offence 
and require that the presiding officer must enforce the rule 
without debate or delay. 

27. It matters not; so long as one member insists upon 
its execution, it must be done. It is then too late to alter, 
repeal or suspend the rule. 

28. By an amendment at the proper time. 

29. In all the common transactions of the people, a 
majority rules ; but in legislative bodies, on some particular 
questions or subjects, as the entering of the yeas and nays 
upon the records, one-fourth of the members present may 
carry the question, while on other subjects it may require a 
two-thirds vote, as in impeachment trials and the passing of 
laws previously vetoed. 

30. To open the assembly at such time as provided for 
the meeting ; to announce the business necessary to be 



PARLIAMENTARY RULES. 3II 

transacted, in proper order ; to receive and submit all proper 
motions and propositions presented by the members ; to put 
to vote all regular questions that may be presented for action 
and to announce the result ; to enforce order and decorum, 
and to restrain the members, when engaged in debate, from 
the violation of these rules ; to receive all communications, 
and announce them to the assembly ; to sign his name to 
all acts, orders and proceedings of the assembly, when neces- 
sary ; to decide all points of order or practice when called 
upon to do so ; to name the members who are to serve on 
committees when no other provision has been made for their 
appointment ; and in general, to obey the commands of the 
assembly, declare its will, and stand as its representative. 

31. It becomes the duty of the secretary to open the 
meeting and conduct the proceedings until the appointment 
of a president or chairman is made. 

32. He has; the only difference being that he does not 
hold power beyond this part-cular session. 

33. The term applied to any officer appointed to fill, for 
the time being, the place of an absent one. 

34. To state a motion, or put a question, he should rise, 
but may read sitting. 

35. To take note of and record all of the business trans- 
actions of the assembly; but he is not required to take 
minutes of words used in debate, or of things proposed or 
moved without coming to a vote. It is also his duty to read 
all papers or communications ; to call the roll of the assem- 
bly; to notify committees of their appointment and the 
business referred to them ; to sign, if necessary, with the 
president, all acts or orders of the assembly ; and to hold 
and protect all papers and documents, letting none be taken 
from the table without permission of the assembly. 

36. He should stand, unless disabilities should prevent. 



312 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

37. Every member is entitled to the same equal rights in 
the business transactions of the assembly ; he is entitled to 
the respect of all other members while debating, or recom- 
mending any proposition which he may present. It is the 
duty of every member to act the part of a gentleman, in 
manners and language ; to remove his hat upon entering the 
assembly-room, and to avoid, as far as possible, any unnec- 
essary noise and confusion. 

^S. It is the privilege of every member to report such 
conduct, and it is the especial duty of the presiding officer 
to take notice or complain of irregular or improper conduct, 
calling the attention of the assembly to it, naming the indi- 
vidual censured. The member censured is entided to a 
hearing, if he wishes to explain why he has thus conducted 
himself. It is then his duty to withdraw from the assembly, 
unless permission is granted that he should remain, but not 
to take further action, as no man is entided to sit as his own 
judge. 

39. Only those which relate to the rights of that member 
in the assembly, such as being debarred from taking any 
action for a stated time ; expulsion, or any prohibition which 
the assembly may declare. 

40. The member must rise in his place, and, standing 
uncovered, address himself to the presiding officer, by his 
title, who, on being addressed, calls the member by his name, 
by which permission is given to the member to proceed with 
his business. 

41. He should give the floor to the member whose voice 
he first heard. 

42. In such a case, it becomes necessary for the presiding 
officer to refer his decision to a vote of the assembly. If 
decided in the negative, then the name of the member for 
whom the floor was claimed must be acted upon. 



PARLIAMENTARY RULES. 313 

43. They are of two kinds, namely : those which convey 
information of some general character, and those which 
contain request for some action on the part of the assembly. 
The latter form of communications embraces orders, res- 
olutions or votes. 

44. Propositions drawn up by any member and intro- 
duced for action in the assembly. Motions, in all cases, 
must be sanctioned or seconded by another member. 

45. A petition should contain a carefully constructed 
statement of what is desired, and be signed by the petitioner 
himself, except when sickness prevents, or he is attending 
in person ; but in no case should the petitioner state it to 
the assembly, but it should be presented by some member 
to whom it is intrusted for that purpose. 

46. He should inform himself of the nature and sub- 
stance of the petition prepared, and if, in his judgment, it 
contains nothing intentionally disrespectful to the assembly, 
he rises in his place, with the petition in his hand, and 
informs the assem^bly that he has a certain petition, stating 
the substance of it, which he, or some other member, moves 
shall be received. This motion being seconded, the ques- 
tion is put whether the assembly will receive the petition 
or not. 

47. The presiding officer, usually, taking for granted 
that there are no objections to its reception, orders it sent 
up to the clerk, or secretary, and it is then read, by which 
itieans it is brought before the assembly to be disposed of 
as business ; but should objections be made to this deviation, 
the presiding officer must require a motion of reception to 
be regularly made and seconded, or the subject will be 
dropped without further action. 

48. By being immediately considered, or assigned to 



314 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

some future time, or ordered to lie on the table for examina- 
tion and consideration of the members individually. 

49. Not until the members require it. 

CO. He puts it into the form desired, and then moves 
that it be adopted ; after which, if it receives the approba- 
tion, or second, of any member, comes before the assembly 
for action. 

51. By not requiring the motion to be presented in 
writing. If otherwise presented, he is justified in refusing 
to receive it, except for adjournment, to lie on the table,. 
and such motions as are always in the same form. 

52. It does not, and no notice should be taken of it by 
the presiding officer, To this rule exceptions occur, such 
as necessarily require the action of the presiding officer in 
enforcing decorum, or to proceed with any order of the 
assembly. Sometimes a special rule is passed requiring 
more than one second on particular subjects. 

53. After it has been made and seconded, and stated by 
the presiding officer. 

54. He cannot, for it no longer belongs to him ; but by 
special leave of the assembly, when dieted upon as in any 
motion, it can be withdrawn. 

55. Whenever a member desires the motion stated for 
his information, it becomes the duty of the presiding officer 
to observe the request. 

56. Not unless it be one which is previous in its nature 
to the question under consideration, and, consequently, 
entitled to take its place for the time being, and be first 
decided. 

57. When those remarks or suggestions relate to some 
business not yet moved as a question, it is proper to state 
them, but the presiding officer should be careful to check 
and prevent all observations which may tend to excite 



PARLIAMENTARY RULES. 3 1 5. 

debate; it being a general rule that no debate can be allowed 
to take place on any subject, unless there is a question 
pending at the time. 

^8. For this purpose we have: the previous question; 
indefinite postponement ; postponed to some future time ; 
to lie on the table ; or, if the motion is not in a satisfactory- 
form, to refer to a committee. 

59. To adjourn ; to lie on the table ; for the previous 
question; to postpone to a certain day; to commit; to 
amend ; and to postpone indefinitely. These several mo^ 
tions shall have precedence in the order in which they are 
arranged. 

60. A motion intended to suppress debate and bring the 
question to a vote, or to remove it from before the assembly. 
In meaning it is known as s/ia// the main question now be 
put? If the previous question is lost, the question under 
debate is suppressed for the day, but if carried, then the 
question is put immediately, without any further debate. 

61. Either to suppress the motion or to bring it to an- 
immediate vote of the assembly. 

62. The object is to suppress a motion altogether, and 
an indefinite postponement is equivalent to a dissolution. 
The effect of this motion, when carried, is to quash the 
proposition entirely ; if lost, the decision has no effect 
whatever. 

63. AVhen the members individually want more informa- 
tion than they possess, or where there is something else 
which they are desirous of disposing of first. When a 
subject is postponed, it can be taken up at any time when 
it may suit the convenience of the assembly. 

64. Whenever the proposition is defectively framed, and 
it is necessary to have a careful deliberation, the subject is 
referred to a committee, which is called a commitment, or. 



3l6 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

if the subject has been in the hands of a committee, a 
re-commitment. 

65. To follow out the instruction of the assembly. If 
no particular instructions are given, then the committee 
must re-frame according to the spirit of the subject, but 
cannot change the subject by means of an amendment. 

66. Different parts may be committed to different com- 
mittees. 

S'j. To unite to the subject matter of a proposition some 
points or propositions not therein contained. 

6S. When a proposition is composed of two or more 
parts, which are so far independent of each other as to admit 
•of a division into several questions, and it is supposed that 
the assembly will approve of some of these parts, but not all 
of them, a division may then take place by a separate motion 
for that purpose. 

69. It becomes a series of questions, to be considered 
and acted upon, each by itself as an independent matter, in 
the order in which the mover has divided the proposition. 

70. They are the same as any other proposition. 

71. Its points must be so distinct and entire, that if one 
or more of them be taken away, the others may not be 
.affected by the division. 

72. They are presented in regular form, but blank in 
regard to time, number, or amount, which the mover desires 
to be filled by the assembly ; as, the time of postponement, 
the number of which a committee shall consist, the amount 
of fine to be imposed, etc. 

73. The blanks are to be filled by regular motions, and 
are not considered as amendments to the question, but as 
original motions, to be made and decided before the principal 
questions. 

74. They are used whenever a matter presented for action 



PARLIAMENTARY RULES. 3 I 7 

contains more than one proposition, which might be better 
in one; or when a proposition should be separated into 
parts ; or when a paragraph or section requires to be trans- 
posed. But these modes of disposing of a proposition are 
better referred to a committee. 

75. He cannot, the same law controlling the amendment 
as on an original question. 

76. To incorporate the proposed amendment in the 
original motion, and proceed without a separate motion. 

77. In three ways, namely: either by inserting or adding 
certain words; or by striking out certain words; or by 
striking out certain words and inserting or adding others. 

78. Amendments are classified into five rules, known as 
First, Second, Third, Fourth and Fifth. 

79. Rule First: When a proposition consists of sev- 
eral sections, paragraphs, or resolutions, the natural order of 
considering and amending it is, to begin at the beginning 
and take up the paragraphs in the order in which they occur, 
and when a later part has been amended, it is not in order to 
then take up any former part and alter or amend. 

Rule Second : There can be no amendment of an amend- 
ment to an amendment. Whenever a proposed amendment 
to an amendment does not meet the requirements of the 
assembly, notice should be given by the one who desires to 
amend that, if rejected, he shall move again in the form in 
which he desires to have it adopted. 

Rule Third : Whenever a proposed amendment has 
been adopted or rejected by the assembly, the subject in 
question cannot afterwards be altered or amended. In this 
rule, let it be observed that whenever an amendment has 
been voted upon by the assembly, it cannot again be amended ; 
but before the proposed amendment has been brought to a 
vote, it is susceptible to a change, as given in Rule Second. 



3l8 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

Rule Fourth : Whatever amendment is disagreed to by 
the assembly cannot again become a question. 

Rule Fifth: Whenever a proposed amendment is an 
infringement on one already adopted, it is a fit ground for its 
rejection by the assembly, but not for the suppression of it 
by the presiding officer, as being out of order. 

80. The object is to guard against the possibility of the 
presiding officer suppressing an important modification, 
which might embarrass instead of subserving the will of the 
assembly. 

81. The same words, or a part of them, if used with 
other words, and forming a different proposition, can be 
•struck out the same as if no rejection had been made. The 
same is applicable to words that have been struck out and 
restored in connection with other words, providing this prop- 
osition is substantially different from the first. 

82. The presiding officer should put the amendment to 
the amendment first ; then the amendment ; and lasdy, the 
original question as amended. 

S^. As the form is a combination of the other two, it 
may be divided into these two forms by a vote of the assembly. 
If the motion is divided, the question first to be decided is 
on striking out ; if carried, then the question for inserting. 
.Should the question for striking out be lost, then of course 
there can be no question for inserting. When the motion is 
taade to strike out and insert as one question, and the motion 
is lost, the same motion cannot be made again, but it may be 
moved to strike out the same words and insert nothing; to 
insert other words ; to insert the same words with others ; to 
insert a part of the same words with others ; to strike out the 
same words with others, and insert the same ; to strike out a 
part of the same words with others, and insert the same ; 
to strike out other words, and insert the same ; and to insert 



PARLIAMENTARY RULES. 319 

the same words, without striking out anything; providing 
these new propositions are really different from the original 
motion. 

84. As the words struck out, or a part of them, cannot be 
inserted, or the words inserted, or a part of them, cannot be 
struck out, it becomes necessary, if changes are desired, to 
either insert the words struck out, or a part of them, with 
other words ; or to strike out the words inserted, or a part of 
them, with other words. 

85. The passage to be amended should first be read; 
then the words proposed to be struck out ; or inserted ; or 
struck out and inserted ; and lastly, the whole passage as it 
will stand if the amendment is adopted. 

86. It can, although the object of an amendment is for 
improvement ; yet it can be made to destroy. If the assem- 
bly so wills, the bill may be amended by striking out all after 
the enacting clause and inserting an entirely new bill wholly 
different in effect. 

87. There are certain motions or questions which, on 
account of superior importance, are entided to take the place 
of any other subject or proposition then under consideration, 
and should first be acted upon and decided by the assembly. 
These are called Privileged Questions, and are of three 
kinds : firsts motions to adjourn ; second, those that relate to 
the rights and privileges of the assembly or of its members ; 
and, thirdly, motions for the oi-ders of tJie day. 

^Z. It is commonly said that it is always in order, but 
exceptions arise which do not make it so. When the assem- 
bly is voting by the ayes and nays, or a member is speak'.ng, 
it is not in order. 

89. Simply to "adjourn," without the addition of any 
particular day or time. 

90. When it is the object of the motion to supersede a 



320 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

question already proposed, it does not admit of an amend- 
ment ; but when it is made, and there is no other business 
before the assembly, it may be amended like other questions. 

91. At the next regular day, as agreed upon by rule or 
by-laws of the assembly. But the adjournment of a meeting 
not organized for the transaction of business, from time to 
time, is equivalent to a dissolution. 

92. It does not. Such questions must be brought forward 
in the usual way ; but if such question has been stated by 
the presiding ofhcer, it stands before the assembly. 

93. To the rights and privileges of the assembly, or of 
its individual members, such as a disturbance of the assembly 
by members or strangers, or where a quarrel arises between 
two members. The setdement of such rights or privileges 
supersedes the question pending, and must be first disposed 
of. When settled, the question interrupted is to be resumed 
at the point where it was suspended. 

94. When a subject, or different subjects, have been 
assigned for a particular day by an order of the assembly, 
such matter becomes the order of the day. 

95. Whenever a proposition, except to adjourn^ or the 
question of privilege, is presented for the action of the assem- 
bly, that does not relate to the orders of the day^ then a 
motion to proceed with the business ordered will supersede 
the question before the assembly. 

c6. The orders must then be read and gone through 
with in the order in which they stand. Should an order be 
assigned to a particular hour, a motion to proceed to it is 
not a privileged motion until that hour arrives ; but if no 
hour is fixed, the order or orders are for the entire day, and 
every part of it. 

97. It is removed from the assembly the same as an 
interruption by an adjournment, as described in Question 92. 



PARLIAMENTARY RULES. 32 1 

98. They can continue with the business before the 
assembly when interrupted, and are entitled to dispose of it 
before the orders of the day can again be moved. 

99. It no longer becomes an order of the assembly, and 
if acted upon in the future, must come up as any other 
business. 

100. Such as arise out of other questions, and are 
entitled to be decided before the questions which give rise 
to them. 

loi. First^ questions of order; secojid^ motions for the 
reading of papers, etc.; third^ leave to withdraw a motion . 
fourth^ suspension of a rule ; and fifths amendment of an 
amendment. 

102. To enforce the rules and orders of the body over 
which he presides, without question, debate or delay, in all 
cases where it is manifest that there is a breach of order or 
a departure from rule. 

103. Questions may arise in which there is no breach of 
order or violation of rules. Such questions must be decided 
before a case can arise for the enforcement of the rules. 

104. Whenever the decision of the presiding officer is 
not satisfactory, any member can object to it, and have the 
question decided by the assembly. Such a question is 
debatable, and to be decided in the same manner as any 
other question, except that the presiding officer is allowed 
to take part in the debate. 

105. Shall the decision of the chair sta?id as the decision 
of the asse77ibly ? 

106. Where papers are laid before an assembly for its 

action, every member has a right to have them read once at 

the table before he can be compelled to vote upon them. 

When, therefore, a member calls for a reading of the papers, 

no question should be made as to the reading; but where a 
21 



322 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

member desires a repetition of the reading, or of some other 
paper, book or document on the table, or of his own speech 
prepared beforehand in writing, and there is an objection, 
he must obtain leave of the assembly for the reading, by a 
motion and vote of the assembly. 

107. A new question, to decide whether the paper shall 
be read or not, can be made, which takes the place of the 
other, as incidental to it. 

108. It can, by an unanimous vote of the assembly. 

109. When a proposition is debarred from the action of 
the assembly by reason of some special rule, such rule may 
be removed for the time being by a vote, under the head Of 
suspension of a rule^ by which the proposition may be 
admitted. 

no. In most legislative bodies it requires two-thirds or 
three-fourths, according to the code of rules adopted, but if 
no provision is made, there seems to be no other mode of 
suspending or dispensing with a rule, except by general 
consent. 

111. Like other incidental questions, the sub-amendment 
supersedes the amendment until decided. 

112. Those which relate to the principal motion, and 
are made use of to enable the assembly to dispose of it in 
the most appropriate manner. These motions are sometimes 
used to destroy the principal question, and even to dispose 
of one another. 

113. To lie on the table; the previous question; post- 
ponement, either indefinite or to a day certain ; commitment ; 
and amendment. 

114. The previous question, and to lie on the table. 

115. Parliamentary usage has fixed the form of the 
previous question, "Shall the main question now be put?" 
which calls for immediate action ; consequently no change 



PARLIAMENTARY RULES. 323 

can be made. In the question, to lie on the table, usage 
ha§ decided it not susceptible to an amendment, as it is 
already as simple as can be. 

116. It is used whenever the assembly has something 
else before it, which claims its present attention, or when it 
is not desired to act upon it because of the nature of the 
question. It is often a polite way to suppress a subject or 
question offered. 

117. It can be recalled by motion and vote of the 
assembly at such time as it may suit their convenience to 
do so. 

118. It does not. It is only suspended while the sub- 
sidiary question is being acted upon, and must then be 
continued, unless disposed of in some other way. 

1 19. The privileged question, or to lie on the table, will 
supersede it. 

120. As the negative decision is that the main question 
shall not now be put, it is taken out of the possession of 
the assembly for the day, and can receive no further atten- 
tion. 

121. As either indefinite, or to a day certain. 

122. When the postponement is indefinite, it can be 
amended to a day certain ; and when it is to a day certain, 
to some other day; or an amendment to an amendment 
when a different day is desired. 

123. The substituted day may be moved as an inde- 
pendent motion. 

1 24. By the use of the previous question ; or commit ; 
or amend. 

125. When decided in the affirmative, the question is 
then removed from before the assembly, and, consequently, 
there is no ground for the previous question ; but if decided 



324 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

negatively, the question remains to be disposed of as the 
assembly shall declare 

126. By the substitution of one kind of a committee for 
another, or by changing the number of the committee. 

127. To lie on the table. 

128. The amendment question. This motion can be 
superseded by postponement to a day certain, or by a com- 
mitment. 

129. In either case the proposed amendment is not 
suppressed, but referred to a committee for careful delibera- 
tion ; or, in case there was urgent business, a lengthy debate 
might delay ; consequently, the right to postpone to a day 
certain. 

130. In regular order. In "permanent organizations'* 
of an assembly or society, a settled order of business is 
usually adopted, and whatever business is to be transacted 
comes under that order; but in assemblies where no definite 
system has been established, subjects are taken up when 
appropriately presented. 

131. They are left to the discretion of the presiding 
officer, unless the assembly, by action, decide to take up a 
particular subject. 

132. The entire paper should first be read by the secre- 
tary or clerk, then by the presiding officer by paragraph, 
pausing at the end of each distinct article, for amending, if 
desired, and when the whole paper has been gone through 
with in this manner, the presiding officer puts the final 
question on agreeing to or adopting the whole paper, as 
amended or unamended. 

133. It does not. The preamble, or title, is postponed 
until the residue of the paper is gone through with. 

134. The amendments only are first read, in course, by 
the recording officer. The presiding officer then reads the 



PARLIAMENTARY RULES. 325 

first, and puts it to the question, and so on until the whole 
is adopted or rejected, no amendments being made, except 
an amendment to an amendment, until all the amendments 
reported by the committee have been disposed of, when an 
opportunity is offered by the presiding officer to the assem- 
bly for amendments to the boay of the paper ; and when 
the whole has been thus acted upon, the entire paper is put 
to the question on agreeing to or adopting it as the resolu- 
tion, order, etc., of the assembly. 

135. As the order, resolution, etc., of the assembly, and 
not as the report of the committee accepted. 

136. As an amendment, and is to be first amended, if 
necessary, and then put to the question as an amendment 
reported by the committee ; or, the new draft may first be 
accepted as a substitute for the original paper, and then 
treated as such. 

137. Firsts a proposition is moved. 
Seco7id^ a motion to amend. 
Thirds a motion to commit. 

Fourth^ the debate, results in a question for order. 
Fifth^ the question of privilege and rights of mem- 
bers in a debate, etc., is called up. 
Sixths to lie on the table. 

138. The regular course of proceeding requires the 
motion to lie on the table t6 be put first ; if carried, the 
whole is removed from the assembly ; if lost, the question 
of privilege must then be settled ; then the question of order; 
then of commitment — which, if lost, brings us to the ques- 
tion of amendment ; and, lastly, the main question. 

139. After it has been moved and seconded, and pro- 
posed to the assembly by the presiding officer. Until this 
is done, it is not a question before the assembly, to be acted 
upon or considered in any manner. 



326 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

140. A member moves a principal question, and at the 
same time calls for the previous question, or that the resolu- 
tion lie on the table. 

141. To take no notice of the subsidiary question, but 
propose the principal one in the usual manner, thus giving 
members the right of debate, etc., in relation to the subject 
moved. 

142. The right to express his opinions in the discussion 
of the subject under consideration. 

143. He cannot be interrupted, except by a call to order, 
which question being decided, he is entided to be heard 
through. When any matter of privilege affecting the assem- 
bly itself or any of its members, of which the assembly ought 
to have instant information, — such as obstructing the passage- 
way to the hall ; quarreling of members ; or when it becomes 
necessary to have lights, — it gives sufficient cause for inter- 
ruption until the assembly is again in condition to have the 
speaker proceed. 

144. As breaches of order, for no motion can be made 
without rising and addressing the chair, and being recognized 
by the presiding officer. 

145. To the mover of the question, in preference to 
others, if he rises to speak ; also, on resuming a debate after 
an adjournment, to give the floor to the mover of the ad- 
journment, if he desires it. 

146. If he states that he intends to conclude with a 
motion, and informs the assembly what that motion is, he may 
be allowed to proceed ; but if he speaks upon a subject not 
known to be or to become a motion before the house, he is 
liable to be called to a point of order. 

147. To refer to him by some expression or in some 
manner without speaking his name, the object being to guard 
against the possibility of exciting personal feeling. 



PARLIAMENTARY RULES. 327 

148. To sit until the former has been heard. 

149. So long as he has the floor and keeps within the 
rule. 

150. No person is to use indecent language against the 
proceedings of the assembly, or to reflect upon any of its 
prior determinations, unless he means to close his remarks 
with a motion to rescind such determination. No member 
is at liberty to digress from the matter of the question. Every 
member should clearly express his points of argument, or the 
presiding officer may mistake them for a digression. Care 
should be taken in discussion that the speaker should follow 
the particular question, instead of the general question, for at 
one moment it may be an amendment, at another time post- 
ponement, and again on the previous question. 

151. Sometimes it happens that the subsidiary motion 
involves in itself the merits of the original proposition; in 
which case the debate embraces both. 

152. By an affirmative vote of the assembly, he may 
continue, but if no question was made, or if decided in the 
negative, the speaker must abandon the objectional course of 
remarks and return to the subject under debate. 

153. No member can speak more than once to the same 
question, but he may to the same subject as often as it is 
presented in the form of a different question; as, when 
referred to a committee, or when subsidiary or incidental 
questions arise in the course of the debate. This rule applies 
to the technical points of decision, and if enforced will pre- 
vent a member from speaking a second time unless he obtains 
leave of the assembly. 

154. To clear a matter of fact, or explain some material 
part of his speech, but carefully keeping within that line, and 
not falling into the matter itself. 

155. To explain a statement made by a member, but 



328 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

which was not so thoroughly discussed as to give a thorough 
comprehension. 

156. He does not. In yielding the floor he relinquishes 
it altogether. 

157. By the limitation of the time allotted to each speaker; 
by adopting beforehand a special rule in reference to a par- 
ticular subject, which at a specified time shall declare debat- 
ing to cease, and all motions or questions pending in relation 
to it shall be decided. Besides these methods for putting an 
end to an unprofitable or tiresome debate, is the long-used 
previous question. 

158. In permitting every kind of disorder without censure. 

159. By a member or members rising and calling to order, 
the objecting party repeating the words used exactly as he 
conceives them to have been spoken, in order that they may 
be reduced to writing by the recording officer. If the pre- 
siding officer thinks there is no foundation for deciding the 
language disorderly, he will prudently delay giving orders to 
the clerk to record them, until a further expression of the 
assembly, either by vote or calling out, is obtained. 

160. Such censure is not to be recorded, or any action 
taken thereon. 

161. An order is a command of the assembly; a resolu- 
tion expresses the opinions or purposes ; and the term vote 
may be applied to the result of every question decided by 
the assembly. 

162. When the proposition is quite lengthy, as is usual 
with a petition, report, etc., the form in which it is usually 
presented is, "•Shall the petition^ or the report^ be received? " 

163. There being no objection expressed, the formality of 
taking a (}uestion by a vote is dispensed with and the matter 
declared to be accepted, but should any member rise to 
object, the presiding officer shall consider everything that has 



PARLIAMENTARY RULES. 329 

passed as nothing, and at once go back and take the matter 
up in regular form. 

164. "As many as are of the opinio?i thaf — repeating the 
words of the question — "say Aye; as many as are of a differ- 
ent opinion^ say No'' 

165. The members are requested to form a division, either 
in two separate parties, or by rising in their seats, or by roll- 
call. 

166. By a vote from the presiding officer. 

167. It is; but in doing so he may, if he pleases, give hi' 
reasons. 

168. It is not a full question until the negative is reached, 
consequently it is in order for any member to rise and speak, 
make motions for amendments or otherwise, and thus renew 
the debate. In such a case, the question must be put over 
again on the affirmative. 

169. By obtaining the votes of members who were not in 
when the voting commenced ; or those already voting may 
have changed their minds. 

170. Because the question becomes full, both sides being 
acted upon at the same time. 

171. The presiding officer must decide it without debate, 
the act to be subject to revision and correction by the assem- 
bly after the division is over. The presiding officer may, if 
he pleases, receive the advice of members in regard to the 
objection, which they are to give sitting, in order to avoid 
even the appearance of a debate. 

172. Suspend proceedings until a quorum is obtained^ 
whether on the same or some future day, when the question 
must be taken up at that precise point. 

173. A question by which a matter which has been acted 
upon shall again come before the assembly in precisely the 
same condition as it was before being considered. 



330 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

174. Any member, the same as of any other motion, 
although in legislative bodies special rules regulate by whom, 
when, and in what manner ; but where an assembly is subject 
to no special rules concerning it, it is the privilege of any 
member to move a reconsideration. 

175. To bring into shape matters which require thought 
to construct, or investigation, or any business which cannot 
be as conveniently transacted in the assembly session as 
outside. 

176. It depends upon the general authority and particular 
instruction given them by the assembly at the time of their 
appointment. A vote taken in committee is as binding as a 
vote of the assembly. A committee has full power over what 
may be committed to it, except that it is not at liberty to 
change the title or subject. 

177. They are: Select^ Standings and Couunittee of the 
Whole. 

178. First decide upon the number of which the commit- 
tee is to be composed. The number being settled, there are 
three modes of selecting the members, to wit : appointing by 
the presiding officer; by ballot; and by nomination and vote 
of the assembly. 

179. The same as in other elections, and are elected 
singly or all together, as may be ordered. 

180. The names of the members proposed are put to the 
question, singly, and are approved or rejected by the assem- 
bly, by a vote taken in the usual way. 

181. That none be appointed who are directly opposed 
to. the body of that subject, but rather those who are sup- 
posed to approve it. 

182. To make out a list of the members, together with 
a certified copy of instructions under which they are to act, 
and to give the papers to the person first named on the 



PARLIAMENTARY RULES. 33 1 

committee, if convenient, but, if otherwise, to any other 
member of the committee. 

1S3. Usually he is the first person named on the com- 
mittee, but this is a matter of courtesy, every committee 
having the right to select its own chairman, who presides 
over it, and makes the report of its proceedings to the 
assembly. 

184. When and wherever the members of the committee 
shall decide. But if directions have been given by the 
assembly, they cannot regularly sit at any other time or 
place than in accordance with instructions. Sometimes 
these instructions are to sit immediately and make its report 
forthwith, but no committee has a right to sit while the 
assembly is in session, unless so ordered. 

185. Without some particular number has been desig- 
nated by the assembly, a majority constitutes a quorum for 
business. 

186. The committee is closed, and cannot act without 
being newly directed to sit. 

187. They must be written down and reported to the 
assembly for its consideration. A committee cannot punish 
disorderly conduct of any kind, but must report it. 

188 Where a paper is referred to a committee, they 
proceed to the question of amendment, while a paper 
originating with them may be amended, as in the case of 
a paper referred, but at the close the question is put on the 
whole, for agreeing to the paper as amended or unamended. 

189. They cannot. If in their judgment it cannot be 
made good by amendments, they have no authority to reject, 
but must report it back to the assembly and there make 
their opposition as individual members. 

190. It should be in a clear draft, fairly written, without 
erasure or interlining. 



332 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

151. They are not at liberty to erase, interline, blot, 
disfigure or tear it in any manner, but must report all amend- 
ments in a separate paper, stating the exact parts to be 
amended and the words to be inserted. If the amendments 
agreed to are very numerous and minute, they may report 
them all together in the form of a new draft. 

192. It is moved and voted upon that the committee 
rise, and that the chairman, or some other member, makes 
their report to the assembly. 

193. The chairman or member appointed to make the 
report, rises in his place and informs the assembly that the 
committee to whom was referred such a subject or paper 
have, according to order, had the same under consideration, 
and have directed him to make a report thereon, which he 
is ready to do when the assembly shall please. The person 
offering the report, or any other member, can then move 
that the report be now received. The assembly then decide 
whether it will receive the report at that time, or fix upon 
some time in the future for its reception. 

194. At the time when, by the order of the assembly, 
the report is to be received, the chairman reads it in his 
place, and then delivers it, together with all the papers 
connected with it, to the clerk or secretary, where it is again 
read, and then lies on the table until it suits the convenience 
of the assembly to take it up for consideration. 

195. The chairman reads the amendments in their con- 
nection with the paper, showing the alterations, and the 
reasons of the committee for so doing; while in the reading 
of the report at the clerk's table the amendments only are 
read. 

196. It is usually dispensed with, although, if any objec- 
tion is made, or if the presiding officer sees any informality 



PARLIAMENTARY RULES. 333 

in the report, he should dedine receiving it without a motion 
and vote. 

197. By being printed, and each member given a copy; 
by which means the reading of such papers by the clerk 
becomes unnecessary. 

1 98. When the report has been made and received, the 
committee is dissolved, and can act no more without a new 
power; but if the report is not received the committee is not 
thereby discharged, but may be ordered to sit again, and a 
time and plac-e appointed accordingly. 

199. When any subject has once been in the hands of a 
committee, and the report made upon it is not satisfactory 
to the assembly, it may again be committed to the same, or 
another committee, by which act it is known as recommitted. 

200. None whatever, the whole question being again 
before the committee as if nothing had passed there in 
relation to it. 

201. In three different forms, namely: Firsf^ it may 
contain merely a statement of facts, opinion or reasoning, 
in relation to the subject of it, without any general conclu- 
sion ; second^ by a statement of facts, etc., with a general 
conclusion ; thirds by resolution, or a general conclusion, 
without any introductory part. 

202. When the report is accepted it is adopted, as though 
it was originally done by the assembly without the services 
of a committee. 

203. They do, although the term " accepting " should 
be used when the report contains merely a statement of 
facts, reasoning or opinion; and the term "adopting," 
when the report concludes with resolutions or propositions. 

204. The whole assembly resolved into a committee. 

205. When the time arrives for the committee to sit, the 
presiding officer puts the question, then made, that the 



334 THE QUESTION BOOK. 

assembly do now resolve itself into a committee of the 
whole, to take under consideration such a matter, — naming 
it. If this question is decided in the affirmative, he declares 
the result, and names some member to act as chairman of 
the committee ; if objections are made, then by nomination 
and vote. The elected chairman takes a seat (not in the 
chair of the assembly) at the secretary's table, and the pre- 
siding officer takes a seat elsewhere, like any other member. 

206. The same number as constitutes a quorum in the 
assembly. 

207. On motion, the chairman rises, and the presiding 
officer thereupon resumes the chair. The chairman then 
informs the assembly of the cause of the dissolution of the 
committee, but can make no report of business transacted. 

208. In legislative bodies, it becomes the duty of the 
assistant clerk, 

209. The same as in any committee, the report to the 
assembly, only, to be recorded in the journal of the assembly. 

210. In the committee of the whole the previous ques- 
tion cannot be moved ; it cannot adjourn ; every member 
may speak as often as he pleases, providing he can obtaiii 
the floor ; it cannot refer any matter to another committee ; 
the presiding officer of the assembly has a right to take 
part in the proceedings, the same as any other member ; 
and in cases of a breach of order, the committee cannot 
punish offenders, but must write down and report to the 
assembly. 

211. To move that the committee rise ; and if it is appre- 
hended that the same discussion will be attempted on 
returning again into committee, the assembly can discharge 
the committee, and proceed itself with the business. 

212. A move should be made that the committee rise, 
report progress, and ask leave to sit again. If the motion 



PARLIAMENTARY RULES. 



335 



prevails, the presiding officer resumes the chair of the 
assembly, and the chairman informs him that the committee 
have, according to order, made some progress thereon, but, 
for want of time, ask leave for the committee to sit again. 
The presiding officer thereupon puts the question, by which 
the committee is given leave to sit again, and the time is 
also designated when the assembly will again resolve itself 
into a committee. If the request is not granted, the com- 
mittee is dissolved. 

213. A committee appointed by a committee for the 
purpose of expediting their business. 

214. By general consent, it is. If the assembly are 
ready to receive it at the time, they cry out, '' Now, now;" 
if not ready, some other time is proposed, as "To-morrow," 
or *' Monday," and that is fixed by general consent, but 
any objection necessitates an agreement by a motion and 
vote. 

215. He should give the closest attention to the pro- 
ceedings of the assembly, and especially to what is said by 
every member who speaks. By so doing, confusion will be 
prevented, offensive language checked, and harmony ob- 
tained. Much depends upon the presiding officer for a 
careful, just and thorough transaction of the business of the 
assembly. His attention, interest, and impartial acts, inspire 
confidence, create union of feeling, and impress upon each 
member the necessity of legislation for the benefit of all. 



Participles and Infinitives 
Made Kasy. 



QUESTIONS. 

1. What construction have Infinitives and Participles? 

2. When has an infinitive the construction of a noun? 

3. Illustrate by example. 

4. When has the infinitive the construction of an 
adjective ? 

5. Give examples. 

6. "When has the infinitive the construction of an adverb ? 

7. Give examples. 

8. Have infinitives case? 

9. Has the infinitive always a subject ? 

10. What is the subject of ^'■io go^* in "/ wished to go 
home''' ? 

11. In what case is the subject of the infinitive.? 
13. Has the participle always a subject? 

13. In what case is the subject of the participle? 

1 4. What is the rule for the construction of participles? 

15. In the sentence, "To be honest with you, I was in 
error," parse "/^ be^ 



PARtrCIPLES AND iNKINl'IIVES. 33^ 

16. In what manner do we determine whether the 
infinitive has the construction of the noun, or the adjective, 
or the adverb ? 

17. How do we determine what is the subject of the 
infinitive, when that is not apparent, as in " He was eager 
to depart?" 

18. In the sentence, "To die is gain," what is the subject 
of ''to die''? 



Participles and Infinitives 
Made Easy. 



ANSWERS TO QUESTIONS. 



1. All Infinitives and Participles have the construction 
and use of the noun, or the adjective, or the adverb. 

2. When used as subject of a verb, or in apposition with 
a noun; as a noun in the absolute case; as the object of a 
verb or preposition. 

3. To play is natural. Real labor^ to do good, is con- 
ducive to happiness. To lie^ oh how base ! They love to 
hiii^^h. What went ye out for to see? 

4. When used to limit or modify the meaning of a noun. 

5. A desire to play is natural. lie gave orders to march. 
This rule is to be observed — adjective in predicate. This 
to-be-obserred rule is, or exists. 

6. When used to limit the meaning of a verb, adjective, 
adverb, or other infinitive. 

7. They came tD see; i. e., for the purpose of seeing. 
They were anxious to ^o. That horse is strong enough to 
draw any load. I wish to go to town to trade to-day. 

8. They have not. Case belongs alone to nouns and 
pronouns. 

9. It has, but not always expressed. 



PARTICIPLES vVND INFINITIVES. 339 

10. The subject of " to go'" is " I," understood ; the 
meaning evidently is, I wished that I might go home. 

11. In the objective case, except when its subject is, or 
refers to, the same person or thing as the subject of the 
finite verb, or when tlie subject is any word but a noun or 
pronoun. 

12. It has, either expressed or imphed. 

13. Usually in the possessive case; sometimes in the 
objective; as: There 'is no harm in children's playing by 
the river (subj. poss.). There is no harm in children play- 
ing by the river (subj. obj.).* 

14. It is used in all cases like the infmitive. 

15. To be : verb; irreg., intrans., act., pres., infin., with 
the construction of an adverb limiting the verb confess, 
understood — [I confess] (in order) to be honest, etc. 

16. First, and mainly, by the sense or meaning; when 
the infinitive has the construction of an adverb, the words 
*•'■ in order ^^ can be placed immediately before the infinitive 
without destroying the sense; as: They came [in order] to 
see. When it has the construction of an adjective it can 
be changed to its present participle, placed immediately 
before the word it lim.its and make good sense ; as : He 
asked for money to spend, i. e., spending-money. I want 
a place to study, i. e. studying-place. 

17. Change the infinitive to its equivalent subordinate 
clause, and the subject will appear. He was eager to depart^ 
i. e., that he might depart. He is the subject. Be so good 
as to go, i. e., that you should go. John was told not to go^ 
i. e., that yohn should not go. 

18. Person, understood. Expanded, That any person 
should die is gain. 

* There is much dispute about this ; many chiiraing that the possessive pro- 
noun " their," understood, is the subject of " playing,'' in the second sentence. 



INDEX 



Preface, . . . . . 
Questions on United States History, 
Answers to Questions on United States History 
Questions on Geography, 
Answers to Questions on Geography, . 
Questions on Grammar, 
Answers to Questions on Grammar, . 
Questions on Written Arithmetic, . 
Answers to Questions on Written Arithmetic, 
Questions on Reading, .... 
Answers to Questions on Reading, 
Questions on Orthography, . . . , 
Answers to Questions on Orthography, 
Questions on Civil Government, 
Answers to Questions on Civil Government, 
Questions on Physiology, 
Answers to Questions on Physiology, . 
Questions on Physical Geography, 
Answers to Questions on Physical Geography, 
Questions on Writing, .... 
Answers to Questions on Writing, 
Questions on Parliamentary Rules, 
Answers to Questions on Parliamentary Rules, 
Infinitives and Participles Made Easy — Questions, 
" " " " " Answers, 



Page. 

3 

5 

25 

73 

99 

139 

H7 

161 

165 
174 
176 
180 
188 
203 
209 
219 
227 
249 

258 
283 

287 
293 
307 
336 
33^ 



,G^^ 



0' 






>v '* 



*-^ -'■*. 









^-.'^^ '- 



^* .x^^^--^^ 






^0 o^ 



^^. 



;;^' 


•r 


'^/>. 

■^c^. 


^x. 






.%. 


' 





.^^ -^^^ 









■/•, a\ 



'% ^' 



■^■■i' 
.^> -^s. 



•%.%^ 



.1^. 






.-^^ 



xO 



■ xN^^' 









.^^' 



.'^"^'^r.s 



.^ 



vOo. 



'^^ 



v^^ '^t. 



% 



.^•^' 



